diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/55208-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55208-0.txt | 8197 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8197 deletions
diff --git a/old/55208-0.txt b/old/55208-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 42d5505..0000000 --- a/old/55208-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8197 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 04, July 1884, No. 10, by -The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Chautauquan, Vol. 04, July 1884, No. 10 - -Author: The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -Editor: Theodore L. Flood - -Release Date: July 26, 2017 [EBook #55208] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1884 *** - - - - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - - THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - - _A MONTHLY MAGAZINE DEVOTED TO THE PROMOTION OF TRUE CULTURE. - ORGAN OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE._ - - VOL. IV. JULY, 1884. No. 10. - - - - -Chautauqua Literary and Scientific Circle. - - -_President_—Lewis Miller, Akron, Ohio. - -_Superintendent of Instruction_—Rev. J. H. Vincent, D.D., New Haven, Conn. - -_Counselors_—Rev. Lyman Abbott, D.D.; Rev. J. M. Gibson, D.D.; Bishop H. -W. Warren, D.D.; Prof. W. C. Wilkinson, D.D. - -_Office Secretary_—Miss Kate F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. - -_General Secretary_—Albert M. Martin, Pittsburgh, Pa. - - - - -Contents - -Transcriber’s Note: This table of contents of this periodical was created -for the HTML version to aid the reader. - - The White House 557 - Sunday Readings - [_July 6_] 560 - [_July 13_] 560 - [_July 20_] 560 - [_July 27_] 561 - Growth 561 - Tenement House Life in New York 561 - The Cañons of the Colorado 564 - The Courts of Three Presidents 566 - Astronomy of the Heavens - For July 569 - For August 570 - For September 570 - Rise Higher 571 - Landmarks of Boston in Seven Days 572 - Vanishing Types 577 - The Council of Nice 580 - Sonnet on Chillon 582 - An Ocean Monarch 582 - Eccentric Americans - IX.—A Pioneer Eccentric Woman 584 - The Imperial College in Peking 587 - Eight Centuries with Walter Scott 589 - Alaska—Its Missions 592 - Our Naval Force 595 - The Coming Summer Meetings at Chautauqua 597 - Going to Europe 598 - C. L. S. C. Work 600 - The C. L. S. C. Course for 1884-’85 600 - Local Circles 601 - C. L. S. C. Testimony 606 - Editor’s Outlook 607 - Editor’s Note-Book 610 - Talk About Books 612 - - - - -THE WHITE HOUSE. - -By MRS. PATTIE L. COLLINS. - - -When Washington was in its infancy, and the patriots of that early day -bethought themselves of the propriety of building a residence for the -President, it was with some difficulty that they could decide what it -should be called. In truth, this seemed a more serious question than -location, expense, or architecture. Anything that suggested monarchies -or kingdoms, such as the word “palace,” could not be entertained; not a -trace of the effete despotisms of the Old World should be tolerated, even -in our nomenclature. At last “Executive Mansion” was settled upon as a -proper title. Any gentleman, provided it was sufficiently pretentious, -might style his house a “mansion,” and the chosen executor of laws for -the nation was not therefore set apart and above his fellow countrymen, -when installed as chief magistrate. In the course of a few years, when -only its blackened walls were left standing as mute witnesses that our -British cousins still loved us, so much paint was required to efface the -marks of the destroyer, when it was restored, that it gleamed white as -snow in the distance, and naturally, nay almost inevitably, came to be -called the “White House” by popular consent. And by this pretty, simple -name the home of the Presidents will doubtless continue to be known as -long as republican institutions endure. It is as different as possible in -external appearance from the habitations of royalty in European cities; -no iron-barred windows, better fitted for a fortress than ordinary -outlook, no gloomy, gray walls, chilly and forbidding, frowning down upon -you, no squalid tenements thronged with degraded specimens of humanity -press upon its outskirts to accentuate the beauties of the one and the -miseries of the other. Instead of this, the White House rises fair and -inviting from an elevation which seems just sufficient to bring it into -relief as a conspicuous feature of the landscape. Its north front looks -toward Pennsylvania Avenue, commanding a view of Lafayette Square—itself -a most interesting spot, containing the celebrated equestrian statue of -Jackson, by Clark Mills, and grouped about it the cannon captured at the -battle of New Orleans—while around it stand some of the many historic -residences of the capitol. To the east and west of the President’s -grounds, respectively, may be seen the Treasury, and the War, State -and Navy Departments; the southern aspect is the most charming of all; -flowers, trees and emerald lawn, with the music of falling water make up -a picture as bewildering in loveliness as it is arcadian in simplicity, -its boundary line being the Potomac, shining in the distance like a bit -of blue sea, but disfigured by no great iron hulks or other sea monsters; -only a modest little excursion steamer, now and then a tall three-masted -schooner lazily rocking and glancing skyward, impatient to set sail. - -With these surroundings a President must be singularly oblivious to -the voices of nature, art and patriotism if he does not find about his -temporary abode everything to minister to his higher nature. - -At present, on Wednesdays, Thursdays and Saturdays, the President usually -receives from twelve to one o’clock; Tuesday and Friday are Cabinet days, -and Monday he claims as absolutely his own. Of course if a Secretary, -Senator or Representative should present himself upon urgent business, -that would not admit of delay, the rule would be violated, but not -otherwise. - -The official etiquette of the White House remains about the same from -generation to generation, but the social regime varies very much, -according to the tastes of the temporary occupants. If, by a combination -of fortuitous circumstances, an unpretending woman of limited education -and provincial habits finds herself suddenly thrust into a position -for which she is wholly unprepared by previous training, she fills it -more or less acceptably, as she has tact and adaptability. These seem -qualities which have not of late years been conspicuously characteristic -of the “first ladies” of the land, no matter what their previous station; -unless, indeed, an exception be made in favor of a certain beautiful -woman, who was herself a more priceless treasure than any the White House -contained. - -A visitor going for the first time to the White House would suppose at -a casual glance that it was a gala day, and all the world was thronging -thither. It is rather surprising to learn that it is always the same. -There are fine ladies and gentlemen who come in great state, foreigners -of all nations, rustics from the depths of the forest, the perfectly -blasé, the ignorant clown, the ubiquitous, irrepressible American -child—all running rampant over the President’s house. Perhaps it would -be just as well to go back to the very beginning, when this surging -crowd presents itself at the main entrance. Few, fortunately, make the -mistake of the intoxicated straggler who found his way into the grounds, -and perceiving the three harmless gilded shells used in the way of very -questionable ornamentation in front of the mansion, thus accosted a -door-keeper: “Old man in?” Receiving only a look of dazed inquiry by way -of reply, he continued, “Old ten per cent. money bags, I say?” At this -juncture it dawned upon the official, so far as his sense of shocked -dignity permitted him to receive any impression, that this besotted -wretch actually supposed himself at a pawnbroker’s shop! But a much -prettier story than this can be told of these empty shells: Formerly the -birds built their nests in them, and now that the holes have been filled -so that they can not, they yet come and perch and twitter and circle -around their former dwelling-place. - -Eight persons are required to stand guard at the entrance; not all -at once, but to alternate and keep a sufficient number on duty. An -imperative necessity has drawn the line of demarcation for White House -sight-seers. Entering the hall they are ushered at once into the East -Room, and having inspected it to their heart’s content, return by the -same way they came, unless choosing to ascend to the waiting room on -the second floor, and risk an opportunity of seeing the President. In -this case, to a student of human nature a rare opportunity for study is -presented. Hardened, chronic office-seekers, schemers, conscienceless -plotters, shabby women, forlorn, dismal, nay, often heart-broken, pert, -self-assured youth, and even the small boy, with ragged jacket, one -illy-adjusted suspender and rusty shoes walks in with an air that could -only have been begotten by the consciousness that he was a part of the -republic. Much patience brings the vigil of each to a close, and if the -business be simply to shake hands with the President, that ceremony -is speedily accomplished. At present it would be something like this: -Entering as other people go out (for the other people are always there, -going out before you, and coming in after you), a tall gentleman, very -grand and very dignified, quite like a gigantic icicle—but no, that -comparison is derogatory—let us say like Pompey’s Pillar—stands Chester -A. Arthur. He glances at your card mechanically, he takes you by the hand -most indifferently, and in an inexpressible broad voice, without a single -inflection, he says, “It is a very pleasant day.” You may say that you -are charmed to have an opportunity to pay your respects to Mr. President, -or any such nonsense that comes uppermost, but it is not of the least -consequence what you say, or whether you say anything at all. That is -all, and you may salaam yourself out of the side door. - -The East Room is used for all public receptions. It is of noble -proportions, eighty feet in length by forty in width, and twenty-two in -height. It was originally intended as a banqueting hall, but the first -authentic account of its use was that Dolly Madison found it an excellent -place for drying clothes. Under its present aspect it would scarcely -appear to be well adapted to that purpose. A rich carpet of those soft -tints that seem to melt into each other covers the floor. The walls -and ceiling are all white and gold; glancing into the immense mirror -you find it reproduces an endless vista of panels and columns lost in -space. The windows are draped with lace curtains, and in warm weather -the breeze comes up fresh and sweet direct from the river, blowing them -about at will—just as it does the curtains of other people! But something -else happens to these curtains, too, that is not so pleasant, and from -which other people’s, as a rule, are exempt. But a short time since an -employe of the White House called my attention to the fact that here -and there a figure had been entirely cut out by a souvenir-thief. This -apartment, as well as several others in the mansion, has been recently -done over by Tiffany, and greatly improved; it has now very much the -appearance in general effect of the “Gold Salon” of the Grand Opera House -in Paris. It contains only two pictures; one of Washington, purchased -as the original, by Gilbert Stuart, but of doubtful authenticity, and -the Martha Washington painted in 1878 by Andrews, an Ohio artist. This -latter shows the same refined, high-bred features that even the crudest -representation of her portrays, and the flowing train and satin petticoat -are quite regal. The dress was copied from a Parisian costume made for -a New York lady to wear at the Centennial tea party in Philadelphia in -1876, and purports to be an exact reproduction, but with a not unusual -nineteenth century skepticism, I confess that I boldly decline the sleeve -as an anachronism, and leaving the queenly robe out of the question, do -not hesitate to say that in my opinion the hand was borrowed—perhaps -from a Greek statue. Certainly it is not the strong right hand which -accomplished the prodigious amounts of spinning, weaving, and the like, -usually ascribed to this wonderful matron; but it is a tiny, symmetrical, -extremely pretty hand, in the delineation of which the artist was -probably true to his instincts rather than history, and in consideration -of the happy result, the departure from fact to fancy deserves to be -condoned. - -The Green Room, which derives its name from the prevailing color of -its decoration, is next in order to the East Room. It contains a -portrait of Mrs. Hayes, by Hunt, in an elaborate wooden frame, carved -and presented by young ladies from the Cincinnati School of Design; it -represents luscious bunches of grapes and graceful foliage, a design -which, it has been sarcastically observed, in this connection is -singularly inappropriate—since it wreathes the very high priestess of -temperance like the fabled bacchanalian god. There are also crystal -vase of exquisite workmanship, selected by Mrs. Lincoln, a grand piano, -costly cabinets and candelabra, and a bronze clock which is said to be -a little childish about keeping time. That is to say, it will do well -enough for presidential and diplomatic time, but not for running trains -on single track. It was presented by Napoleon to Lafayette, and by him -to Washington. Another much-prized antique is a claw-footed round table -of mahogany, inlaid with brass, and known to be at least one hundred and -seventy years old. A cover almost envelops it, quite hiding its rich -color and fine polish; the reason for this being that once upon a time a -vandal borrowed some of the brass ornamentation and forgot to return it. - -The Blue Room is very much prettier than its title is suggestive. It is -here that foreign ministers present their credentials. The furniture, -with its gilded framework, and upholstered in a silk damask of blue and -gold, is in harmony with the curtains, the carpets, and the decorated -ceiling. It is oval in form and the general effect is very beautiful, -especially by gas-light. - -The Red Parlor is used for general receptions, both by the President and -the ladies of the household. This was the last room occupied by Lincoln -in the White House. He left it on that fateful 14th of April, accompanied -by Mrs. Lincoln and Speaker Colfax. The tiled mantel represents the -style of 1200; this also is some of the high art—Tiffany decoration. And -in truth the entire furnishing shows a singular, but not inharmonious, -conglomeration. The candlesticks, dating back to Monroe’s time, the gold -pitcher and bowl presented by Elkington & Co., of London, after the -Centennial, a wonderful screen embroidered in silk and beads, from the -Austrian Government during Grant’s administration, vases from France, -upon whose delicate surface are portrayed the conviction and sentence -of Charlotte Corday, a curious cabinet, of which the entire front is -formed of brass tacks and pin heads, and many other things, but the most -interesting and probably the most highly prized is the clock used by -Lincoln in his private office during the war. A portfolio of engravings, -a pot of flowers, and a single book occupy a small table. It is a -refreshing oasis, a glimpse of something real and altogether home-like, -that rests one after so much overpowering richness and antiquity combined. - -The State Dining Room is furnished in green. The heavy curtains with -bright borders and lambrequins are themselves pretty enough to excuse -their shutting off the river view. The table will seat forty persons -as it is, but when arranged in the form of a cross, fifty-four. Only -three state dinners are ordinarily given during a season, but nine were -interspersed through the last. A sideboard contains wine glasses of every -shape, size and description. Some one laughingly explained his by saying: -“You know when the little friends of the President’s daughter come to see -her, he likes for them to have a real good time, and these are for their -dolls’ tables.” - -Apropos of the wine question, a colored employe, seeing a visitor taking -a copious draught of ice-water just within the vestibule, and return from -his explorations through the East Room soon after, complaining of being -sick, exclaimed in a triumphant voice: “Boss, I tole you dat stuff wuz -only fit to wash clothes in.” Turning to me he added, “Dat’s so, missus, -’cept to cool your head when you got a ra’al bad headache, and can’t git -no cabbage leaves to wrap ’round it.” - -It is said to be quite a general impression that the expense of state -dinners is borne by the government. This is not true, and President -Arthur keeps his own horses, coachman, and cook. - -The table is ornamented by a center-piece for flowers, the bottom of -which represents a miniature lake, and mirrors the floral beauties above -and around it. The President’s chair is on one side, at the middle. -In speaking of this I am reminded of a young American girl, who, like -myself, was upon a certain occasion being shown through one of the -numerous abodes of a crowned head. Entering the _salon_ in which foreign -ambassadors were received, we perceived that the throne chair stood upon -a sort of dais which was entirely covered with superb crimson velvet. -This adventurous little spirit inadvertently let fall a profane footstep -upon the sacred fabric, when she was immediately reprimanded in an awful -voice and solemnly admonished to keep a respectful distance. Proceeding -further in this princely residence, we reached the dining room. The -king’s chair, like our President’s, stood in the middle, and unlike it -was of entirely different and of more elaborate workmanship than the -others. Whilst the extremely loyal and obsequious attendant was looking -in another direction, young America silently and swiftly drew out the -chair from its place and seated herself with a comical assumption of -dignity that was very amusing, a perilous position, which even she was -not audacious enough to maintain more than a few seconds. - -A door from the dining room leads directly to the conservatory, a perfect -wonderland of perfume and color. It seems as if all the wealth of Flora -had been gathered here; forests of ferns, banks of azaleas, roses in -endless profusion and variety, and priceless exotic children of the -tropics without number. One stands almost breathless with admiration -before the exquisite orchids; and here is a plant with thick, polished -leaves, heavy clusters of scentless blossoms, from the southern coast of -Africa, named for its discoverer, Prof. Rudgea, while not far off the -medinella waves slowly and sadly its long red clusters, as if sighing for -its native Japan. Ensconced here and there are receptacles for goldfish, -and even a coral bank is to be discovered among the drooping ferns and -falling water. It is difficult to come away from these fairy regions to -prosaic places, but there is another nook near by into which prying eyes -must peep, and after all the transition is not so very trying, since it -is into the family dining room, which is a charming picture in itself. - -There is something so attractive in this warm, bright looking spot, that -I must confess to a fascination here stronger than that inspired by the -tiles, mosaics and bric-a-brac found elsewhere. Perhaps every feminine -heart is sensitive to the dainty beauty of china, cut glass, and richly -chased vessels of silver and gold, but the most unsusceptible would be -moved to warmer enthusiasm over the set of Limoges faience, manufactured -by the order of Mrs. Hayes. It consists of five hundred pieces, -representing the fauna and flora of America, and each is a delicious -study, bearing the impress of true artistic skill. The designs were all -made by Mr. Theodore Davis, whose studio is upon one of the most romantic -portions of the New Jersey coast. There, in his happy home, surrounded -by wife, children and mother, far removed from the turmoil of the outer -world, and borrowing inspiration from sea, sky and air, he labors, and -sends forth the admirable results to an appreciative people. This china -is a rich legacy to the White House families. - -The grand corridor is hung with portraits of former Presidents; that -portion of it from which the private stairway ascends is cut off for -the exclusive use of the household. A marvelous light falls through the -western window upon the cabinets with their treasures, the many flowering -plants and inviting easy chairs. But even here history must intrude; -a marble table of hexagon shape is said to have been the property of -General Jackson, and tradition asserts that broken places here and there -in the smooth surface are the traces of his seal ring when his hand was -brought down with that terrible emphasis peculiar to him on certain -occasions. - -The elevator which was put in for “Grandma Garfield,” she never returned -to the White House to use. The dreariest place, perhaps, under the roof, -is the shabby, forlorn little cloak room, in which Minister Allen fell -dead last January a year ago, at the New Year’s reception. - -It is not an uninteresting spectacle, to stand just within the vestibule -on Cabinet day, and observe the arrival of the nation’s arbiters, -sandwiched between the throng. Perhaps a slight murmur is heard, and -strangers turn toward the entrance. It might be a pleasant-faced -countryman in his plain black clothes, but instead it is the Honorable -Secretary of the Interior. Next, a stylish coupé, with an iron-gray -horse, from which Postmaster-General Gresham and his chief clerk alight. -The Postmaster-General is in the stalwart prime of life. He is tall and -commanding, with strongly marked features. Immediately following him is -a British tourist, with a glass screwed in his eye, who pauses to ask, -before entering the East Room, “What do you call that cold-looking place -there?” Then the Spanish Minister enters and passes so slowly up the -stairway that one is involuntarily reminded of the inevitable _manana_ -(to-morrow) of his people, not one of whom has ever been in a hurry since -the beginning of time. No matter what the service required of these -children of the sun, unless a compelling power supplements the order, -“_Manana, manana_,” is the response. - -Another carriage rattles over the pavement, and a pale, spare man, with -a white fringe under his chin, and close cropped hair, with a mysterious -gloom upon his countenance, and bent, as if, like Atlas, he upbore the -world upon his shoulders—passes with such an air as has never been known -outside of the State Department. There they all have it in greater -or less degree, messengers, clerks, and assistant secretaries. It is -indescribable, but it is admirable. Even the high-stepping bay horses -appear to be distinctly conscious of their position. - -Next in order comes Attorney-General Brewster, who is without doubt the -most gorgeous man in Washington. I say gorgeous advisedly. He wears an -immense expanse of buff vest, a dark necktie, illuminated by a pin of -diamonds clustering around a ruby center, light drab pantaloons, and lace -ruffles about his wrists. - -Secretary Folger has the aristocratic appearance which is the legitimate -birthright of those wonderful old Nantucket families and their -descendants. I need not ask you to pause longer at the entrance; the -other notabilities are out of town to-day. - -But after all its artistic finish, its rich decoration, the luxury -apparent at a glance, there is a sense of something lacking in this -grand habitation. All of these fine apartments leave the impression that -they are mere show-places, not the habitual resorts of a family. One -of my pet theories is that people’s houses always look like them—they -transfer a portion of their personality to everything with which they -come habitually into contact. Well, this is nobody’s home; it belongs to -the government, and is illustrative of the national wealth and taste, -but of no individual peculiarities. The question has often been debated -of erecting another residence, which shall literally be the President’s -home, while the present mansion shall be devoted exclusively to public -receptions and official affairs. Then, and not till then, will the Chief -Magistrate taste occasional immunity from outside trespassers, and enjoy -a well earned repose. - - * * * * * - - Angel of Patience! sent to calm - Our feverish brows with cooling palm; - To lay the storms of hope and fear, - And reconcile life’s smile and tear; - The throbs of wounded pride to still, - And make our own our Father’s will!—_Whittier._ - - - - -SUNDAY READINGS. - -SELECTED BY THE REV. J. H. VINCENT, D.D. - - -[_July 6._] - -It is true that the task which God lays upon us all is the same—the -unceasing surrender of their own wishes to the higher aims which he -successively sets before them. But with men of passionate temperament and -selfish habits, who are therefore at every turn exposed by circumstances -to violent temptation, their natural wishes are, for the most part, so -obviously sinful that, though the struggle of renouncing them may be -hard, the duty of doing so is clear and pressing. And when such turn to -God, their falls in attempting the Christian walk are often frequent -enough, or at least their battles with temptation severe enough, to -teach them the evil and weakness of their own heart. With men, on the -other hand, of calm, pure and affectionate disposition, and trained in -conscientious habits, so many of their wishes are for things harmless, -or even good in themselves, that it is less easy to see why and how they -are to be given up. Such men, just, kindly, and finding much of their -own happiness in that of others, live, for the most part, in harmonious -relations with those around them, and have little to disturb their -consciences beyond the fear of falling short in the path of duty on -which they have already entered. But they are exposed to many perils, -more insidious, because less startling, than those which beset their -more fiercely tempted brethren. They are in danger of depending too much -on the respect and love which others so readily yield them; of valuing -themselves on a purity which, if ever one of struggle, has come to be -one of taste; of prizing intellectual clearness above moral insight and -vigor; of mistaking the pleasure they feel in the performance of duty, -for real submission to the will of God; and above all, of shrinking from -new truths which would, for the time, confuse their belief, and break up -the calm symmetry of their lives. - - * * * * * - -For … different natures require and receive a very different discipline -from God. Sometimes it is by outward affliction that God speaks to souls, -thus sinking into the lethargy of formalism; and the loss of friends, -or health, or influence suddenly seems to cut off, as it were, half the -means of serving him, and to rouse long-forgotten temptations to rise -up against his will. Sometimes, on the other hand, he speaks to them -inwardly, by opening their eyes to heights of holiness which they had -never before steadily contemplated. They now suddenly perceive that -many of the fancied duties which have till now occupied their lives and -satisfied their consciences, have long ceased to be duties, and have -come to be mere habits or pleasures; and that while they have been thus -living in self love, unseen and unrepented of, they might have been -coming to the knowledge of the higher obligations to which they have been -so blind, but which were all implied in their first belief if they had -but continued to read it with a single eye.—_From Susanna Winkworth, in -“Tauler’s Life and Times.”_ - - -[_July 13._] - -Especially, too, if they be distracted and disheartened (as such are wont -to be) by the sin and confusion of the world; by the amount of God’s -work which still remains undone, and by their own seeming incapacity -to do it, they will take heart from the history of John Tauler and his -fellows, who, in a far darker and more confused time than the present, -found a work to do and strength to do it; who, the more they retired -into the recesses of their own inner life, found there that fully to -know themselves was to know all men, and to have a message for all -men; and who by their unceasing labors of love proved that the highest -spiritual attainments, instead of shutting a man up in lazy and Pharisaic -self-contemplation, drive him forth to work as his Master worked before -him, among the poor, the suffering, and the fallen. - -Let such take heart, and toil on in faith at the duty which lies nearest -to them. Five hundred years have passed since Tauler and his fellows did -their simple work, and looked for no fruit from it, but the saving of one -here and there from the nether pit. That was enough for which to labor; -but without knowing it, they did more than that. Their work lives, and -will live forever, though in forms from which they would have perhaps -shrunk had they foreseen them. Let all such therefore take heart. They -may know their own weakness; but they know not the power of God in them. -They may think sadly that they are only palliating the outward symptoms -of social and moral disease; but God may be striking, by some unconscious -chance blow of theirs, at a sort of evil which they never suspected. They -may mourn over the failure of some seemingly useful plan of their own; -but God may be, by their influence, sowing the seed of some plan of his -own, of which they little dream. For every good deed comes from God. His -is the idea, his the inspiration, and his its fulfillment in time; and -therefore no good deed but lives and grows with the everlasting life of -God himself. And as the acorn, because God has given it “a forming form,” -and life after its kind, bears within it not only the builder oak, but -shade for many a herd; food for countless animals, and last, the gallant -ship itself, and the materials of every use to which nature or art can -put it and its descendants after it throughout all time; so does every -good deed contain within itself endless and unexpected possibilities of -other good, which may and will grow and multiply forever, in the genial -light of him whose eternal mind conceived it, and whose eternal spirit -will forever quicken it, with that life of which he is the giver and the -Lord.—_From Rev. Charles Kingsley, in “Preface to Tauler’s Sermons.”_ - - -[_July 20._] - -It astonishes all thought to observe the minuteness of God’s government, -and of the natural and common processes which he carries on from day -to day. His dominions are spread out, system above system, filling all -height and latitude, but he is never lost in the magnificent. He descends -to an infinite detail, and builds a little universe in the smallest -things. He carries on a process of growth in every tree and flower and -living thing; accomplishes in each an internal organization, and works -the functions of an internal laboratory, too delicate all for eye or -instrument to trace. He articulates the members and impels the instincts -of every living mote that shines in the sunbeam. As when we ascend toward -the distant and the vast, so when we descend toward the minute, we see -his attention acuminated and his skill concentrated on his object; -and the last discernible particle dies out of our sight with the same -divine glory on it, as on the last orb that glimmers in the skirt of the -universe. - - * * * * * - -The works of Christ are, if possible, a still brighter illustration of -the same truth. Notwithstanding the vast stretch and compass of the work -of redemption, it is a work of the most humble detail in its style of -execution. The Savior could have preached a sermon on the mount every -morning. Each night he could have stilled the sea, before his astonished -disciples, and shown the conscious waves lulling into peace under his -feet. He could have transfigured himself before Pilate and the astonished -multitudes of the temple. He could have made visible ascensions in the -noon of every day, and revealed his form standing in the sun, like the -angel of the apocalypse. But this was not his mind. The incidents of -which his work is principally made up, are, humanly speaking, very humble -and unpretending. The most faithful pastor in the world was never able, -in any degree, to approach the Savior, in the lowliness of his manner and -his attention to humble things. His teachings were in retired places, -and his illustrations drawn from ordinary affairs. If the finger of faith -touched him in the crowd, he knew the touch and distinguished also the -faith. He reproved the ambitious housewifery of an humble woman. After -he had healed a poor being, blind from his birth—a work transcending -all but divine power—he returned and sought him out, as the most humble -Sabbath-school teacher might have done; and when he had found him, cast -out and persecuted by men, he taught him privately the highest secrets -of his Messiahship. When the world around hung darkened in sympathy with -his cross, and the earth was shaking with inward amazement, he himself -was remembering his mother, and discharging the filial cares of a good -son. And when he burst the bars of death, its first and final conqueror, -he folded the linen clothes and the napkin, and laid them in order apart, -showing that in the greatest things he had a set purpose also concerning -the smallest. And thus, when perfectly scanned, the work of Christ’s -redemption, like the material universe, is seen to be a vast orb of -glory, wrought up out of finished particles.—_Horace Bushnell._ - - -[_July 27._] - -He who would sympathize must be content to be tried and tempted. There is -a hard and boisterous rudeness in our hearts by nature, which requires -to be softened down. We pass by suffering gaily, carelessly; not in -cruelty, but unfeelingly, because we do not know what suffering is. We -wound men by our looks and our abrupt expressions without intending -it, because we have not been taught the delicacy, and the tact, and -the gentleness, which can only be learned by the wounding of our own -sensibilities. There is a haughty feeling of uprightness which has -never been on the verge of falling, that requires humbling. There is an -inability to enter into difficulties of thought which marks the mind to -which all things have been presented superficially, and which has never -experienced the horror of feeling the ice of doubt crashing beneath the -feet. Therefore, if you aspire to be a son of consolation; if you would -partake of the priestly gift of sympathy; if you would pour something -beyond commonplace consolation into a tempted heart; if you would pass -through the intercourse of daily life with the delicate tact which never -inflicts pain; if to that most acute of human ailments, mental doubt, you -are ever to give effectual succor—you must be content to pay the price of -the costly education. Like him, you must suffer—being tempted. - -But remember it is being tempted in all points, _yet without sin_, that -makes sympathy real, manly, perfect, instead of a mere sentimental -tenderness. Sin will teach you to _feel_ for trials. It will not enable -you to judge them; nor to help them in time of need with any certainty. - - * * * * * - -Lastly, it is this same human sympathy which qualifies Christ for -judgment. It is written that the Father hath committed all judgment to -him, _because_ he is the Son of Man. - - * * * * * - -The sympathy of Christ is a comforting subject. It is, besides, a -tremendous subject; for on sympathy the awards of heaven will be built.… -A sympathy for that which is pure implies a repulsion of that which is -impure. Hatred of evil is in proportion to the strength of love for good. -To love intensely good is to hate intensely evil.… Win the mind of Christ -now, or else his sympathy for human nature will not save you from, but -only insure, a recoil of abhorrence at last.—_F. W. Robertson._ - - * * * * * - - Hast thou not learned what thou art often told, - A truth still sacred and believed of old, - That no success attends on spears and swords - Unblest, and that the battle is the Lord’s?—_Cowper._ - - - - -GROWTH. - -By EMILY J. BUGBEE. - - - Grow as the trees grow, - Your head lifted straight to the sky, - Your roots holding fast where they lie, - In the richness below, - Your branches outspread - To the sun pouring down, and the dew, - With the glorious infinite blue - Stretching over your head. - - Receiving the storms, - That may writhe you, and bend, but not break, - While your roots the more sturdily take - A strength in their forms. - God means _us_, the growth of His trees, - Alike thro’ the shadow and shine, - Receiving as freely the life-giving wine - Of the air and the breeze. - - Not sunshine alone, - The soft summer dew and the breeze - Hath fashioned these wonderful trees, - The tempest hath moaned. - They have tossed their strong arms in despair, - At the blast of the terrible there, - In the thunder’s loud tone. - - But under it all - Were the roots clasping closer the sod, - The top still aspiring to God, - Who prevented their fall. - - Come out from the gloom - And open your heart to the light - That is flooding God’s world with delight, - And unfolding its bloom. - His kingdom of Grace - Is symboled in all that we see, - In budding and leafing of tree - And fruit in its place. - - - - -TENEMENT HOUSE LIFE IN NEW YORK. - -By GEORGE ALFRED TOWNSEND. - - -New York City, which is the soul and center of a series of cities which -may be called the Metropolitan District, has not far from a million and -a half of people, nearly all of whom reside upon an island of rocky -formation, surrounded by deep water. Within recent years a district -to the north of the island has been annexed to the city, and city -protection and privileges partly extended to it, and new parks have just -been legalized there, but little that has yet been done in the outlying -districts and cities has been effectual to thin out the population of the -great central city, whose inhabitants are gathered from all races. - -The island of New York extends over thirteen miles along the North River, -and it is densely built up as far as 70th Street, on that river, and on -the East River it is almost solidly built up to Harlem, which is six -or seven miles from the point of the city at the Battery. The middle -of the island, to the extent of nine hundred acres, is occupied by the -Central Park and other parks, and broad driveways or boulevards take up -considerable of the unoccupied or partially occupied portion, so that the -time is admitted to be near at hand when all this island will be covered -with houses. The character of these houses is already indicated by the -tall flats, apartment houses, or tenement houses which are rising, -apparently in the country parts, out of the green fields, and some of -these are six, seven and eight stories high. Extensive apartment houses, -in which the floors are rented or sold, are also being constructed in -the vicinity of the park, sometimes to the height of nine, ten and even -twelve stories. - -It would therefore appear that the future residence of the New Yorker is -to be some kind of a tenement structure after the fashion prevailing on -the continent of Europe. For some of these costly tenements the rent is -as high as six thousand to eight thousand dollars per annum. The cheapest -tenements on New York island probably cost twenty dollars a month. -Although a bridge has been built at enormous expense to connect New York -and Brooklyn, it is a mere convenience, and has exercised no influence -on the general character of New York island. While Brooklyn is growing, -Harlem relatively is growing faster, at the northern end of New York -island. The elevated railroads, of which there are four parallel to each -other up and down the length of the island as far as the park, and three -the whole length of the island, or to Harlem River, have rather exercised -a recalling influence to the city from the suburbs, and the tendency is -to extend New York across the Harlem River rather than across the Hudson -or the East rivers and the bay, which are often embarrassed by fog, ice, -and storm. - -The New York manufactures have so expanded that the operatives do not go -from the city to the country parts to do a day’s labor, but come from -the country parts into New York to earn a living. The protective tariff -has transferred the foreign commerce of New York to foreign nations, -while it has made New York City our largest manufacturing city. These -manufactories compressed on that small island necessarily partake of the -tenement house character, and it has been necessary for the legislature -to pass laws prohibiting the making of cigars in the tenement houses -where the people live. A few years ago I was requested to visit some of -these cigar tenements in the vicinity of Tompkins Square, and further -uptown, and I found an extraordinary condition of things which has not -yet been checked by legislation, because after the prohibitory law -was passed it was found to be defective in phraseology, and has to be -reënacted. In these tenements could be seen a whole family, men, women -and children, living and working their tobacco, and at the same time -cooking, sleeping, eating and entertaining, with the tobacco spread over -the floor to be dried at night, the children walking on it, and the -vapors of the tobacco filling the lungs of the sleepers. In the morning -the man got up and began to cut, trim and fill cigars, and put them on -the bench before him, and there he sat all day, for at least six days in -the week, seldom going out to let the rooms be aired, and some of these -buildings, from four to six stories high, were nothing but pigeon cases -of such tobacco tenements. - -It is to be doubted whether the law can reach such cases, because -detection would always involve an intrusion into the living apartments -of families, and would make in time such hostility that the law itself -would have to be repealed. As in Lyons, France, and in Belgium, where the -silk weavers, the lace makers, etc., take their work home, there is no -doubt a tendency in New York City to live and toil on the same premises. -The population of New York is made up from most of the laboring nations, -and each of these brings its own habits, and expects to exercise them -freely in this free country. The vices of European laboring society -have been imported with the virtues. The city electing its officials by -suffrage modifies its usages and government in the direction of these new -elements, and the foreigner soon picks up from his demagogues and the -small newspapers published in his own language aggressive ideas, which -some think are rapidly becoming a great defensive system, some day to -plague the metropolis. - -Whatever we native Americans think about the foreign methods of living -in New York, those methods are as natural to the immigrants as it is for -us to occupy a whole house. Indeed, the American in such cities as New -York is becoming of necessity the imitator of the foreigner, because the -rent of a whole establishment on that cramped island is out of the reach -of any but the well employed and independently prosperous. - -As this article may come to eyes which have never seen the great city, -I will convey to you some slight notion of the structure of New York -island. This island is made of gneiss rock, or hard granite, which -apparently extended in ribs or ridges, sometimes depressed, sometimes -high, and in places like islands, and between these ridges and islands -sand and gravel have been deposited, so that when you come to lay out a -street, to lay pipes under the street, or to excavate for a house, you -may strike solid rock, or you may find quicksand, and therefore the cost -of building on the island is greater than almost anywhere on the globe. -Probably the steam drills employed to blast on New York island exceed -in number all the steam drills in the entire United States. Most of our -cities are built on clay or sandy soil, and a cellar can be excavated in -two or three days, whereas I have seen building lots in New York, only a -hundred feet by twenty to twenty-five feet wide, which took months, or -indeed a whole building season, to get the rock out, and when the cellar -is excavated it is like a great trough or hole made in solid stone. -Naturally, a man who has been at such expense to start his house looks -into the air for his recompense. With that solid foundation in the stone -he has procured from the cellar he begins to build a tower instead of -a house, and to let it out in floors, and for each of these floors he -expects to receive higher rent than is elsewhere paid for a large and -complete house. - -A friend of mine who recently failed disastrously, showed me one of -these new flat houses he had put up. It was three lots broad, each -lot one hundred feet deep, making a front of seventy-five feet. Each -of these lots he held to be worth $30,000, making $90,000 for the -situation, though it was not on a fashionable street, but rather up a -side street. He then raised one upon another seven apartments on each -side of the entrance, and over the entrance were six bachelor apartments, -each consisting of only one room, a bed alcove, and a bath closet. -Consequently, there would be in such a building twenty tenants, of whom -fourteen would be families. These fourteen paid from $1,800 to $1,300 -apiece. Each had the same number of rooms, in the same space, the rents -only being modified by the position of the floor. The lower floors of -course rented higher than the upper floors. Generally speaking, each -living place consisted of a parlor and a side room, either library or -sitting room, a bath room, and a servant’s bath also, about three bed -rooms, beside a servant’s bed room, a dining room, a kitchen, pantries -and wardrobes. The only economy in such living lies in the reduction -of the number of servants, and in the less expense of furnishing. The -proprietor has to keep an engineer, an assistant engineer, a porter and -assistant, and perhaps a housekeeper, and of course a watchman. Elevators -front and rear accommodate the landlords and the servants. Such a -building, exclusive of the ground, probably cost $150,000, and therefore -it would be hard work to make ten per cent. upon it after paying -salaries, taxes, etc. The bachelor apartments rented from $50 to $30 per -month. - -Now this stylish apartment house looks out at the rear upon a series of -common tenement houses, where in old brick or frame buildings a dense -mass of people look out of the back windows on their more aristocratic -neighbors. These latter houses perhaps have a pole erected in the back -yard which is as high as the house, and from every floor proceed to this -pole clothes lines, attached there by pulleys, and whatever is washed is -affixed to the line and run out by the pulley to dry. Most of the people -in these back apartments live in one room, or at most in two, and there -the good man arises in the morning, takes his early breakfast and goes -out with his truck or dray, or hies him off to work and does not return -again till night. The wife arises and sends the children off to school, -and then she proceeds to wash or iron, or do other work, cooking her -meals meantime, and supplying the children at noon, and the old man at -night. Perhaps in that room or two live half a dozen people. They may -even have a sub-tenant. There must be more or less exposure, more or less -bad air, more or less indifference to the decencies of life, and yet it -is surprising, on the whole, how much cleaner and better these people -live than might be expected. This to some extent arises from the happy -construction of the blocks in the new or uptown quarter of New York. -Many of our American cities have deep blocks and alleys, or inferior -streets, running up between them. The ground is too precious in New York -to be sacrificed in such lanes, so the back yards touch each other, and -the houses are built high stooped, the basement being the first story, -and through the basement hall the slops, ashes, etc., are carried to the -front street and there left for the scavenger and the ash-man to come -and remove them. Consequently, each of these uptown blocks is one great -court, open to the sun and to the sky. New York streets across town are -only two hundred feet apart, and therefore the lots are of uniform depth. - -The old Dutch city and its English successor in the lower part of the -island covered a triangular space not a mile long, and about a mile -wide. In the course of time Broadway was opened right up the center of -this triangle, and streets called East Broadway and West Broadway were -thrown in a course generally parallel to the two rivers, and the attempt -was continued to make a more or less rectangular city, and finally, at -the distance of more than two miles up, a real rectangular metropolis -was secured by opening broad avenues, of which there are about twelve -lengthwise of the whole island, and these are crossed by streets running -in number up to 220th, and in the course of time in the annexed portion -they will run to something like 300th Street. Although the city is thus -expanded, business and population are very tenacious of the old and -crowded situations. As it is impossible to draw the money and finance -out of Wall Street, so it is next to impossible to alter the situation -of the market houses, the railroad freight depots, the express offices, -the steamboat piers, the ferries, and even the manufactories. As an -immense portion of what is manufactured in New York is not sold to -the people of the city, but for export, it remains a consideration to -manufacture, prepare and pack goods down in the dense, lance-shaped point -of the island. Consequently business, tenements, folly, manufactories, -everything grow denser as you go down town, and the east side of the city -is especially given up to the Germanic races. At that point there is a -protuberance of the city into the East River, overlapping the city of -Brooklyn, and the avenues here are not numbered, but being to the east of -First Avenue they take the names of Avenues A, B, C and D. - -Here you find the tenement houses in their glory. Grand Street is the -great artery of that side of the town. - -Fifty years ago there were but 200,000 inhabitants on this island; -thirty-five years ago there were but 500,000; twenty-five years ago -there were but 800,000 people; fifteen years ago there were 950,000. By -the census of 1880 the population of the island was put down at over -1,200,000. It will not be far wrong to call it in general terms a million -and a half. But the stable population of New York bears no comparison -with its transient and daily population. It is immediately surrounded -by two millions more of people who depend upon the city, and who can -leave it at all hours of the night by ferries. It is the resort of sixty -per cent. of all the ocean vessels in the country, with their crews. It -contains the offices of nearly every corporation in the United States, -all of which, after they have attained a certain stability or prominence, -keep a commission house or branch office on New York island. - -The morals of New York City are therefore to a great extent beyond the -reach of mere administration, and have to be lenient according to the -temptation and the concourse. Marriage itself is subordinate in such a -hive, to society and necessity. The American elements of the population -generally adhere to their traditions and decencies, but there is a native -American generation in New York, begotten of foreign parents, which knows -no other country than this, but is as different from Americans of the old -time as we differ from the American Indians. From this secondary growth -New York derives most of its mechanical, laboring, and artisan class. -These, like their forefathers, adhere to the tenement house method of -life. They do not understand the necessity of a whole house, which has -to be furnished, cleaned and warmed, when they spend so much of the day -and night elsewhere, either at work or pleasure. So does the American -element, which goes from the country to New York, content itself with a -room. As for the poor, as their families increase they have no resort but -the tenement house. - -The latest history of New York City says that 500,000 people in New York, -or more than one-third, live in tenement houses, and that the densest -blocks in London do not compare, in the number of inhabitants, with the -same space in the dense quarters of New York. A single block is referred -to on Avenue B, which has fifty-two tenement houses, the population of -them amounting to nearly 2,400 persons. One single house in New York -is said to have 1,500 inhabitants, and often a house with twenty-five -feet front accommodates 100 souls. Of course height is the great point -to give such area. If you enter New York and walk toward the east side -through the streets which run so close together, but which are all -happily of fair width, and all straight, you will see row after row of -red brick houses, generally built to the height of five or six stories. -In themselves they are rather neat to look at, except for the signs of -population at every window, where on a hot and steaming day everybody -seems to press to get the air. You can see the baby at the breast, the -hunchback elder child, the man rolling cigars, the Chinaman washing, the -woman running her sewing machine, the musician practicing on the bugle, -the dentist, perhaps, filling teeth in a tenement house at modest rates -to suit. You may also see some quiet old German smoking his pipe and -reading science, unaware that anything is much worse than it generally -is in the world. These houses have a common entrance below, sometimes in -the middle, generally at the side. Through this entrance pours in and -out the population going above; the stairways are generally narrow, the -steps worn almost through, sometimes loungers and children are playing in -the halls, and our fastidious habits are much shocked at the necessary -familiarity engendered. - -Yet it is to be remembered that as one’s day is, so is his strength, -even in the matter of smells, and while there are tenement evils there -are also tenement house virtues. The close sociability engenders another -species of Christianity. The policeman is near at hand to correct any -evils. While the summers are dreadfully hot, the winters are also long -and cold, and the two things most needed in a tenement house are coal and -sunlight. - -The tenement house laws have been made at Albany by the landlords of -these houses, many of whom are rapacious and merciless. Not a single day -is given by law, I understand, to a tenant who does not pay the rent. -The landlord is permitted to put his agent or constable in any apartment -and set the things on the sidewalk, whatever may be the disaster or the -disease within. Many of these tenement houses have been built up by -the sales of liquor and beer, and probably the majority of our Irish -saloon-keepers project a corner in which they do business into a tenement -house above, and they both provide the rum and collect the rent. Possibly -the men above stairs drink away their wages in the saloon below, while -the women work at something to keep the rent up. - -In some cases, especially among the more rural Irish, the shanty in the -suburbs is substituted for tenement house life. As you walk along some -of the newly filled streets, composed of great rocks which have been -blasted in one spot to fill up another spot, you will look down into -a former meadow, now a mere hole surrounded by four dungeon walls of -stone, and there you will see three or four shanties pitched together -on suffrance, made of old boards taken out of some fence or from dry -goods boxes. Unaware of anybody being about, you can sit there and hear -the whole domestic menage going on; see Patrick, very drunk, sociably -quarreling with his wife, who is not far behind him in her potations. -They perhaps keep a cow somewhere down there under the planks, and this -cow is being milked more or less all the time, and if the milk can not be -sold it helps to support the life of the squatters. - -Again, you will go into some far quarter of this island, many miles from -the business centers, and to your surprise you will there find another -species of tenement house, showing that this system of herding together -and economizing room is the fate of this city at least. There seems to -be no future for the tenement house system. The laws passed by our state -legislature with reference to this city are more apt to be in favor of -the tenement house proprietor than of the tenant. The tenants hardly know -where the legislature is, while the tenement house owner is informed -by his lawyer or lobbyist of what is going on. As far as philanthropy -goes, it despairs of accomplishing anything in the midst of such a dense -population. Of course, when things become outrageous, the police report -them to the Board of Health, or the tenants take the law into their own -hands. - -This gregarious life leads to great independence of character among the -women; the average survivor of the tenement house is no puny, frightened -creature, but a very active animal, ready to scratch, retort, appeal to -law, and loves and marries as she wishes. There is some natural deviation -from virtue, as from cleanliness, yet the recuperative principle in -women, as in men, is at least redeeming, and it is to be doubted whether -the vices in the tenement houses exceed those in the fashionable streets. - -It is believed here that the worst class of people New York possesses -are the Bohemians from northern Austria. This degraded race was at one -time, or until the emperors destroyed it politically, the repository of -most of the vices of Europe. Among the Bohemians you find the domestic -virtues at the lowest ebb, and socialism at its lewdest. A manufacturer -was recently telling me of two Bohemians in his employment who grew weary -of their wives, and without any other marriage, and without quarrel, -they agreed, men and women, to change partners, and continue to live -and work together. At a recent strike of cigar makers in this city, a -working woman who stripped tobacco was set upon by three men and knocked -down because she preferred to take lower wages rather than keep idle and -support some of the demagogue patrols. - -New York, however, has no such dens to-day as it had forty years ago, -when the Five Points was in the height of its orgies. Through that old -swampy quarter of the city broad streets have been cut, and manufactories -have been established. I have my doubts whether, at this moment, the -worst features of New York’s population are not to be found in some of -the rougher suburbs off the island. The draft riots of 1863 assisted -the peace and order of New York by bringing about a collision between -the very bad elements and the law. The police, who are generally hated -by the vicious as the visible representatives of the law, received from -that moment a degree of discipline which has ever since been kept up, -and the militia regiments of New York City have been provided with large -armories, and are in a fair state of discipline. - -Of course, in such a rank soil as this island, the gentler virtues do -not grow, but my observation of some rural districts, many hundred miles -from this city, is that they are far below the tenement house quarter -in intelligence, and not above it in morals. The matter of virtue is -to a large extent involved in the race; it will take a long time to -debauch, utterly, people descended from the British and Germanic races. -Fortunately, we have not had much immigration from the south of Europe, -but the Italian quarter is attracting some attention, as possibly the -worst we possess. The Chinese in New York are self-reliant, and a good -many of them have shown a decided bias to be Christianized. I lived near -a church, two or three years ago, where I one day observed a large number -of Chinese, and glancing up at the church I saw that it was a Baptist -one. On inquiry I found that a Chinaman who attended the Sunday-school -of that church had been murdered by some semi-American roughs, and his -classmates had come to pay the last honors to him. Like Americans, they -came in cabs, and came filing out of that church quiet, uncomplaining, -injured specimens of our common brotherhood. - -Legally, a tenement house in New York is one house occupied by more -than three families living independently of each other, and doing their -cooking on the premises. All tenement houses are compelled to have -fire-escapes built outside of the house, of iron. There is one quarter of -New York City where 300,000 persons are said to live on a square mile. -Observers now say that not one-third, but one-half of the population of -New York City lives on the tenement house plan. - -A superficial observer here would think that the greatest misery on the -globe was to be found in this tenement house quarter, yet I think that -much of this sympathy will be thrown away, because in the large majority -of cases the people who live under this system would not exchange it for -any other. - - - - -THE CAÑONS OF THE COLORADO. - -A lecture delivered on Saturday, April 26, in the National Museum, -Washington, D. C., by Major J. W. Powell, Director of the U. S. -Geological Survey. - - -The lecturer at the outset stated that the valley of the Columbia River -might be divided into two portions; the lower third lying but little -above the sea level, the other two-thirds of the valley area drained by -the Colorado and its tributaries being five to eight thousand feet above -the level of the sea. - -On the summit and sides of the mountain were thousands of lakes of clear -water, which received their supply from the masses of snow which are -collecting throughout the winter on the mountain ranges, filling the -gorges and half burying the forests. In summer the snow melted and poured -down the mountain sides in millions of cascades, eventually forming the -Colorado River, which grew into a mad torrent ere it reached the Gulf -of California. Eventful indeed would be the history of these waters if -traced from their starting point. Some of these streams ran across arid -plateaus, being fed in their course by intermittent showers. Each year -their channels became deeper and deeper, cutting their way out of solid -rock. Every river, brook, creek and rill ran into a cañon, so that these -vast areas were traversed by a labyrinth of deep gorges hewn out of the -rock by the ever-flowing streams. If the Colorado plateau had been in -such a country as the District of Columbia, the land lying adjacent to -the river courses would have been washed down by the rains and streams, -and instead of cañons there would now be a broad system of valleys. It -was an error to regard that Colorado plateau as a region of great erosion -or degradation. It was a vast system of cañons, caused by the water -eating its way through the hard rock, with lofty stone walls on either -side. - -Major Powell said that in 1867 and 1868 he had explored the Grand River -and other tributaries of the Colorado, and these expeditions thrilled him -with a desire to explore the vast cañons of the Colorado River itself. -Accordingly in May, 1869, he started for this purpose with a small party -of men and four boats from a point a few miles below where now the Union -and Pacific Railroad crosses Yukon River. The first forty or fifty miles -of their course was through low cañons, cut through the green and alcove -lands of that region. Their course was southward. As they descended -the river, a mountain seemed to stand athwart their path, and into this -mountain the river penetrated. They followed around the base for a -hundred miles or so, meeting the river beyond. Now, why had not the river -flowed _round_ the mountain instead of cutting its way _through_? The -answer was exceedingly simple. Because the river was there before the -mountain, and had the right of way, keeping steadfastly on its southward -course, across which the lands had been gradually elevated. These land -upheavals had taken place very slowly, enabling the river to force its -passage as the land rose inch by inch. - -At last they reached the junction of the Grand and the Green rivers—the -head of the Colorado River—some three thousand feet below the general -surface of the country. At that point the cañon was about three thousand -feet in depth. One of the boats had been lost, and one of the men had -left them before reaching this point. The walls of the cañon here were -about half a mile high. One of these they determined to scale at a point -a little below their camp, where there was a gorge—a natural break in the -wall. Half way up further progress seemed impossible, but by crawling -round a narrow ledge of rock they were enabled to resume their toilsome -climb. From this point they could see the river fifteen hundred feet -below them, wildly rushing and tossing, and at the same distance above -them was the cañon’s brink that seemed to blend with the sky. Again the -wall was found to have broken down, but by crawling up a fissure so -narrow that they could press against the hinder side with their backs, -while forcing with hands and feet their steep and dangerous path upward, -they finally emerged into the upper world, where they could look out at -the broad expanse of landscape. Away to the north were orange and azure -cliffs, two and three thousand feet high; to the west were the Wasatch -Mountains, and a plateau with a hundred dead volcanoes on its back, while -to the east was another group of dead volcanoes. Thirty or forty miles -away in the same direction were seen forests of green and masses of gray -volcanic rock clothed with patches of snow; green, gray and silver, -resplendent in that noon-day sun. To the south was a labyrinth of cañons. - -On the following day they commenced the exploration of the Colorado -River. From this starting point it was about seven hundred miles to the -foot of the Grand Cañon. Through the entire series of cañons the river -tumbled down more than 5,000 feet. The lecturer here stated that the fall -of the Mississippi from Cairo down was about four inches to the mile, and -of the Ohio some eight inches, and that the Colorado carried about as -much water as the Ohio at Louisville. In some places the river was wide, -and here its fall did not exceed that of the Ohio or Upper Mississippi. -The fall in Marble Cañon, however, was from ten to three hundred feet -to the mile! The boats, with the exception of the one in which he and -Major Powell traveled, were about twenty-two feet long and decked, so -that there were three water-tight compartments in each boat. His boat, in -which were two other men, was only sixteen feet in length. This led the -way, while the other boats, laden with provisions, etc., followed. The -roar of the water in the cañon could be heard a long way off. The chief -difficulty in navigating was riding the waves, which differed greatly -from that of the sea. In the case of the latter the water remained, -simply rising and falling, while the _form_ alone rolled on; but in the -former the water of the wave rolled on, the form being fixed. As long -as the boat could be kept on the waves, all was well, but the great -tendency was to drift into the whirlpool in the center. Three miles -below the junction of the Grand and the Green rivers appeared a series -of rapids and falls, and nearly two weeks were spent in running through -this difficult portion of the river. Having passed through Cataract -Cañon, they encountered Narrow Cañon, where the river for seven miles -rushed down a steep declivity. Seven miles again below a stream came in -on the right side. Up this the leading boat went, and one of the men, -in reply to a query from another in one of the boats following, as to -the nature of the water in this new stream, called out, “A dirty devil,” -and by that name it was designated on the maps. It was a stream of red -mud, having along its course hot mineral springs. The odor was fetid and -foul, resembling, as the lecturer graphically described it, “One of those -alabaster boxes of ointment with which they used to anoint abolitionists -in the brazen days of yore.” Below Narrow Cañon was Glen Cañon, -stretching for a hundred and fifty miles through homogeneous sandstone of -a beautiful color, its walls often perpendicular and indented with glens, -alcoves and caves. The latter were formed by the rain-showers running -down the sides of the wall, and slowly eating them away. At the foot of -the homogeneous sandstone was a soft, friable, crumbling sandstone, and -through this the river had cut some fifty miles of its course. In the -next cañon—Marble Cañon—was a series of cataracts and rapids which made -progress very difficult. Here the falls were too steep to be “run,” and -the boats were therefore let down by a line. First one was lowered, then -the second passed down to and beyond the first, and then the third past -the first and second. - -When these falls had been passed, they found themselves at the head of -the Grand Cañon of the Colorado, which was about two hundred and seventy -miles long, varying from five to six thousand feet in depth. Here they -stopped several days to examine the cañon before entering it. Where -the rocks were sandstone the river was comparatively quiet, but where -limestone prevailed it presented a much more threatening appearance. In -some places the river was very narrow, the entire volume of water being -compressed into a width of not more than fifty feet. For a distance of -twenty or thirty miles a curious set of buttresses stood out from the -wall of the cañon, and between each two of these was a bay where the -waters would sweep around seething and boiling. Sometimes lofty pinnacles -of rock rose from the river’s bed, past which the boats darted with -fearful rapidity. Many days were spent in traversing this part of the -cañon. The weather was gloomy and much rain fell in showers, which in -that region had a very different effect from those which fall in our own -districts. There every drop was precipitated—as it were—into one vast -rain trough, soon causing the waters to swell. At first was heard in the -distance the patter of the drops on the rocks; then came the noise caused -by the rills and brooks hurrying their streams to the main river, and -louder yet the larger creeks and rivulets hurled their foaming waters, -soon swelling the river itself into a furious and maddening torrent. The -black clouds overhead appeared to be miles above them, mingling with the -very skies. Through this dark cañon they worked their way, examining -the rocks, toiling from daylight to dark. They were now living on half -rations, as the supplies of food were fast decreasing. Suddenly was seen -a fearful rapid, only three or four hundred yards below. A landing was -effected and the camp pitched on a projecting rock some fifty feet above -the water. The boats had to be hauled up out of the way of the torrent. -In continuing the journey on the following morning, great difficulty -was experienced in rounding this rock. The boats were pitched almost -against it, and instantly rebounded on the retiring water. A few days -later Diamond Cañon was reached. Here two streams came in, one from -either side. A fearful “fall” was in sight, which, after long and careful -consideration, it was determined to “run.” Here three of the men grew -faint-hearted and left the party. It was afterward learned that they had -fallen in with Indians and been killed. - -The anxiety attending the resolution to “run” this “fall” was fearful. -The lecturer said that he paced up and down a little sand-plot all night -without sleeping or resting. In the morning rations were given to the -deserters, who determined to watch the fate of the rest of the party. The -“run” was successfully made, and it was hoped that the other three would -then be induced to follow. This, however, they would not do. On the next -day the most difficult point in the entire journey was reached, owing -to obstructions caused by lava rocks. In one place a dam was found, the -waters rushing over in a cataract. This it was also decided to “run,” on -the right hand side. The decision was however reversed when the fearful -danger of the attempt was realized. But already one of the boats had been -let down to the very head of the fall, where the men were attempting to -hold it by winding the rope around a great block of lava. There was one -man who had been a whaler—named Bradley—in the boat. The roar of the -waters was so deafening that no voice could be heard. At length he was -seen to take out his knife with perfect composure, and in an instant he -cut the rope, knowing that otherwise the boat would have been dashed to -pieces by striking heavily against the wall of the cañon. A moment later, -and he and the boat were hurled over the cataract, probably never to -be seen again. But a few moments later he appeared a few hundred yards -below, waving his hand. All haste was made to reach him, fearing he might -be severely bruised, but in the hurry to reach him one of the party (the -lecturer) fell overboard and was picked up by this invulnerable old -whaler. - -On the next day the foot of the Grand Cañon was reached. Thence they -went to Virgin River, and from that point to Salt Lake, after which they -hastened home. - -In conclusion, the lecturer said that if all the sands that had been -eroded by the rivers of that region, and washed into the ocean, could be -brought into one mass, they would form a rock one mile and a half thick, -and bigger than New York, New Jersey and Pennsylvania put together. - - - - -THE COURTS OF THREE PRESIDENTS. - - -THIERS, MACMAHON, GRÉVY. - -We all read in the newspapers how, on the day when the Duke of Albany’s -lamentable death occurred, M. Jules Ferry, the French Prime Minister -and Secretary for Foreign Affairs, gave a dinner party. An Englishman -having expressed astonishment that this dinner had not been put off, a -Frenchman answered by asking whether Lord Granville would countermand -a banquet in case M. Wilson, M. Grévy’s son-in-law, were to die? Our -countryman seems to have concluded that Lord Granville would not let his -hospitalities be interfered with by M. Wilson’s decease; and perhaps he -was right. M. Daniel Wilson holds more effective power than was ever -possessed by a Dauphin of France; but his father-in-law is only the chief -of a government, not the head of a court, and M. Wilson’s existence has -therefore never been brought officially to the cognizance of foreign -rulers. It does not follow, however, that because M. Wilson is a private -person, the French government is bound to look upon the relations of -foreign monarchs as being exactly in the same position as this gentleman. -It is more than probable that if Marshal MacMahon were still president, -the foreign secretary would not have given a dinner on the day when a -child of the Queen of England had died suddenly on French soil. It is -equally probable that there would have been no such dinner if M. Thiers -or M. Gambetta had been president. - -Presidents are not all alike. In their views as to the functions of -a republic—in their opinions as to the amount of authority which a -republican ruler may exercise over his ministers, as to the more or -less pomp in which he should live, as to the etiquette which he should -enforce, and as to the relations which he should personally maintain with -the rulers of other countries, M. Grévy and his predecessors have all -differed from one another. The three presidents who have governed France -since 1871 have in fact been so dissimilar in their characters, tastes, -principles, and objects, that it is really curious to compare their -various methods of living and ruling. - -M. Thiers was seventy-four years old when he became supreme ruler of -France, after the siege of Paris. After the first vote of the Assembly, -which appointed him chief of the executive, M. Thiers took up his -residence at the Préfecture, in the apartments which M. Gambetta had -vacated. - -“Pah! what a smell of tobacco!” he exclaimed, when he strutted into the -ex-dictator’s study; and presently Madame Thiers, her sister Mdlle. -Dosne, and the solemn M. Barthélemy St. Hilaire, added their lamentations -to his. They had been going the round of the house, and found all the -rooms tenanted by hangers-on of M. Gambetta’s government, who had not yet -received notice to quit, and who hoped perhaps that they might retain -their posts under the new administration. All these gentlemen smoked, -read radical newspapers, refreshed themselves with absinthe, or beer, -while transacting the business of the state; and played billiards in -their leisure moments. They were dismissed in a pack before the day was -over; but Madame Thiers decided that it would require several days to -set the house straight; and so M. Thiers’ removal to the Archbishop’s -palace, where Monseigneur Guibert (now Cardinal), whom he afterward -raised to the see of Paris, offered him hospitality. M. Thiers would, no -doubt, have liked very much to sleep in Louis XIV.’s bed, and to have for -his study that fine room with the balcony, on which the heralds used to -announce the death of one king and the accession of another in the same -breath. His secretary and faithful admirer, M. Barthélemy St. Hilaire, -went about saying that it was fitting the “national historian” should be -lodged in the apartments of the greatest of the kings; but this idea did -not make its way at all. M. Thiers ended by saying that the rooms were -too large, while Madame Thiers despised them for being full of draughts -and having chimneys which smoked. Nevertheless, M. Thiers was nettled at -seeing that the Republicans objected quite as much as the Royalists to -see him occupy the royal apartments. “Stupid fellows!” he exclaimed on -seeing a caricature which represented him as a ridiculous pigmy, crowned -with a cotton nightcap, and lying in an enormous bed surrounded by the -majestic ghosts of the Bourbon kings. Then half-angry, half-amused, he -ejaculated with his usual vivacity: “Louis XIV. was not taller than I, -and as to his other greatness I doubt whether he would ever have had a -chance of sleeping in the best bed of Versailles if he had begun life as -I did.” Shortly after this, M. Mignet meeting Victor Hugo spoke to him in -a deprecating way about the fuss which had been made over this question -of the royal apartments. “I don’t know,” answered the poet. “Ideas of -dictatorship would be likely to sprout under that tester.” This was -reported to Thiers, who at once cried: “I like that! If Victor Hugo were -in my place, he would sleep in the king’s bed, but he would think the -dais too low, and have it raised.” - -It was quite impossible for Thiers to submit to any of the restraints -of etiquette. He was a _bourgeois_ to the finger-tips. His character -was a curious effervescing mixture of talent, learning, vanity, -childish petulance, inquisitiveness, sagacity, ecstatic patriotism, -and self-seeking ambition. He was a splendid orator, with the shrill -voice of an old costerwoman; a _savant_, with the presumption of a -schoolboy; a kind-hearted man, with the irritability of a monkey; a -masterly administrator, with that irrepressible tendency to meddle with -everything, which worries subordinates, and makes good administration -impossible. He was a shrewd judge of men, and knew well how they were -to be handled, but his impatience prevented him from acting up to his -knowledge. He had a sincere love of liberty, with all the instincts of a -despot. He was most charming with women, understood their power, and yet -took so little account of it in his serious calculations that he often -offended, by his Napoleonic brusqueness, ladies who were in a position to -do him harm, and did it. - -M. Feuillet de Conches had to give up M. Thiers as hopeless. What was to -be done with a president who, at a ceremonious dinner to Ambassadors and -Ministers, would get up from table after the first course and walk round -the room, discussing politics, pictures, the art of war, or the dishes -on the _menu_? Mr. Thiers’ own dinner always consisted of a little clear -soup, a plate of roast meat—veal was that which he preferred—some white -beans, peas, or lentils, and a glass saucer of jam—generally apricot. -He got through this repast, with two glasses of Bordeaux, in about a -quarter of an hour, and then would grow fidgety. “Is that good that you -are eating?” he would say to one of his guests, and thence start off on -to a disquisition about cookery. Telegrams were brought to him at table, -and he would open them, saying, “I beg your pardon, gentlemen, but the -affairs of France must pass before everything.” If he got disquieting -news he would sit pensive for a few moments, then call for a sheet of -paper and scribble off instructions to somebody, whispering directions to -his major-domo about the destination of the missive. - -But if he received glad tidings, he would start from his chair and -frisk about, making jokes, his bright gray eyes twinkling merrily as -lamps through his gold-rimmed spectacles. After dinner there was always -a discussion, _coram hospitibus_, between him and Madame Thiers as to -whether he might take some black coffee. Permission to excite his nerves -being invariably refused, he would wink, laughing, to his friends, to -call their attention to the state of uxorious bondage in which he lived, -and then retire to a high arm-chair near the fire, where he soon dropped -off to sleep. Upon this, Madame Thiers would lay a forefinger on her -lips, saying, “Monsieur Thiers sleeps;” and with the help of her sister -she would clear the guests into the next room, where they conversed in -whispers while the President dozed—a droll little figure with his chin -resting on the broad red ribbon of his Legion of Honor, and his short -legs dangling about an inch above the floor. It was always very touching -to see the care with which M. Thiers’ wife and sister-in-law ministered -to him. The story has been often told of how M. Thiers having been -forbidden by doctors to eat his favorite Provençal dish of fish cooked -with garlic, M. Mignet, the historian, used to smuggle some of this -mess enclosed in a tin box into his friend’s study, and what a pretty -scene there was one day when Madame Thiers detected these two countrymen -enjoying the contraband dainty together. - -M. Thiers had naturally a great notion of his dignity as president of -the republic, and he was anxious to appear impressively on all state -occasions; but the arrangements made to hedge him about with majesty were -always being disconcerted by his doing whatever it came into his head to -do. His servants were dressed in black, and he had a major-domo who wore -a silver chain and tried to usher morning visitors into the president’s -room in the order of their rank; but every now and then M. Thiers used to -pop out of his room, take stock of his visitors for himself, and make his -choice of those whom he wished to see first. Then the most astonishing -and uncourtly dialogues would ensue: - -“Monsieur le Président, this is the third time I have come here, and I -have waited two hours each time.” - -“My friend, if you had come to see me about the affairs of France, and -not about your own business, we should have had a conversation long ago.” - -Precedence was always given by M. Thiers to journalists, however obscure -they might be. Ambassadors had to wait while these favored ones walked -in. A journalist himself, the quondam leader-writer of the _National_ -extended the most generous recognition to the brethren of his craft, but -he also did this because he was wide awake to the power of the press, and -had generally some service to ask of those whom he addressed as “my dear -companions.” He had such a facility for writing that when a journalist -came to him “for inspiration” he would often sit down and dash off in a -quarter of an hour the essential paragraph of a leader which he wished to -see inserted. At the time of the Paris election of April, 1873, when his -friend the Comte de Rémusat, then foreign secretary, was the Government -candidate with the insignificant M. Barodet opposing him, a writer on -the _Figaro_ called at the Elysée and M. Thiers wrote a whole article -of a column’s length for him. It was printed as a letter in leaded type -with the signature “An old citizen of Paris;” and a very sprightly letter -it was, which put the issue lying between M. de Rémusat and his radical -adversary in the clearest light. However, the electors of Paris acted -with their usual foolishness in preferring an upstart to a man of note, -and within a month of this M. Thiers resigned in disgust. - -Marshal MacMahon accepted the presidency without any desire to retain -it. If anything seemed certain at the time of his accession, it was that -Legitimists and Orleanists would soon patch up their differences and that -a vote of the Assembly would offer the crown to Henri V. The Ministry -formed under the auspices of the Duc de Broglie labored to bring about -this consummation, and the Marshal was prepared to enforce the decrees of -the Assembly whatever they might be. At the same time he established his -household at once on a semi-royal footing, as though he intended there -should be at least a temporary court to remind French noblemen of old -times, and to give them a foretaste of the pomps that were coming. M. -Thiers had been a _bourgeois_ president; the Marshal-Duke of Magenta was -a _grand seigneur_. Under Madame Thiers’ frugal management the £36,000 a -year allowed to the president sufficed amply to cover all expenses; under -the Duchess de Magenta’s management the presidential income did not go -half way toward defraying outlay. The Marshal had a comfortable private -fortune (not equal to M. Thiers’), but he was only enabled to hold such -high estate in his office by means of the assistance pressed upon him by -wealthy relatives. - -The first signs of returning splendor at the Elysée were seen in the -liveries of the new president’s servants. Instead of black they wore gray -and silver, with scarlet plush, hair powder, and on gala occasions wigs. -M. Thiers, when he went to a public ceremony, drove in a substantial -landau, with mounted escort of the Republican Guard, and his friends—he -never called them a suite—followed behind in vehicles according to their -liking or means. Marshal MacMahon with the Duchess and their suite were -always enough to fill three dashing landaus. These were painted in three -or four shades of green, and lined with pearl gray satin; each would be -drawn by four grays with postilions in gray jackets and red velvet caps; -and the whole cavalcade was preceded and followed by outriders. Going -to reviews, however, the Marshal of course rode, and this enabled him -to make a grand display with his staff of _aides de camp_. M. Thiers -had a military household of which his cousin General Charlemagne was -the head; but this warrior never had much to do, and it was no part -of his business to receive visitors. Anybody who had business with M. -Thiers could see him without a letter of audience by simply sending up -a card to M. Barthélemy St. Hilaire. Marshal MacMahon, on the contrary, -was as inaccessible as any king. Visitors to the Elysée in his time -were passed from one resplendent officer to another till they entered -the smiling presence of Vicomte Emmanuel d’Harcourt, the President’s -secretary, and this was the _ne plus ultra_. Against journalists in -particular the Marshal’s doors were inexorably locked. So far as a man -of his good-natured temper could be said to hate anybody, the Duke of -Magenta hated persons connected with the press. For all that, he did not -object altogether to newspaper tattle, for whilst he read the _Journal -des Débats_ every evening from a feeling of duty, he perused the _Figaro_ -every morning for his own pleasure. - -The sumptuous ordinance of Marshal MacMahon’s household was rendered -necessary in a manner by the Shah of Persia’s visit to Paris in 1873. -It is a pity that M. Thiers was not in office when this constellated -savage came to ravish the courts of civilized Europe by his diamonds -and his haughtily brutish manners, for it would have been curious to -see the little man instructing the Shah, through an interpreter, as to -Persian history or the etymology of Oriental languages. In the Marshal, -however, Nasr-ed-Din found a host who exhibited just the right sort of -dignity; and all the hospitalities given to the Shah both at Versailles -and Paris—the torchlight procession of soldiers, the gala performance at -the opera, the banquet at the Galerie des Glaces—were carried out on a -scale that could not have been excelled if there had been an emperor on -the throne. In the course of the banquet at Versailles the Shah turned to -the Duchess of Magenta and asked her in a few words of French, which he -must have carefully rehearsed beforehand, why her husband did not set up -as emperor. The Duchess parried the question with a smile; but perhaps -the idea was not so far from her thoughts as she would have had people -imagine. - -It was a really comical freak of fortune that brought M. Jules Grévy to -succeed Marshal MacMahon. The story goes that during the street fighting -of the Revolution of 1830, a law-student was kicked by one of the king’s -officers, for tearing down a copy of the ordinances placarded on a wall. -The officer was armed, the student was not; so the latter ran away and -lived to fight another day. For the officer, as it is said, was Patrice -de MacMahon, and the law-student Jules Grévy. M. Grévy is a man of talent -and great moral courage, but he owes his rise to an uncommon faculty for -holding his tongue at the right moment. “I kept silent, and it was grief -to me,” says the Psalmist. M. Grévy may have felt like other people at -times, an almost incomparable longing to say foolish things; but having -bridled his tongue he was accounted wiser than many who had spoken -wisely. Under the empire he practiced at the bar, continued to make -money, was elected in his turn _bâtonnier_, or chief bencher as we might -say, to the Order of Advocates, and in 1868 was returned to the Corps -Législatif by his old electors of the Jura—in which department he had by -this time acquired a pretty large landed estate. A neat, creaseless sort -of man, with a bald head, a shaven chin and closely-trimmed whiskers, he -looked eminently respectable. The only reprehensible things about him -were his hat and his hands. He always wore a wide-awake instead of the -orthodox chimney-pot, and he eschewed gloves. If his hands were cold he -put them into the pockets of his pantaloons. Some pretended to descry -astuteness in this contempt for the usages of civilized man, for the -wide-awake is more of a radical head-dress than a silk hat. But it never -occurred to M. Grévy at any time since he first achieved success, to -regulate his apparel, general conduct, or words, in view of pleasing the -Radicals. - -The Assembly elected after the war at once chose M. Grévy for its -speaker, and he took up his abode in the Royal Palace, from which party -jealousies had debarred M. Thiers. But he did not alter his manner of -life one whit on that account. In Paris and Versailles he was to be -seen sauntering about the streets looking in at shop windows, dining in -restaurants, or sitting outside a café smoking a cigar and sipping iced -coffee out of a glass. He had a brougham, but would only use it when -obliged to go long distances. It often happened that setting out for a -drive he would alight from his carriage and order his coachman to follow, -and for hours the puzzled and disgusted coachman would drive at a walking -pace behind his indefatigable master, who took easy strides as if he were -not in the slightest hurry. - -There is one point of resemblance between M. Grévy and the Marshal, for -M. Grévy is a keen sportsman; but in most other things the two differ, -though in sum M. Grévy differs more from M. Thiers than he does from -the Marshal. His manner of living at the Elysée is dignified without -ostentation. His servants do not wear gray and scarlet liveries; but the -arrangements of his household are more orderly than those of M. Thiers -could ever be. His servants in black know well how to keep intruders at -a distance. No mob of journalists, inventors and place hunters calls -to see M. Grévy in the morning. On the other hand, three or four times -a week a great number of deputies, artists, journalists and officers -may be seen going into the Elysée as freely as if they were entering a -club. They do not ask to see the President or the latter’s secretary, M. -Fourneret, but they make straight for a magnificent room on the ground -floor overlooking the garden, which has been converted into a fencing -saloon, and there they find M. Daniel Wilson, _le fils de la maison_. -All these _habitués_, who form the court of the Third Republic, keep -their masks, foils and flannels at the Elysée, and set to work fencing -with each other as if they were at Gâtechair’s or Paz’s. Presently a -door opens and the President walks in. For a moment the fencing stops, -the combatants all turn and salute with their foils, whilst the visitors -stand up. But, with a pleasant smile and a wave of the hand, M. Grévy -bids the jousters to go on, and then he walks round the room, saying -something to everybody, and inviting about half a dozen of the guests to -stay to breakfast. - -M. Grévy has allowed his beard to grow of late, and he is almost always -attired in evening clothes, with the _moiré_ edge of his scarlet _cordon_ -peeping over his waistcoat. But for the rest he is the same unassuming -man as ever, and he takes life very easily. Now and then the Cabinet -meets at the Elysée in the Salle des Souverains, and he presides over it. -It is worth observing that in this Salle there are the portraits of a -dozen sovereigns of the nineteenth century, including Queen Victoria, but -not a symbol of any kind to remind one that it is a Republican Government -that sits in this room. Even the master of the house has more in him of -the Constitutional Monarch than of the President. The Constitution has -conferred upon him large powers which he never uses; he seems to keep his -eye on the portrait of the English Queen whilst his ministers discourse. -Whatever papers are offered for his signature he signs, and then it is -_Bon jour, Messieurs; au revoir_; and while the ministers disperse the -President makes his way to his private apartments, where he finds his -daughter and his grandchild, in whose company he sometimes takes more -delight than in that of statesmen. - -Now and then there is a dinner at the Elysée, twice a week at least there -are evening receptions, and about twice in the winter there are grand -balls. On all these occasions everything is done in the best possible -style, and the President discharges his functions of host with a serenity -which disarms all criticism. He says nothing much to anybody, but he -is the same to all. If by chance he falls into deep conversation with -any particular guest, nobody need suspect that state matters are being -discussed. The probabilities are that the President will be talking -about the next performance of his new breechloader at Mont-sous-Vaudrey. -Moreover, what makes M. Grévy more puzzling and interesting at once to -those who behold him so simple in his palace, is the knowledge which -all have, that when his time comes for leaving the Elysée he will walk -out of it as coolly as he went in, without wishing that his tenancy had -been longer, and certainly without doing anything to prolong it. His -only anxiety will be to see that his gun-case suffer no damage at the -door.—_Abridged from Temple Bar._ - - * * * * * - - Thus God has willed - That man when fully skilled - Still gropes in twilight dim, - Encompassed all his hours - By fearfullest powers - Inflexible to him. - That so he may discern - His feebleness, - And e’en for earth’s success - To Him in wisdom turn, - Who holds for us the keys of either home, - Earth and the world to come. - - —_Cardinal Newman._ - - - - -ASTRONOMY OF THE HEAVENS. - -By PROF. M. B. GOFF. - - -FOR JULY. - - -THE SUN. - -We now enter upon what is usually called the “heated term,” in earnest. -The “Dog Days” are upon us, that is, we say they are; but the statement -is a somewhat doubtful one. We have the story that the ancients regarded -the Dog Star, _Sirius_, in the constellation _Canis Major_, as the -source of “unnumbered woes,” because it rose a short time before the -sun about the season of their year that the hot weather set in, and -diseases incident to their climate more than usually prevailed. It is -said that they estimated this period as continuing for the space of -forty consecutive days, beginning twenty days before, and continuing -twenty days after what was called the heliacal (that is, rising just long -enough before the sun to be visible) rising of the Dog Star. Now, the -difficulty we moderns find in fixing the limits of these days is this: -The heliacal rising of the star for any one place can readily be found; -but when determined for one place, it would not suit for another in a -different latitude. Besides, the right ascension of Sirius, on account -of the precession of the equinoxes, is constantly increasing, and hence -for the same place these days fall later each year, in the course of -time occurring even in mid-winter. Almanac makers, when they notice them -at all, seem to take the liberty of treating them to suit their own -convenience. For example, one of this year’s publications announces that -“Dog Days” begin on the 21st of July, and end on the 30th of August, -making, as we see by including one extreme date, altogether the forty -days claimed by the ancients. But in this latitude, on the former date, -the star rises at 5:43 a. m., one hour and five minutes _after_, and on -the latter date at 3:06 a. m., two hours and twenty minutes _before_ -sunrise. Others fix the time from July 3rd to August 11th (forty days), -without any respect to the rising of _Sirius_, which on the former date -appears above our horizon at 6:51 a. m., or two hours and seventeen -minutes after, and on the latter date at 4:18 a. m., forty-nine minutes -before sunrise. Others, again, making an effort, we presume, to adapt -them to our climate, regard them as continuing only thirty-two days, -namely, from July 24th to August 24th. Taking it all in all, we may as -well leave them to the Egyptians and Ethiopians, among whom the ideas in -regard to them seem to have originated, as a superstition of the past -ages, taking our “heated term” at its usual time, July and August, and -throwing our “Dog Days,” as some do physic, “to the dogs.” - -Whether we account for it by the extreme heat or not, it is nevertheless -a fact that the sun lags along behind our clocks during this entire -month; on the 1st, not reaching the meridian till 12:03:41 p. m.; on -the 15th till 12:05:44 p. m., and on the 30th till six minutes and nine -seconds after noon. The time of the sun’s rising on the 1st, 15th and -30th, is 4:33, 4:43 and 4:56 a. m.; and the time of setting on the same -dates is 7:34, 7:29 and 7:17 p. m., respectively. The 30th day of this -month will be about forty minutes shorter than the 1st, the latter being -fifteen hours one minute, and the former fourteen hours and twenty-one -minutes in length. The time from daybreak to the end of twilight is, on -the 1st, 19 hours 24 minutes. Sun is due west on the 30th at 5:29 p. m. -Its greatest elevation above the horizon in latitude 41° 30′, is 71° 33⅔′. - - -THE MOON - -Exhibits the following phases: Full moon, 5:02 a. m. on the 8th; last -quarter, 4:30 p. m. on the 15th; new moon, 7:46 a. m. on the 22nd; first -quarter on the 29th, at 4:53 p. m. On the 1st it sets at 12:11 a. m., and -on the 30th, at 11:51 p. m. On the 15th, rises at 11:32 p. m. On the 4th, -at 7:54 a. m., and again on the 31st at 11:00 p. m. it is at its maximum -distance from the earth. On the 20th, at 1:36 a. m. is nearest the earth. -Its greatest elevation, equal 67° 13⅔′, occurs on the 19th; and its -least elevation, amounting to 29° 42⅔′ on the 5th. - - -MERCURY. - -This planet will be morning star till the 13th, after which it will be -evening star till the end of the month. It rises on the 1st at 3:41 a. -m.; sets on the 15th at 7:41 p. m., and on the 30th at 8:07 p. m., on -which latter date it is possibly visible to the naked eye. Its motion -during the month is direct, and amounts to 62° 30′ 31.5″. On the 17th -at 6:00 a. m. it is nearest the sun; on the 12th at 1:00 a. m., 6° 20′ -north of Venus; on the same date, at midnight, is in superior conjunction -with the sun; that is, it is in a line with the earth and sun, and in -the order, Earth, Sun, Mercury; on the 23rd, at 3:00 a. m., 1° 10′ north -of Jupiter; and on the 23rd, at 7:05 a. m., 6° 30′ north of the moon. -Diameter decreases from 5.6″ to 5.4″. - - -VENUS. - -A view of Venus during this month through a telescope of moderate power -would be an interesting sight, since she now presents the appearance of -our moon in its first or last quarter, and thus seems quite different -from the simple star that is visible to the naked eye. She will be -evening star till the 11th, at which time she reaches her inferior -conjunction, that is, reaches a point directly between the earth and the -sun; after which she will be morning star, not only to the end of this -month, but for several successive months. Of course, for a number of days -both before and after conjunction, she will, on account of her proximity -to the sun, be invisible. We shall miss her “beaming countenance,” but -we know that she will appear again. On the 1st she sets at 8:14 p. m., -and rises on the 15th at 4:38 a. m., and on the 30th at 3:17 a. m. On the -21st at 6:28 a. m. she is 1° 11′ south of the moon; and on the 29th at -11:00 a. m., farthest from the sun. - - -MARS - -Has from the 1st to 30th a direct motion of 15° 36′ 32″, and although -much reduced in apparent diameter, is still quite a prominent object in -the evening sky, following westward in the wake of Jupiter. His diameter -decreases from 5.6″ to 5.2″. He rises in the forenoon, and sets as -follows, in the evening: On the 1st at 10:47; on the 15th at 10:11; and -on the 30th at 9:31. On the 26th at 5:04 p. m. he is 2° 5′ north of the -moon. - - -JUPITER - -Will be evening star throughout the entire month, though at its close -approaching so near the sun as to be scarcely visible. He sets at the -following times: On the 1st at 9:08; on the 15th at 8:22; and on the 30th -at 7:33 p. m. His motion is direct, and amounts from the 1st to the 30th, -to 6° 17′ 55″. Diameter decreases from 30.2″ to 29.6″. On the 23rd, at -3:00 a. m. is 1° 10′ south of Mercury; and on the same day at 6:34 a. m. -is 5° 21′ north of the moon. - - -SATURN. - -This planet is now one of our morning stars, rising on the 1st at 3:06, -on the 15th at 2:17, and on the 30th at 1:25 a. m. Motion direct, -amounting to 3° 32′ 30¾″. Diameter increases from 15.6″ to 16.2″. On the -19th, at 1:01 p. m. is 3° 2′ north of the moon. - - -URANUS, - -Whose direct motion during the month is estimated at 1° 3′ 26″, continues -its _role_ as evening star, setting at the following times: On the 1st at -11:10; on the 15th at 10:16; and on the 30th at 9:17 p. m. On the date -last named, _Beta Virginis_ will be only two minutes south of and will -set at the same time as the planet. On the 19th, at 2:00 p. m., Uranus -will be eleven minutes north of Mars; and on the 26th, at 9:57 a. m. will -be 2° 43′ north of the moon. - - -NEPTUNE - -Scarcely affords this month material for comment. Its diameter at present -appears to be 2.6″. Its motion is 40′ 35″, and is direct. On the 1st it -rises at 1:44 a. m.; on the 15th at 12:49 a. m.; and on the 30th at -11:45 p. m. At 5:27 p. m., on the 17th, it will be 1° 11′ north of the -moon. - - -FOR AUGUST. - -The mid-day shadows lengthening northward indicate to us northern folks -that “Old Sol” has departed on his annual southern tour. He now cuts off -the day at both ends, on the 1st rising 25 minutes later and setting 20 -minutes earlier than on the 1st of July. His change in declination since -June 20th, beginning of summer, till August 31st, will be a little over -15°, and the decrease in the length of the day for the same time, will be -a trifle less than two hours. He will come to the meridian on the 1st, -at six minutes and two seconds after 12:00; on the 15th at four minutes -and eight seconds after 12:00; and on the 30th at sixteen seconds after -12:00. On the same dates he will rise at 4:58, 5:11, and 5:26 a. m., and -set at 7:14, 6:57, and 6:35 p. m. Daybreak will occur at 3:05, 3:23, and -3:44 a. m., and twilight will end at 9:07, 8:45, and 8:16 p. m. Greatest -elevation in latitude 41° 30′ will be 66° 18⅔′. - - -THE MOON’S - -Phases occur in the following order and time: Full moon on the 6th, at -5:58 p. m.; last quarter on the 13th, at 10:00 p. m.; new moon on the -20th, at 4:46 p. m.; and first quarter on the 28th, at 10:34 a. m. The -moon rises on the 15th at 12:39 a. m.; and sets on the 1st and 31st at -12:30 and 12:43 a. m., respectively. On the 16th at 11:00 a. m., nearest -the earth; on the 28th, at 5:30 p. m., farthest from the earth. Its -greatest elevation, 67° 4′, occurs on the 15th, and its least, 29° 50.8′ -on the second day of the month. - - -MERCURY - -Reaches its greatest elongation east (27° 21′), very nearly its maximum -distance from the sun; yet the opportunity for observation is not so -favorable as on many occasions when the elongation is several degrees -less. And the reason is, that the planet is now moving southward, is in -fact on the 23rd, the date of its greatest eastern elongation, 1° 16′ -south, while the sun is still 11° 9′ north of the equator, and sets, -therefore, only about fifty minutes later than the sun. The time of the -planet’s setting is for the 1st, 8:07 p. m.; 15th, 7:53 p. m.; 30th, 7:16 -p. m. It has a direct motion of 32° 49′ 39″. Its diameter increases 2.6″, -namely, from 5.6″ to 8.2″. It is farthest from the sun on the 20th, at -6:00 a. m. On the 23d, at 8:00 a. m., 3° 5′ south of Uranus. - - -VENUS - -Again reaches a position of greatest brilliancy on the 17th, and during -the entire month will be an object of interest to early risers. On the -2nd she will appear stationary; and on the 17th at 4:37 p. m. will be 23 -minutes south of the moon. Her diameter will decrease from 49″ on the 1st -to 31.8″ on the 30th. Her time of rising will be as follows: On the 1st, -at 3:08; on the 15th, at 2:23; and on the 30th, at 2:01 a. m. - - -MARS - -Seems to grow “small by degrees and beautifully less,” his diameter at -the close of the month being only 4.8″. He sets at 9:25 on the evening of -the 1st; at 8:51 p. m. on the 15th, and at 8:13 p. m. on the 30th. On the -24th, at 10:29 a. m. he is only 10′ south of the moon. - - -JUPITER - -With his huge form and accompanying satellites fare the fate of -all “lights” terrestrial and celestial, and his “glory” sinks into -insignificance beside that of his “ruling power,” as he on the 7th, at -1:00 p. m. comes in conjunction with the sun and changes his relation -from that of an evening to that of a morning star. On the 1st he sets at -7:26 p. m.; on the 15th rises at 4:44 a. m.; and on the 30th rises at -4:02 a. m. Is in conjunction with and 5° 8′ north of the moon at 2:36 on -the morning of the 20th. - - -SATURN, - -Another of our morning stars, rises on the 1st and 15th at 1:18 and -12:28 a. m., respectively; and on the 29th, at 11:34 p. m. His diameter -increases from 16.2″ to 16.8″. His motion is direct, amounting to about -2° 43′. He can be found a little north of _Zeta_, the star denoting the -extremity of the northern horn of the constellation _Taurus_. On the -16th, at 12:41 a. m. will be 3° 17′ north of the moon. - - -URANUS, - -Which on the 30th of last month was so near _Beta Virginis_, has moved -about 1° 35′ farther to the east; but can be more readily pointed out -by its proximity to this than to that of any other star. Uranus is an -evening star, setting at the following dates: 1st, at 9:10 p. m.; 15th, -at 8:17 p. m.; 30th, at 7:20 p. m. Diameter, 3.6″. On the 22nd, at 9:35 -p. m. is 2° 25′ north of the moon; and on the 23rd is 3° 5′ north of -Mercury, at 8:00 a. m., an hour at which neither planet can be seen by -the unaided eye. - - -NEPTUNE, - -Last, but by no means least of the heavenly bodies, gives us this month -more than the usual variety, which, however, is not saying much for the -spice it affords. But it has a direct motion of 10° 42′, and a retrograde -motion of about 1′. On the 14th, at 11:00 p. m. it is in quadrature (90° -west of the sun); on the 26th, at 5:00 a. m. it is stationary, and on the -14th is 1° 25′ north of the moon. - - -FOR SEPTEMBER. - - -THE SUN - -“Crosses the line” on the 22nd at 10:13 a. m.; in other words, enters -the sign _Libra_, giving us a clearly marked time for the beginning of -another season—Autumn—which lasts 89 days, 18 hours, 29 minutes, nearly. -His greatest elevation above the horizon in latitude 41° 30′ is about 56° -28′, an indication that his time above the horizon is decidedly shorter -than it was last June, when his elevation was a little more than 71° 57′. -And this also is confirmed by the times of his rising and setting, which -are as follows: On the 1st, rises at 5:28 a. m., and sets at 6:32 p. m.; -on the 15th, rises at 5:41 a. m., and sets at 6:09 p. m.; on the 30th, -rises at 5:56 a. m., and sets at 5:43 p. m. Theoretically, on the 22nd, -the day and night should each be exactly 12 hours long; but practically -the daylight is longer than the darkness, on account of the refraction of -light by the earth’s atmosphere, which has the effect of bringing into -view the sun before it actually “rises,” and of detaining it in sight -after it has “set.” Twilight also affords us so much additional light -that we may safely assert that in any given place on the earth’s surface -there is much more “daylight” than “night.” For example, on the 30th, -daybreak occurs at 4:22 a. m., and twilight ends at 7:18 p. m., thus -giving three hours and nine minutes in which to lengthen our daily toil, -if we choose so to do. In the same latitude, and in different latitudes, -as was shown in THE CHAUTAUQUAN for June, the length of twilight varies, -so that in some instances the entire night is only twilight. Are these -facts any indication that we should be awake longer than we sleep? or -that we should labor more hours than we rest? Should we be always - - “Up and doing, - With a heart for any fate, - Still achieving, still pursuing”? - - -THE MOON. - -The man who attends to his neighbor’s business generally has his hands -full. So has the man who attends to the motions of his neighbor, the -moon. By the time he investigates her parallax, diameter, distance, -revolution on her axis, sidereal and synodic revolutions, the form of -her orbit, her phases, discusses her physical properties, determines -her heat, height of her mountains, size of her craters, describes her -librations, decides upon the effect she exercises on the weather, and a -thousand more or less of other things, he had better settle down and make -it the business of his life. And if he does, he may be able to show some -good results of his labors. It is well for us that not any single man, -but many men, have given our satellite so much attention; for it is only -by the uniting of the results of their researches that we are enabled -with comparative ease to predict what business our neighbor has on hand, -and when and how she will perform her duties. Thus, we find that she will -this month present the following phases: On the 5th, at 5:47 a. m., full; -on the 12th, at 3:08 a. m., last quarter; on the 19th, at 4:29 a. m., new -moon; on the 27th, at 5:13 a. m., first quarter. She will rise on the -15th at 1:39 a. m., and set on the 1st and 30th at 1:36 a. m. and 1:18 a. -m., respectively. At 12:54 p. m., on the 10th, will be nearest the earth -(in perigee), and on the 25th, at 12:54 (exactly fifteen days later), -farthest from the earth, or in apogee. Greatest elevation on the 12th, -amounting to 66° 54⅔′; least elevation on the 26th, equaling 30° 8′. - - -MERCURY - -Will be evening star till the time of its inferior conjunction on the -19th, after which it will be morning star. It appears stationary on -the 6th, and also again on the 28th. On the 19th it is 1° 34′ south of -the moon. Its apparent diameter increases from 8.4″ to 10.4″, and then -diminishes to 7.4″ at the close of the month. It sets on the 1st at 7:08 -p. m.; on the 15th at 6:05 p. m.; and rises on the 30th at 4:37 a. m. - - -VENUS - -Reaches her greatest distance east of the sun, 46° 6′, on the 29th, at -7:00 a. m. Her diameter decreases from 30.8″ to 22″; and her direct -motion amounts to 27° 40′ 55.2″. On the 15th, at 1:08 p. m., she is 2° -26′ north of the moon. She rises on the 1st, 15th and 30th, at 2:00, -1:59, and 2:11 a. m., respectively. - - -MARS - -Still retains his position as evening star, setting on the evening of -the 1st, 15th and 30th in the same order, at 8:08, 7:36 and 7:11. His -diameter decreases from 4.8″ to 4.6″. Direct motion amounts to about 18° -40′ 12″ of arc. He is 2° 20′ south of the moon on the 22nd, at 6:48 a. m. - - -JUPITER - -Is morning star, rising at the following times: 1st, at 3:55 a. m.; 15th, -at 3:16 a. m.; 30th, at 2:32 a. m. Its motion is direct, and equals about -5° 45′ 14″ of arc. Its diameter increases one second, being on the 30th -31″. On the 16th, at 8:30 p. m. is 4° 55′ north of the moon. - -The satellites of Jupiter, four in number and designated as 1, 2, 3, 4, -outwardly from the planet, are frequently used to find the longitude. To -do this, however, requires the use of a telescope. By observing the time -at which one of these satellites passes into or emerges from the shadow -of its primary, and comparing this time with the recorded time of the -same event in Washington City, for example, one can determine whether -he is east or west of this city, and how many degrees. On the 14th No. -1 enters the shadow of Jupiter at 4:46 a. m., Washington mean time. -Suppose the observer at Allegheny Observatory should note the same event -as occurring at exactly 57 minutes 50.84 seconds after four, Allegheny -Observatory time. He would find the difference of the two times to be -11 m. 50.84 s., which reduced to longitude by multiplying by 15 (since -one hour of time equals 15° of arc) gives the difference of longitude 2° -57′ 40.3″. And since the ingress occurred at Allegheny Observatory at -an earlier hour (by its local time) than by Washington local time, it -follows that the latter place is 2° 57′ 40.3″ east of the former. - - -SATURN - -Continues as in the last two or three months among the morning stars, -rising as follows: 1st, at 11:22 p. m.; 15th, at 10:30 p. m.; 30th, at -9:33 p. m. His diameter increases from 16.8″ to 17.8″. His motion is -direct, and equal to 1° 7′ 25″. On the 12th, at 9:17 a. m. he is 3° 28′ -north of the moon; and on the 16th, at 10:00 a. m. 90° west of the sun, -that is, in quadrature. - - -URANUS - -Makes a direct motion of 1° 43′ 22″ during the month. Its diameter -reaches its minimum for the year, 3.48″, on the 20th. On the 19th, at -4:13 a. m. it is 2° 14′ north of the moon. It begins the month as an -evening, but closes it as a morning star. It is, however, most of the -time above the horizon in daylight. On the 1st it rises at 6:54 a. m. and -sets at 7:06 p. m.; on the 30th it rises at 5:24 a. m., and sets 5:30 p. -m. - - -NEPTUNE, - -On the contrary, is above the horizon most of the month during the night, -rising on the 1st at 9:37 p. m.; on the 15th at 8:43 p. m.; and on the -30th at 7:44 p. m. Its motion is about 20′ 52″ retrograde, and its -diameter nearly constant at 2.6″. On the 10th, at 5:20 a. m., appears 1° -33′ north of the moon. - - - - -RISE HIGHER. - -By HELEN G. HAWTHORNE. - - - Soul of mine, - Would’st thou choose for life a motto half divine? - Let this be thy guard and guide - Through the future, reaching wide; - Whether good or ill betide, - Rise higher! - - From the mire - Where the masses blindly grovel, rise higher! - From the slavish love of gold, - From the justice bought and sold, - From the narrow rules of old, - Rise higher! - - Art thou vexed - By the rasping world around thee, and perplexed - By the sin and sorrow rife, - By the falsehood and the strife? - To a larger, grander life - Rise higher! - - If thou findest - That the friends thy heart had counted truest, kindest, - Have betrayed thee, why should’st thou - Wear for this a frowning brow? - Leave their falsehood far behind; - Rise higher! - - Let each care - Lift thee upward to a higher, purer air; - Then let Fortune do her worst; - Whether Fate has blessed or cursed; - Little matter, if thou first - Rise higher! - - And at last, - When thy sorrows and temptations all are past, - And the grand Death Angel brings - Summons from the King of Kings, - Thou shalt still, on angels’ wings - Rise higher. - - * * * * * - -I have a friend who wishes me to see that to be right which I know to be -wrong. But if friendship is to rob me of my eyes, if it is to darken the -day, I will have none of it. It should be expansive and inconceivably -liberalizing in its effects. True friendship can afford true knowledge. -It does not depend on darkness and ignorance.—_Thoreau._ - - - - -LANDMARKS OF BOSTON. - -IN SEVEN DAYS. - -By E. E. HALE. - - -The First Day. - -“My dear Isabella!” - -“My dearest Kate!” - -And the two women threw their arms each around the other’s neck, and, so -embracing, they kissed each other. - -“And where are the children?” - -The children appeared at once. That tall John, who looked little enough -like a child, was lifting his sister Caroline from the carriage. Molly -followed, and it was explained that the elder John, Isabella’s husband, -had undertaken to bring Dick up from the train on foot and by the horse -cars, that he might explain to him something of the geography of Boston, -so that he might be a guide to the rest. Proper fears were expressed that -they might be lost. But of course they were not lost, and, in due time, -they also joined the jolly breakfast table, where they found the first -comers seated. - -The reader, if he be bright, already understands what if he be dull shall -be now explained to him. Kate and Isabella are two mothers of families, -tenderly attached in early life, who have been parted now in many years. -Kate’s husband is a prosperous wool merchant in Boston, and she and her -six children live in Roxbury, one of the pretty suburbs of that old town. -Isabella and her husband are among the spirited and wise founders of -Greeley, in Colorado. And, though they have not lived in that town now -for some years, so that their names will not be found on its enlarging -directory, all their four children were born there, and until this summer -no one of the four has ever left Colorado. This summer all of them have -come eastward, that boys and girls may practice their mountain swimming -in the bath, well nigh matchless, of the beach well nigh perfect, at -Narragansett Pier. And it has been arranged by great correspondence -that, for a week before the hotels at the Pier are open, namely, for the -second week of June, the whole family shall make a visit in Roxbury, so -that they may come to know “Aunt Kate,” as Mrs. Dudley has always called -herself, and Aunt Kate’s six children, who are to them all every whit as -good as cousins. - -All this, as has been said, the thoroughly intelligent reader understood -as the different characters came forward. It has now been explained to -readers less intelligent, so that we all start fairly together. - -“George is so sorry to be away. But he had to take an early train to -Providence, to be sure to be with you at dinner. He has left no end of -love, and you are to do nothing but rest yourselves to-day.” - -The young people of both clans looked amused at the idea of resting on -a fine morning in June. And, in truth, the plans were soon made for a -series of expeditions—which the reader will follow or not, just as he -chooses—in which John Crehere, the father, with the practical assistance -of Nathan Dudley, the oldest of Kate’s six children, laid out the seven -days of their visit, so that all parties should, with due regard to -the demands of pleasure, see in that time, all too narrow, the chief -LANDMARKS OF BOSTON. - - -First Day. - -“You see,” said Nathan, who was rather the historical member of the home -crowd, and was at home somewhat distinguished for “poking about” in one -and another corner—“you see, the absolute original landmarks of Boston -are gone, or as much altered as they could be.” - -“When the first people came here, old John Blackstone, and even Winthrop -and Dudley, our Tom. Dudley, our ancestor, of course it was not called -Boston. It was called Trimountain, or Tremont, I suppose by people in -the fishing ships, because at the top of Beacon Hill there were three -hummocks, like this,” and the boy cut a bit of bread into the shape he -meant, two protuberances in the side of a hill a little higher. - -“And these were Fort Hill, and Copp’s Hill, and Beacon Hill,” said his -Aunt Isabella, as usual willing to show that she also knew something. - -“Not quite yet, Aunt Isabella,” said the boy, modestly enough. “Most -people think so. And I think most Boston people would tell you so, but -they would be wrong. The three hummocks were all on Beacon Hill—that’s -where the State House is now. Oddly enough they are all gone. They dug -down the highest, where the Beacon was, part of it when they built the -State House, and the rest afterward, to fill up the old mill pond. And -the others were so steep that they had to be dug down for streets. But -when I take you to the State House, and over Mt. Vernon and Somerset -streets you will have tramped over them all.” - -“I really think, mamma,” the boy added, “that at least the boys had -better go to the top of the State House with me, first of all. You know -Dean Stanley did.” - -It is true that when Dr. Stanley came to Boston, true to the principles -of Arnold’s school of history, he was eager first of all, to understand -the precise topography of all he was to see. His first visit, therefore, -was to the top of the State House, and his last, after his short stay, -was to the same observatory, that he might be sure he had rightly placed -all that he had seen. - -In our case it need not be said that all the children ridiculed any -doubts of their ability to climb two hundred and twenty stairs, more -or less, and also ridiculed that other idea, that they were tired. -Accordingly, though the two mothers took the morning to talk over the -events of twenty years by themselves in Mrs. Dudley’s room, and while Mr. -Crehere went down town to look up some business correspondents, Nathan -was permitted, to his solid satisfaction, to take the young people to the -top of the State House, to the Common, and anywhere else he chose. “And -we will get our lunch where we do our work, mamma,” he said. - -“Cousin Nathan,” said his new friend Caroline, who was no more his cousin -than you are, “be sure that I see a ship, a real three-master, before we -go away. Steamships I don’t care for.” And he promised. - -This article is written in some hope that it may serve as a handy guide -for visitors to Boston this summer, who may have time to make any of the -excursions which these young people made during the week of their visit. -We shall not, therefore, try so much to tell what they saw, as how they -saw it, in the hope and wish that others may see the same. A street car -brought the party to the head of Winter Street, and here Nathan brought -them out of it upon what he called the Lower Mall, on the eastern side -of Boston Common. Here he put all the girls upon a seat, while the boys -grouped around him, and with his stick he drew a rough map on the ground. - -“We may get parted from each other. But if any one is lost while you -are in Boston, the streets are just as easy to understand as those of -Philadelphia or Chicago, after you once know the law of the instrument. - -“This hill we are on is the east slope of Beacon Hill. If we had followed -in the car we could have ridden round it to Cambridge, in this open horse -shoe which I draw. - -“North of us, quite at the north of the town, is Copp’s Hill. We will see -that another day. The streets around that are in curves also. - -“Off here on the southeast was Fort Hill. The streets there bent to -follow the curve. But that is all dug down. - -“Then, of course, in a seaboard town, from every wharf or pier, there ran -up streets into the town. If you took a fan, and put the center at the -Postoffice Square, the sticks would be Water Street, Milk Street, Pearl -Street, Federal Street, and so on. Now all this is just as much according -to rule as if you made a checker board. Only you must know what the rule -is.” - -“I think it is a great deal nicer,” said Caroline. And Nathan thanked her. - -The rule in practice is said to be: “Find out where the place is to which -you go, and take a horse car running the other way.” - -“Now we will go up to the State House.” So they slowly pulled up the Park -Street walk, up the high steps between the two bronze statues, stopped in -the Doric Hall to see the statues and the battle flags, and then slowly -mounted the long stairways which lead to the “lantern” above the dome. -Fortunately the Legislature had adjourned. When the House is in session -visits to the lantern are not permitted, lest the trampling on the stairs -above the Representatives’ Hall might disturb the hearers. - -When they had regained their breath, they looked round on the magnificent -panorama which sweeps a circle of forty miles in diameter, and Nathan -lectured. His lecture must not be reported here in detail. But the -main points of it shall be stated, because they give the clew to the -expeditions which the party made on succeeding days. - -They were so high that all the rest of the city was quite below them. -Nathan was able to point out—almost in a group, they seemed to his -western friends, used to large distances—Faneuil Hall, the old State -House, and the Old South Meeting House of Revolutionary times. - -“We will do those,” he said, “to-morrow, and then you can see where the -tea was thrown over, and the scene of the Boston Massacre. That will be a -good Revolutionary day.” - -To the north, with a strip of water between, so narrow, and bridged so -often that it hardly seemed a deep river, half a mile wide, was the -monument on Bunker Hill. The Summit was the only point near them as high -as they were. “We will go there on Friday,” said Nathan, “day after -to-morrow. And that same day we can see Copp’s Hill, which is the north -headland of Old Boston, and we can go to the Navy Yard, and Carry shall -see her ship with three masts. - -“Saturday—I don’t know what papa will say—but I vote that we go down -the harbor. We will see Nahant, which is a rocky peninsula ten miles -northeast, or Hull, which is about as far southeast; they make the -headlands of Boston Bay.” And he tried to make out both these points. He -did show them the outer light-house and the great forts between. And all -of the Westerners were delighted with their first view of the sea horizon. - -“You do not feel the same at Chicago,” said John; “though you do not see -the other side, you know it is there.” - -“Then Sunday,” said Nathan, husbanding his days prudently, “some of us -can go to Christ Church, where the sexton showed the lantern.” - -“And can we not see the church with the cannon ball? - - “‘Bears on her bosom as a bride might do, - The iron breastpin that the rebels threw.’” - -This was Caroline’s question. She quoted Dr. Holmes. - -“No,” said John, sadly. “We were barbarians, and pulled that church -down.” And he added savagely, “and no good came to the society that did -it.” - -“That will leave Monday for a good tramp over Dorchester Heights, and -Tuesday, if you are not tired, we will go to Cambridge, and see Harvard -College.” - -And he showed them how high the “Dorchester Heights,” now in South -Boston, rose, and how completely they commanded the harbor; so that when -Washington seized them the English army and navy had to go. He also -showed them Cambridge and the college buildings, lying quite near them, -westward, but on the other side of the Charles River. John looked with -special interest, because he was to take his first examination there for -Harvard College, before the month was over. - -To this plan, substantially, the party adhered. And travelers who -have more or less time than they, may find it worth while to consult -this plan, as they lay out their excursions. For in those seven days -the visitors did, in fact, have a chance to see all the more important -landmarks of the history of Boston. - -As Nathan took them home from the State House he led them down Beacon -Street. This is a beautiful street, making the north side of Boston -Common. Where the Common ends, Charles Street crosses Beacon Street -nearly at right angles. Near this corner, on land now built upon, or -perhaps crossed by some street, was the cottage of Blackstone, who -lived in Boston for six or seven years before Governor Winthrop and the -settlers of 1630 arrived. - -They made their first settlement at Charlestown on the other side of the -river. The records of Charlestown say: “Mr. Blackstone, dwelling on the -other side of Charles River, alone, at a place called by the Indians, -Shawmut, where he had a cottage at, or not far from the place called -Blackstone Point, came and acquainted the Governor of an excellent -spring, inviting and soliciting him thither.” - -Blackstone’s house, or cottage, in which he lived, together with the -nature of his improvements, was such as to authorize the belief that he -had resided there some seven or eight years. How he became possessed -of his lands here is not known; but it is certain he held a good title -to them, which was acknowledged by the settlers under Winthrop, who, -in course of time, bought his lands of him, and he removed out of the -jurisdiction of Massachusetts to the valley of the Blackstone River. - -Of Blackstone’s personal history Nathan afterward read them this note, by -Mr. Charles F. Adams: - - “He was in no respect an ordinary man. His presence in the - peninsula of Shawmut, in 1630, was made additionally inexplicable - from the fact that he was about the last person one would - ever have expected to find there. He was not a fisherman, nor - a trader, nor a refugee: he was a student, an observer, and - a recluse. A graduate of Emmanuel College, Cambridge, he had - received Episcopal ordination in England. In 1630 he was in his - thirty-fifth year. All this is extremely suggestive, for it - goes to make of him exactly the description of man who would - naturally be found in company with the scholarly and unobtrusive - Morell. Further, the probabilities would strongly point to him as - Winthrop’s authority where Winthrop, in 1631, speaks of a species - of weather record going back seven years since this bay was - planted by Englishmen.” - - -The Second Day. - -As the various travelers told their times that evening, a certain plan -was laid out for the next day, in which the two ladies agreed to join. -And it was finally agreed that they should lunch down town with the -gentlemen, and should take the elevator at the “Equitable” Insurance -Company, so that the two mothers might have something to substitute for -the view the children had had from the State House. - -This plan may be recommended to lady travelers. The view is not as -sweeping on the west as that from the State House. But, on other sides, -it is equally satisfactory. And you can go up by steam—a great matter -when you have passed forty years. - -But before lunch Nathan took them to the head of State Street, to the -“Old State House.” - -“This,” said he, “is what the Philadelphia girl called the State Street -Meeting House.” - -He had brought them in in a Norfolk horse car, so that they saw the -building from the southern side. The lion on one side and the unicorn -on the other dance on their hind legs at the top, with the roof to -part them. Nathan was careful to show John and the rest that as they -looked up on the beasts they stood themselves on the very ground of the -“Boston Massacre” of March 5, 1770. The English troops were in a little -semi-circle on the north side of the street. Attuchs, the mulatto, and -the rest of the mob who stoned the troops and snowballed them were in -the street, or on the southern side. There were then no sidewalks. - -The lower part of the “Old State House” is now used for public offices. -But the upper chambers are restored to much the condition in which they -were when Sam Adams defied the Governor there, and when Otis made his -plea in the “Writs of Assistants cases.” - -“Then and there,” said John Adams, afterward, “American independence was -born.” - -The “Bostonian Society” occupies these halls, simply that they may be -open to all visitors, and here the party found many curious mementoes of -Revolutionary and of older days, and were able to prepare themselves for -their later excursions. - -Before the “Town House” was built this spot was occupied as the market -place, being the earliest in the town. The first town house was erected -between 1657 and 1659, of wood. It was destroyed in the great fire of -1711. In the following year, 1712, a brick edifice was erected on the -same spot. This the fire of 1747 consumed, and with it many valuable -records were lost. The present Old State House was erected the following -year, 1748, but it has undergone many interior changes, the exterior, -however, presenting nearly the same appearance as when first erected. -From 1750 to 1830 Faneuil Hall was used as a town house, and the first -city government was organized there. In 1830 the city government removed -to the Old State House, which was on September 17 dedicated as City Hall. -But the City Hall has since been removed to School Street. - -Leaving the old State House they passed down State Street, where they -had a chance to see the merchants who were “on ’change,” and to look in -at the Merchants’ Exchange, and by a short street leading north, came -into the square between Faneuil Hall, “the cradle of liberty,” as Boston -people like to call it, and Faneuil Hall Market. - -Peter Faneuil, a rich merchant of Huguenot origin, told the town that he -would build a market house on this spot if they would accept the gift for -that purpose, and maintain it forever. “The town,” by which is meant the -town meeting, looked a gift-horse in the mouth, and made some difficulty. -At the end of a stormy meeting, his proposal was accepted by a majority -of only seven votes in a vote of seven hundred and twenty-seven. - -Mr. Faneuil set to work at once on the building, which, by the original -plan, was to be but one-story high. But he added another story for the -town hall, which has made his name famous to all New Englanders. The -original hall accommodated only 1,000 persons, being but half the size of -that now standing. He died, himself, just as the building was completed, -on the third of March, 1743; and it was first opened to public use on the -fourteenth of March of that year. The whole interior was destroyed by -fire in January, 1763, and rebuilt by the town and state. In 1806 it was -enlarged to its present size. - -Nathan made them look at the grass-hopper which is the weather-cock -which is selected in memory of the Athenian cicada. The Athenian people -selected this as their emblem because they believed they sprang from the -ground, and they supposed the grass-hoppers did. - -The people of Boston long since provided themselves with a much larger -market house than Peter Faneuil’s. When they did so, they gave up the -market in Faneuil Hall, and used the basement for other purposes. But -their lawyers, after a while, recollected that stirring town meeting, and -the promise of the town to maintain the market “forever.” Clearly enough, -if the town meant to keep the hall, it must maintain the market. So the -butchers and fruit men were brought back again, and Mrs. Dudley bade John -buy some bananas for the party, in the market, that they might keep Peter -Faneuil well in their memory. - -The Historic Hall is over the market, and always open to visitors, and -here the party spent half an hour in looking at the pictures. Nathan -told them of the last and only time when he heard Wendell Phillips there. -It is not the largest hall in Boston, but it is still the favorite hall -for any public meeting about some public interest, where people are not -expecting to sit down. - -The gentlemen joined the party by appointment here, and they all went to -lunch together. They then went up the Equitable elevator and mounted the -tower, so that the ladies might see the sea view. And they finished the -day’s excursion by going into the Old South Meeting House. - -This old meeting house was twice as big as Faneuil Hall of the -Revolution, so that the crowded town meetings of those days often -adjourned to the Old South. As the patriots called Faneuil Hall “the -cradle of liberty,” Gov. Gage called the Old South the “nursery of -rebellion.” The religious society which formerly occupied it built a -few years ago a new church in the western part of Boston, and sold this -meeting house to an association which wished to preserve it as a memorial -of the history of Boston. The sellers did not wish to have any opposition -church established in the old building; they therefore put a provision in -the deed that for twenty years it should not be used for public religious -purposes. It is probably the only spot in the United States, where, by -the expressed wish of a church, public worship is forbidden. - -The travelers found a great deal to interest them in the meeting house, -which those travelers will find who use this guide. The boys obtained -leave to climb up the spire, from which, it is said, that the English -governor, Gage, saw the embarkation of his troops for Bunker Hill, and -what he could see of the battle. - - -Third Day. - -The next day proved favorable for Nathan’s plans, which involved a visit -to Bunker Hill monument and the navy yard. - -“I had meant,” he said to the girls, “to begin by taking you out to -Concord, that you might see the bridge over the Concord River, and the -scene of what we call ‘Concord Fight.’ But, if the day prove hot, it -would have been tiresome, as we have the monument to climb. For that -expedition one needs half a day, or better, a day. You know you would -want to see Mr. Emerson’s house and Mr. Hawthorne’s. We will try that -next fall.” - -They started later, therefore, than the Concord plan would have required. -A transfer at Scollary Square, the very heart of active Boston, put them -in a Charlestown car. In Scollary Square stands very properly a statue of -Winthrop, the founder of Boston, and its first governor; as at the foot -of the street stands Sam Adams. - -Nathan explained to the girls, when they came to river and bridge, that -at the time of Bunker Hill battle there was no bridge. The English army, -when it attacked the hill, had to cross in boats, and he showed them on -the east, the line the boats took, landing where the navy yard now is. -The forces landed there and waited through a hot day before the attack. -The battle was fought on a hot June afternoon. - -After they came to Charlestown, a short walk brought them to the top -of the hill, where a large green park takes in all the ground of the -historic Redoubt. A bronze statue of Prescott seems to welcome the -visitor. - -By an ascent even longer than that they made at the State House, they -climbed the monument, and earned their sight of the panorama from its top. - -Mr. Dudley had given them a note to introduce them to the commander at -the navy yard on their return. It proved that he was absent. But they -needed no pass nor introduction. They were very courteously received; -and, as there happened to be a ship fitting out with stores for the -Mediterranean Station, Caroline had her chance to see “a three-masted -ship” nearly ready for sea. - -Another ship was in the “dry-dock” for some necessary repairs, and they -walked about her with that strange feeling of being beneath the level of -the sea, which they had seen above before they descended the stairway. - - -Fourth Day. - -Saturday proved to be a warm day, and Mr. Dudley proposed at breakfast -that they should carry out Nathan’s plan, and that all hands should go -to Nahant, the rocky peninsula which bounds the outer harbor on the -northeastern side. His wife put up a substantial luncheon, which was -packed in two baskets and carried by the boys. - -So equipped, they took the horse car and “transferred” at Sumner Street -for the steamboat, which would take them to the Lynn Railroad. They could -have taken the Easton Railroad, but the Lynn Road (so called) runs along -the water’s edge, and the water sail is longer. - -So the young people had their first sniff of sea air from the boat which -crosses from Old Boston to East Boston, where the railroad begins. -Caroline had chances enough to see “ships with three masts,” brigs, -schooners, sloops, barks, brigantines and barkantines, all which the -learned Nathan explained to her. After a voyage of a mile or two they -took the narrow guage railway and flew along Chelsea Beach, which gave -a fine ocean view, and more of the glory of the infinite sea, than the -steamboat had done. At Lynn they found public carriages waiting for the -drive to Nahant. - -Mr. Willis, in his extravagant way, said that Nahant looked like the open -hand of a giant who had been struck down in the sea, and that Nahant -Beach was his arm. A very thin arm he had, a mere thread-paper arm, for -a big hand. For the beach is only a strip of sand and gravel about two -miles long, washed by the ocean on both sides. At the southern end, rise, -abrupt and bold, the rocks of Nahant. They are mostly of trap-rock, which -has been forced by some volcanic effect of the fiery times, up through -the hissing sea. They have a reddish color, with stripes of black stone, -even harder than the rest. And the perpetual washing of the sea has worn -out clefts and chasms of every strange outline and form. - -One of these is the Swallow’s Cave, a long passage through wet rocks, -covered above by rocks, through which at low tides adventurers can -clamber. One is the Spouting Horn, where at half-tide, a sea heavily -thrown in by a stiff eastern gale, bounds back in spray and water, as if -indeed a sea-god had thrown it up in a great fountain. But the glory of -Nahant is not in any one of these sights. It is the glory of the infinite -ocean. Southeast and west you have the sea, and it is no wonder that in -this perfect sea-climate, so many people are glad to make a summer home. - -Mr. Dudley met, by appointment, a Boston friend, after they had crossed -the beach, who husbanded their time for them in visiting different -points, and before the afternoon closed, asked them to come back to -town in his yacht. Their plan had been to take the steamboat, which was -waiting ready to take all such children of the public as they. - -But in the “Sylph” they were able to vary their voyage. Mr. Cradock -showed them from her deck that nearly south of them, a string of little -islands shielded the harbor, in a measure, from eastern gales. Of these -the three most important are the three Brewsters, on one of which is the -outer light-house. The yacht first ran by these. Then she turned inland -and he pointed out to them the village of Hull, which on the southeast -protects the bay, as Nahant on the northeast. He bade the helmsman bring -the vessel up at Fort Warren, and the young people had then a chance to -see the arrangements which a great fort makes to repel an enemy. And -then, as the sun went down they ran swiftly up to Boston, saw the State -House and Bunker Hill monument against the evening glow, and landed after -a day of thoroughly satisfactory variety. - - -The Fifth Day. - -Fortunately for the sight seers, as Mrs. Crehere thought, the next day -was Sunday, so much chance was there for a day of rest. But she found -at breakfast that there were one or two ecclesiastical landmarks which -were to be counted in with the others, and that, with perfect gravity and -reverence, the young people had arranged to unite their sight seeing with -the religious services of the day. To this she made no exception, and in -the end she and her husband joined the ten young people, and all together -made an addition, not unacceptable as it proved, to summer congregations -not crowded. - -The first point was King’s Chapel. - - “The chapel, last of sublunary things - That shocks our senses with the name of King’s.” - -Such is Dr. Holmes’s description. It is in the very heart of active -Boston. After the Revolution it was long called “The Stone Chapel,” for -in those early days stone churches were rare, and nothing bore the name -of King. Royal biscuit was then called “President’s biscuit.” But after -people were sure that no King George would return, the Chapel people, who -were no longer in the habit of praying for the royal family, returned -to “King’s Chapel” as the historical name of their church, and found -again the neglected gilded crown and mitre, which had once adorned the -organ, and restored them to the places from which they had been removed. -After the service, which interested all the young people, they remained -in the church to look at the curious old monuments. They were specially -interested in that of Mrs. Shirley, the lovely wife of Governor Shirley. -She died just as he was fortifying Boston against the largest fleet which -France ever sent across the seas. This is the fleet of Longfellow’s -ballad: - - “For the admiral D’Anville - Had sworn by cross and crown, - To ravage with fire and steel - Our luckless Boston Town.” - -While Shirley had the whole army of Massachusetts on Boston Common, and -was bringing every resource to bear to resist the enemy, his heart was -wrung day by day by the sickness and the death of the young bride, whose -bust the children saw, and whose epitaph they translated. - -Nathan told them that when the King’s Chapel was built there had been no -quarries of stone opened. The stones for this building were split and -hewed from boulders. By the time it was finished it was currently said -and believed that there was not stone enough in the province for another -church as big! He took them to the back of the church and showed them, -on a little green, Franklin statue, placed in what was the yard of the -school-house where he studied as a boy. - -King’s Chapel was not popular with the puritan inhabitants of Boston. -And, because the lower windows are square and look like port holes, -the street boys of a century and a quarter ago nicknamed it “Christ’s -Frigate,” somewhat irreverently. On the other side the street was once -the school-house, where John Hancock and Sam Adams studied. And Nathan -showed them where the “coast” was in winter, which was obstructed by the -English officer whom the school boys called to account for his violation -of their inalienable rights. - -They went to church with their friend Mrs. Cradock, whom they had met -at Nahant the day before, and from her house, in the afternoon, they -went to Christ Church, which is the oldest church building in Boston now -standing on the ground where it was built. It was the second Episcopalian -church erected in Boston, and was built in 1723, several years before -the present Old South. It is a brick edifice, and has long been known as -the “North End Church.” In its day it was considered one of the chief -architectural ornaments of the North End. The old steeple was blown down -in the great gale of 1804, falling upon an old wooden building at the -corner of Tileston Street, through which it crashed to the consternation -of the tenants, who however escaped injury. The steeple was replaced -from a design by Charles Bulfinch, which carefully preserved the -proportion of the original. Its chime was the first in New England, and -began to play its charming tunes in 1744. - -The Bible, prayer books and silver now in use were given in 1733 by King -George I. The figures of cherubim in front of the organ were taken from a -French vessel by the privateer “Queen of Hungary,” and presented to the -church in 1746. There is an interesting bust of Washington in the church. - -From the steeple of this church the historic sexton hung out the lanterns -which warned the patriots on the other side of the river that an -expedition was starting from the English camp, against Concord. - -“One if by land—two if by sea,” says Mr. Longfellow, whose history of -those days is more likely to be remembered well than any other. That -steeple, as has been said, was blown down in 1804. - -As they walked to the Chelsea car, which was to take them home, Nathan -led them through the Copp’s Hill burying ground. Copp’s Hill has never -been cut away. Fort Hill is wholly leveled, and Beacon Hill partly so. -These were the three hills which were the landmarks of old Boston. - - -The Sixth Day. - -On Monday morning the Roxbury boys took their cousins to see their -tennis ground, and it may be believed that all parties there joined in -one or two games. Mrs. Dudley and Mrs. Crehere went into Boston for some -necessary shopping, and came back by the Art Museum, where was a good -“Loan Exhibition.” The loan exhibition in summer is generally filled -with masterpieces from the private galleries of people who are in their -country homes. “I would not pay so much for pictures,” said one of these -noble women, “if the people were not to enjoy them nine-tenths of the -time.” - -But Mrs. Dudley had so arranged her dinner that they might all take a -street car for “Dorchester Heights” and see the view of the harbor from -that point, and that the boys, who had had no chance to swim at Nahant, -might take a sea bath on their return. - -Accordingly, about five o’clock they started for South Boston. “Take any -car for City Point,” was Nathan’s final direction as the party separated. -“Ask for the Reservoir, and we will meet there.” - -“Dorchester Heights” is simply the name, which only old fashioned people -would understand, of the hills in what is now “South Boston,” now -surmounted by the “Blind Institution” and a public park, in which is one -of the city reservoirs. Visitors to Boston who are at all interested in -education will do well to drop a line on arrival, for Mr. Anagnos, the -chief of the Blind Institution, to ask what is the proper day for a visit -there. Our friends were obliged to defer this interesting visit till the -autumn, and they all gathered on the other hill and enjoyed the spectacle -of the harbor, white with the sails of hundreds of yachts, and all alive -with the movements of the lolling steamers as they went out, just before -sunset, on their voyages to every port of the seaboard, not to say of the -world. - -These high hills completely command the harbor, in a military sense. Why -the English generals did not take possession before Washington did no one -ever knew. That was the sort of imbecility George III. got by appointing -men to office because they were his relations. When, at last, the winter -of 1775-1776 broke up, and no ice had formed strong enough for an attack -on Boston over the ice, Washington seized these hills. By the road now -called Dorchester Avenue, which Nathan Dudley showed our friends, he sent -from the camp in Roxbury (“just behind where we live,” said Nathan) the -men and munitions. It was all done by night. On the morning of the fifth -of March the Americans had built a fortification which surprised the -English officers in Boston as that on Bunker Hill had surprised them nine -months before. “It was like Aladdin’s lamp,” wrote one of them. - -General Howe’s first plan was to assault the works, as Gage had assaulted -those at Bunker Hill. Howe sent an attacking force to the fort held by -him on the island. But a storm made this attack impossible. Ward, the -commander of the American right wing, strengthened his ranks. Thomas, the -general in command on the heights, asked nothing better than an attack. -But Howe, at the last, saw that the venture was madness. He entered into -negotiations with Washington, and, a fortnight after, withdrew fleet and -army. For several months there was not an English soldier on American -soil. - -The next day, when they visited the Historical Society, Nathan showed -his cousins the original gold medal which Congress gave to Washington in -honor of this victory. It was designed by a French artist, and struck -in Paris. It represents Washington seated on his horse, on Dorchester -Heights, as the squadron retires. It bears the proud motto: - - “_Hostibus primo Fugatis_,” - -which may be translated: “The first Flight of the Enemy.” - -“Pray how did this medal come here?” said Caroline. - -“By the fortune of war,” said her cousin. On this Monday evening, before -they left the park, which now takes the place of the fortification, they -looked at the tablet of stone which commemorates the history. They found -the name of the mayor who put it up, but no allusion to General Ward who -planned the work, or General Thomas, who carried it out. Such, alas, is -fame! - -When they left the hill the sun was going down. The elders and the girls -took a car across Dover Street, by which they could go directly home. But -Nathan led the boys to the public bath house, on one of the beaches; and -there his western friends had their first experience of the exquisite -luxury of a swim in the salt sea. - - -The Last Day. - -On Wednesday the whole western party was to go to Narragansett Pier, -and on Thursday the Roxbury party was to start, bag and baggage, for -Quonochontaug, which is not far from that resort. But it was determined -that on Tuesday the young people should go to Cambridge, where, at -Harvard College, John was to make his home for most of the next four -years. - -They took a steam train into Boston, and at the station of the Providence -road found a street car waiting to take them from Park Square to Harvard -Square. The ride takes a short half hour. At Harvard Square you are on -one side of the College Yard, as the region is called, which in colleges -of more pretense would be named the _Campus_. Buildings of all ages and -all aspects fill it, from the venerable brick of old Massachusetts, built -near two centuries ago, in fond memory of Pembroke College in Cambridge, -down to the last “sweet” devices of modern architecture. - -They had an embarrassment of riches before them, that they might rightly -use their time and gratify every taste of all the party. First of all, -Nathan led them to the Library, and while under his brother’s guidance, -the young people looked at some of the curiosities there, he took John to -the Bursar’s office, to attend to some business about his college room. -Then they all called on a young gentleman, to whom the Dudleys introduced -the Creheres, so that they saw the comfort of the college rooms of the -students. Next they went to Memorial Hall, where are the portraits of the -old worthies of the state and college, the trophies of many base ball -victories, and, most interesting of all, if you go at a meal time, some -five hundred of the young men of to-day, eating with a good appetite. -From this place they went to the Agassiz Museum, which is so skilfully -arranged that they will all date back to that hour’s visit a clearer -knowledge of the great classifications of natural science. - -The young people declared that they were not tired even then. Their -student friend had asked them to rest in his room after these bits of -sight seeing, and they did so, and then, after a little lunch, went up to -the Botanic Garden, stopped at the Observatory, and crossed to see the -house which was lately the home of Longfellow, and in the Revolution, -that of Washington. - -Travelers who have the same lions to “do” in one day may find their order -a convenient one to follow. And, though these are not landmarks of Boston -properly, it has seemed wise not to conclude their story without telling -of their Cambridge expedition. - -“And now,” said Nathan, as they took at the door of the Longfellow house -a car for Boston, “now we have made the beginning, when you come in the -fall we can show you Boston.” - - - - -VANISHING TYPES. - -By REV. EDWARD P. SPRAGUE. - - -Abundant evidence is afforded in nature that, beside the familiar forms -of life of the present, there have been earlier forms, such as are now -no longer seen. Each great epoch of the earth’s history, as, to a less -degree, each great continent on the earth’s surface, has had certain -prevalent and characteristic types; of which some still endure; some have -wholly disappeared, and some are just now passing out of sight. And among -all these extinct, persistent, vanishing and recent types, there are -perhaps none more full of interest, or more worthy of our careful study -than the ones that are just now passing away. - -Something similar to this is to be recognized also in the varying phases -of human life. There are styles of men, habits of life, peculiarities -of character, customs, occupations, and conditions which belong almost -wholly to the present; others which are common to the present and the -past; and still others which are as strictly part of the long ago, as -are the megatherium and the plesiosaurus. There are no corresponding -forms now, and probably never again will be. There can never more be -the old feudal baron, the chivalrous knight errant, or the trouveres -and troubadours of mediæval Europe, any more than there can be again -the ancient worshipers of Jupiter or devotees of Bacchus. Old forms -of government, old ideas of the divine right of kings, old faith in -auguries, the old search for the philosopher’s stone and for the elixir -of life have passed away, never to return. - -More recent, however, than these, and more closely related to the -present, are certain types of life with which our fathers were daily -conversant, but which promise to seem to our children very strange and -remote. Not merely does the regular succession of the generations bring -us at length to the last Revolutionary soldier, and to the last survivor -of the seemingly exhaustless supply of Washington’s body servants; but -at the same time the changes which transpire in local and social life -do serve to make rare, and then wholly to remove, the types of men that -were only lately distinctively common and prominent. We do well therefore -to stop in the midst of our hurrying, driving, self-glorifying age, and -study some of these _Vanishing Types_ of life, character, occupation, -with varied accompaniments and experiences, which to-day have become or -are fast becoming things of the past. - -A recent writer in one of our great metropolitan dailies comments in a -pleasant strain on the survival in only humorous papers and poor plays -of the typical Englishman and typical Yankee, as so long and commonly -represented. What has become of the John Bull and the Brother Jonathan of -a few years ago? Were they not true characters at all? If not, who will -explain the hold they took on the popular fancy, a hold so strong that -they are not quite abandoned to-day? They must have been fairly faithful -representatives of certain actual types. Are Englishmen and Americans -growing different, then, from what they were, or growing like each other, -that now these two illustrious characterizations have largely disappeared? - -As the writer remarks: _Punch_ still has John Bull as a national type; -but shows a great reserve in the use of him, and continually resorts to -Britannia as a substitute. Our old friend John, the bluff, stout, honest, -red-faced, irascible, rural person, has really been supplanted by a more -modern, thinner, nervous, intellectual, astute type. He is, or was a very -rude person, and always seemed to take great delight in asserting himself -in such a way as to produce as much general annoyance and discomfort as -possible. But he is gone, or is going, and the time is coming when we -shall regard him as only a survival, a tradition of the past. - -And so for English use the Yankee type of Uncle Sam may still serve to -represent America, although he belongs to the past as much as slavery -does, or the stage coach. He would be a bold man who would attempt to -say what our national type is now; but it is safe to say that it is not -a long, thin, cute Yankee, dressed in a swallow-tailed coat with brass -buttons, whittling a stick, and interlarding his conversation with “I -swan,” and “I calc’late.” In fact, if Mr. Lowell were to write “Biglow -Papers” now, Uncle Sam would hardly serve his purpose as he did during -the war. - -Not only are differences between national types rapidly vanishing into -the past, so that Englishmen, Germans, Frenchmen and Americans no longer -seem strikingly unlike; but along with these international, the more -domestic and home types are disappearing also. The distinctive kinds -of men, and the distinctions which attached themselves inseparably to -various classes and occupations are passing away. - -Take the men to-day of any one town, village or farming district, and I -fully believe you will find fewer odd and strange characters among them -than was the case among their predecessors or fathers of a generation ago. - -Just this was the complaint of an old farmer who used to delight to -drop into my study in northern New York, and have, as he called it, “a -talk with the parson.” He was himself a relic of a past generation, a -man of marked face and peculiar manner. He had been a school teacher in -his earlier days, and quite a man of letters among his associates of -that time, and was very fond of describing in a quaint way that was not -without discrimination, the life of his youth. While fully admitting the -greater advantages and easier times of the present, he would always add: -“But everybody is getting to be just like everybody else now-a-days. Why, -when I came into this valley every man on all these farms had something -peculiar about him, some way of standing, or talking, or dressing, -by which I could have described him so that you would have known him -the first time you met him. I don’t know,” he would add, “but you may -think it an improvement, but the men are all alike now, and I miss the -differences.” And looking at the old man, and feeling that he served as -a connecting link, a survival of the past into the present, I was ready -to believe that what he said was true; the older men had more marked -peculiarities than those of to-day. - -Let us look now more particularly at some of the types which were -distinctive features of the life of a half century ago, but whose -successors have lost much of that prominence to-day by means of that -gradual tendency toward uniformity which has since then been working. - -First among these and foremost, as distinctive and distinguished, stands -the “Country Parson” of fifty or more years ago. - -No such men are seen to-day; for although the ministry continue, and -are always to continue, constituting a distinct class in the community, -they are now in no such ways singular and distinctive as then. Dressed -always in his clerical black, and in earlier times in the clerical bands -also, he was known on the street and saluted with reverence as a man by -himself, set apart from the rest of the community, higher and holier than -they. His position was unequaled, unapproached even by any other person. -He was looked up to by all, honored by all, and feared, if not by all, -by all the children at least. His opinions on matters local and civil, -personal, social, philosophical and religious had almost the weight of -absolute and supreme wisdom, which no one might gainsay. - -See him enter the plain white “meeting-house” and ascend the lofty -pulpit, and you recognize the height of his exaltation. In many places -all the congregation were wont to rise when he came in, and remain -standing till he had taken his seat; and still more commonly, not one of -the congregation ever moved from place till he and his family had passed -out of the church. - -Listen to one of his long sermons, as the hour-glass at his side is -turned possibly for the second time, and in the way the congregation give -attention, you see evidence of his authority and of his hold upon them. -He discourses on high themes, abstruse doctrines, and obscure points of -faith. He discusses his text and subject in a logical and philosophical -way; defines the doctrine, first by what it is not, and then by what -it is; divides and sub-divides, and divides again, illustrates with -analysis and analogies, intersperses with other passages from the Bible, -and perhaps with occasional Greek or Latin quotations, draws to the -“conclusion,” adds the “improvement,” goes on as though taking a fresh -start to his “finally,” and then ends with his “and now last of all.” For -a full hour, or perhaps two, the congregation have listened, counting it -a precious privilege so to do; and that which he has advanced will be -remembered, repeated, talked over, and discussed among them all the week. - -Those early clergymen are not by any means to be spoken of slightingly. -Some of us may know more of science, and be better informed in matters -of natural history and of the contemporaneous condition of other lands; -but few of us know as much Hebrew and Greek, few of us are as deeply -versed in metaphysics, few of us are more vigorous in argument, and none -of us certainly have such influence in our communities, or could hold -our congregations for so long services. Those country parsons were men -of mark; deep theologians; strong in the doctrines; prone, men may think -to-day, to a narrow and iron-clad theology; but they were veritable -giants also, and in fast, thanksgiving, and election day sermons did not -hesitate to handle national themes, point out very specifically and with -square condemnation, popular sins, and to discuss, and if necessary, pass -open judgment on the courses and actions of public men. - -It is often remarked that the fathers builded first the church and then, -next and near by, the school-house; and so next to the minister a marked -man in those older days was the “Village Schoolmaster.” - -Occasionally the schoolmaster and the minister were one. Sometimes he was -a minister who, from the too prevalent affliction of throat disease—a -judgment, possibly, on account of the long sermons—had exchanged -preaching for teaching. Oftenest he was a man by himself; and no teacher -in any public school of to-day quite perpetuates his likeness. - -I can not do better in attempting to describe him than to quote from -Prof. McMaster, in his admirable “History of the People of the United -States:” - -“The master was expected to live with the parents of his pupils, -regulating the length of his stay by the number of the boys in the family -attending his school. Thus it happened that in the course of his teaching -he became an inmate of all the houses of the district, and was not seldom -forced to walk five miles, in the worst of weather over the worst of -roads, to his school. - -“Yet, mendicant though he was, it would be a great mistake to suppose -that he was not always a welcome guest. He slept in the best room, sat -in the warmest nook by the fire, and had the best food set before him at -the table. In the long winter evenings he helped the boys with their -lessons, held yarn for the daughters, or escorted them to spinning -matches and quiltings. In return for his miserable pittance and his -board, the young student taught what would now be considered as the -rudiments of an education. His daily labors were confined to teaching his -scholars to read with a moderate degree of fluency, to write legibly, to -spell with some regard for the rules of orthography, and to know as much -of arithmetic as would enable them to calculate the interest on a debt, -to keep the family accounts, and to make change in a shop. - -“Nor was this making change a simple matter. Fifty years ago the silver -pieces which passed from hand to hand, under the name of small change, -were largely made up of foreign coins. They had been in circulation long -before the war for independence, had seen much service, and were none the -better for the wear and tear they had sustained. - -“One of these pieces was known as the four-pence, but passed for six and -a quarter cents if, as the result of long hoarding, the inscription was -legible, and the stamp easy to make out; but when worn smooth—and the -four-pence pieces generally were worn smooth and crossed—no one would -take them for more than five cents. A larger coin was the nine-pence, -which passed for twelve and a half cents. The pistareen was worth twenty -cents. The picayune, a term rarely used north of Mason and Dixon’s -line, went for six and a quarter cents. But the confusion was yet more -increased by the language which merchants used to express the price of -their goods. - -“The value of the gold pieces expressed in dollars was pretty much the -same the country over. But the dollar, and the silver pieces regarded as -fractions of a dollar, had no less than five different values. In New -England and Virginia a merchant who spoke of a dollar was understood -to mean six shillings, or one hundred and eight coppers; but the same -merchant would, the moment he set foot in North Carolina or New York, -be content with demanding ninety-six coppers, or eight shillings, as -the equivalent of a dollar. Sixpence in Massachusetts meant eight and a -third cents; a shilling meant sixteen and two-third cents; two-and-three -pence was thirty-seven and a half cents; three shillings was fifty cents; -four-and-six was seventy five cents; nine shillings was a dollar and a -half.” - -About all these to us strange coins and values the schoolmaster was -expected to know, and to be able also to instruct his scholars. He -filled, therefore, a very important place in the life of the village, -as well as in the experience of the boys under his instruction. Nowhere -to-day can you find in village schoolmaster, district or town school -teacher, superintendent of instruction, or learned professor, a figure -that fills out and continues just the portrait of the typical pedagogue -of a generation or more ago. - -Next after the village schoolmaster, and perhaps outranking him in -prominence and in distinctive traits, and so deserving to have been -mentioned sooner, was the “Country Doctor” of the past generation. - -Wherever men live, meet with accidents, suffer sickness, grow old and -die, there in civilized lands the physician is a necessity, and is always -to be found. Favored as we are in the present by all the progress in -medical and sanitary science, and attended by the skilled physicians of -to-day, we can hardly realize the life of the doctor and of the patient -in the time many of the remedies which are now used to relieve pain were -unknown, when there were no drug stores except in the larger towns, when -only a few simple medicines could be easily obtained at the village -store, along with the tea, sugar, calico, twine and garden seeds that -made up the stock on the shelves. Then the physician compounded his own -drugs, rolled out his own pills, made his own tinctures, weighed or -measured out his own prescriptions, and carried with him on his round of -calls, and perhaps in his saddle-bags, a most varied and astonishing -assortment of medicines, a list of which would be remarkable to-day, -alike for the presence of many that are abandoned, and for the absence of -still more that are now in common and constant use. - -The physician of to-day excels him perhaps in general knowledge, in -ability to deal with difficult diseases, and to perform delicate and -successful surgery. He is the man of wider reading and more scientific -views; he is possibly the better practitioner; but he is by no means the -distinct character in his way that the country doctor of fifty years ago -was. - -“His genial face, his engaging manners, his hearty laugh, the twinkle -in his eye, the sincerity with which he asked after the health of the -carpenter’s daughter, the interest he took in the family of the poorest -laborer, the good nature with which he stopped to chat with the farm -hands about the prospect of the corn crops and the turnip crops, made him -the favorite for miles around. When he rode out he knew the names and -personal history of the occupants of every house he passed. The farmers’ -lads pulled off their hats, and the girls dropped courtesies to him. -Sunshine and rain, daylight and darkness were alike to him. He would ride -ten miles on the darkest night, over the worst roads, in a pelting storm, -to administer a dose of calomel to an old woman, or to attend a child in -a fit. He was present at every birth; he attended every burial; he sat -with the minister at every death-bed, and put his name with the lawyer to -every will.” - -From the consideration of these vanishing or vanished types, a single -illustration of which alone was usually to be found in any ordinary -village, we turn now to a class that then, as their successors do now, -made up the predominant element in every section—the “Country Farmer”—and -I mean the country farmer of fifty years ago. - -The farmer of to-day is a man who lives in a comfortable, perhaps -handsome house, whose parlor is carpeted and is graced with a piano, -whose acres are mowed or reaped by the horse-power machine, and grain -threshed by steam, who drives in a good carriage, and his son has a -top buggy of his own; whose wife wears silk, and his daughters spend -their winters in the city. He wears handsome clothes, takes one or -two agricultural papers, keeps fancy stock, Jerseys and Hollands, -and occasionally furnishes articles to the press on “Creameries” and -“Ensilage.” - -Not such was the typical farmer of a generation or two ago—a man whose -comforts were fewer and helps much less, and also a man of stronger -traits of character, more decided convictions, harder working, and -probably in proportion fully as successful in accumulating the profits of -careful industry. - -One such I have in mind, an example of the best of his class. He was a -large man, well built, tall and muscular. He had been educated at the -common district school of the vicinity, had succeeded his father in -ownership of the farm, had married early, and became in time the head -of a large family. No chance visitor ever spent the night at the house -without being taken out into the kitchen and shown the long line of -boots, seven pairs arranged in a regularly diminishing row, and all ready -for the morning. - -He was not what would be called an educated man to-day, but he had -studied the national and the state constitutions; knew all about the -politics of the country; looked after the interest of the district school -near his home; attended regular in all seasons and weathers the village -church, four miles away, and in which also he served as a trustee. He -was a firm believer in the stanch Calvinism of his fathers; taught his -children the Westminster Catechism on Sunday afternoons; always voted his -party ticket straight, and believed with all his heart in his minister -and in his favorite political leader. - -He toiled hard, rising early and going to bed early also. His food was -simple, beef, pork, salt fish, dried apples, beans, and farm vegetables, -with milk, butter and eggs in abundance, and bread, if not the whitest, -yet always sweet, made from the wheat of his own growing, ground into -flour at his neighbor’s grist mill. His work did not present any great -variety. In spring there was the regular round of repairing the fences, -cleaning out the barnyard, ploughing and sowing; followed in due time -by the long and laborious hoeing the corn and potatoes, and then by the -mowing the grass with scythes, reaping the grain with sickle or cradle, -and afterward the threshing on the barn floor by the well-swung flail, -whose sturdy blows filled all the valley with answering echoes. - -In winter there was the cutting, hauling, sawing, splitting and piling in -the shed the abundant supply of wood that was to keep up the next year’s -fires in the great fireplace, the huge brick oven, and the kitchen and -“living room” stoves. - -Pleasures and recreations were few; the huskings in the fall, the -squirrel and rabbit hunts, the evening chats with a neighbor along with -the apples and mug of cider, the game of checkers by the kitchen fire -on a stormy day, the occasional larger gathering for an early supper, -the spelling match, and the singing school. Books were not numerous, -the weight making up for the lack of variety. There were the Bible, -Watts’s Psalms and Hymns, “Pilgrim’s Progress,” Fox’s “Book of Martyrs,” -Rollins’s “Ancient History,” Watts’s “Improvement of the Mind,” Baxter’s -“Saint’s Rest,” Young’s “Night Thoughts,” and a stray volume of _The -Spectator_. - -Trained by such books, by lessons of hard experience, by intercourse with -neighbors, and by the sermons of his minister, such a farmer became, -not the polished man, or versatile, or widely informed, but the man -of strong character, rugged worth, decided convictions unflinchingly -adhered to, true, honest, upright, kindly, careful, close perhaps, but -generous also and helpful. To men of to-day he might seem narrow-minded -and opinionated. We may smile at some of his ideas and apprehensions, and -tell humorous stories illustrating his acknowledged inquisitiveness; but -none the less at heart we must do him honor and admit that more men like -him were a blessing in the community to-day. Rigid necessity compelled -him to be carefully economical and exact in his dealings to a degree -even that verged on parsimony, but he was just in it all, and demanded -only what was rightfully his own. For the sake of securing that however -he would, if necessary, be at the trouble once taken, as it is told, by -a certain New England farmer. A United States surveying party had taken -a single chestnut rail from his fence, and using it as a signal pole, -had neglected either to return it to its place or to compensate him -therefor. Discovering this trespass he started after them, walked ten -miles in the hot sun, interviewed the chief, informed him that people’s -property was to be respected, and that he was not a man to be imposed -upon or frightened. Pleasantly and respectfully met, and asked to state -the damage, he replied: “Well, seein’ as no cattle got in, there warn’t -no damage; chestnut rails ain’t of much account anyway, and that one I -calc’late wasn’t worth more’n ten cents;” and receiving that amount duly -paid in legal coin of the country, he returned home amply satisfied. - -Sketches of vanishing types, such as these, might be almost indefinitely -continued, but we must be content with simply indicating some of the fit -subjects. - -There was in every village the “Country Shoemaker,” whose shop, close by -the tavern and the blacksmith’s, was the favorite rainy day resort for -both boys and men. There the latest news was rehearsed, party slates were -made or broken, and matters of local interest, or of state and national -politics received impassioned discussion. - -There were also the village “Tailor” and “Cooper,” persons as -indispensable as the village pump. The gossiping dressmaker went her -yearly round among the circle of households; and the old-fashioned -peddler brought silks and city goods to the farmer’s wife, and was always -welcomed by the farmer himself for the news he brought from other places, -supplying surprisingly well the place of the modern newspaper. - -In almost every New England village situated at all near the sea coast a -prominent character was the retired Whale Captain, a man of very positive -character, accustomed to authority, and not always a comfortable neighbor -or amiable citizen. - -Very different also from the farmer of the north was the Southern -Planter, who was with us only a little while ago, but now as a -distinctive type is fast vanishing from sight. The product and the pride -of the southern land, prominent in society and politics, ruling as -lord over his swarm of dependents, and holding his social, religious, -and political opinions by a sort of entail with his estate, he forms a -most interesting subject of study, and will perhaps figure largely as a -favorite character in the American novel of the future. - -Any sketch of olden times ought to make special mention also of the -“Old Stage Coach and Driver.” The days are not very long passed when a -journey from here to New York or Philadelphia was a matter of graver -consideration than is now given to a trip to London and return. Not -without very serious preparation, fortifying himself for the hardships, -considering the possible dangers, and perhaps taking a very formal -farewell of his family, did a traveler set out on his journey; and then -his progress was painfully slow, and his discomforts painfully many. - -The stages, great lumbering vehicles, made perhaps forty miles a day in -the summer, and not much more than half as many in the winter. In summer -one was choked by the dust, and in cold weather he froze. “If no accident -occurred the traveler was put down at the inn about ten o’clock at night. -Cramped and weary, he ate a frugal supper, and betook himself to bed with -a notice from the landlord that he would be called at three the next -morning. Then, whether it rained or snowed, he was forced to rise and -make ready by the light of a tallow candle, for another ride of eighteen -hours. After a series of mishaps and accidents, such as would suffice for -an emigrant train crossing the plains, the stage rolled into New York at -the end of the sixth day after leaving Boston.” This is not exceptional. -It was considered something remarkable when the trip from New York to -Philadelphia was first made in less than two full days. - -The mails of that time were carried in these same stages, except in -the special cases where post-riders hastened through on horseback. So -small, however, was the mail service at the beginning of this century, -that Prof. McMaster affirms: “More mails are now each day sent out and -received in New York, than in Washington’s time went from the same city -to all parts of the country in the course of half a year. More letters -are delivered in that city every twenty-four hours than, when Franklin -had office, were distributed in the thirteen states in a whole year.” - -Along with the varied types of character and of occupation that have -vanished, or are vanishing away, there are many articles of use and of -ornament, that were once common, but are now hardly to be found. - -A pair of old brass andirons that belonged to one’s grandmother are -to-day an almost priceless heirloom in any family. Old spinning wheels, -in daily use fifty or more years ago, but for a generation consigned -to the garret or remote store room, are now brought down and, freshly -polished and decked with ribbons, made to adorn the parlor or the hall. -A genuine old sickle is to-day hard to find; the hand fanning-mills -are becoming rare, and a real flail is almost never heard. How many of -the young ladies of to-day have ever seen one of the foot-stoves their -grandmothers used to carry to church, or one of the warming-pans always -put to use for the benefit of the friend that in winter time occupied -“the best chamber?” How long is it since the side of every kitchen opened -into the cavernous depth of the old “brick oven,” the heating of whose -great dome was such a labor for the adults, but such a delight for the -children? What too have become of the old tin “Dutch ovens” that were -used before the open fireplace, and of the iron “bake kettles,” with -cover for the burning coals, which were sometimes called by this same -name? While for an old tinder box and flint one will search almost in -vain unless in some cabinet of carefully guarded relics and antiques. - -A very wide question is sometimes raised as to how far the absence of -such marked types as those of the past indicates an improved age in the -present, and whether indeed the opposite of this may not be the case. -It may be argued, and not quite without some show of reason, that the -tendency to reduce all characters, stations, and kinds of life to a -largely universal correspondence, and the merging of markedly distinctive -traits into a general resemblance, is an indication of weakness rather -than of strength, and that thereby society suffers a loss instead of -securing a gain. One may well hesitate before refusing to admit that -there may be some truth in such a view. However, without attempting to -argue this question, or to draw any inferences from the whole, it is -enough for the present purpose to show that many of the strong traits of -the past, like strong features seen in old family portraits, are to be -recognized only in reduced and softened characteristics to-day, so that -we do well in the midst of the uniformity of the life of the present to -pause and recall and honor these vanishing types of the past. - - - - -THE COUNCIL OF NICE. - -An essay read before the University Circle, of San José, California. - - -“There are four things,” says Hooker, “which concur to make complete the -whole state of our Lord: His Deity, Manhood, the conjunction of both, and -the distinction of one from the other.” - -“Four principal heresies have withstood the truth: Arians, against the -deity of Christ (denying that he was co-eternal and co-essential with the -Father); - -“Apollinarians, maiming his human nature (denying that he had a human -soul); - -“Nestorians, rending Christ asunder, and dividing him into two persons -(one divine and the other human); - -“The followers of Eutyches, by confounding in his person those natures -which they should distinguish (asserting that his human nature was -absorbed in the divine, and objecting to any distinction between the two). - -“Against these there have been four most famous councils: - -“1. Nice against the Arians, A. D. 325. - -“2. Constantinople against the Apollinarians, A. D. 381. - -“3. Ephesus against the Nestorians, A. D. 431. - -“4. Chalcedon against the Eutychians, A. D. 451.” - -Upon the theme of the first of these great Ecumenical Councils, the -present paper will be a compilation. - -A momentous era has arrived in the history of the church and of the -world. For the first time a Christian ruler has come to the throne of the -Cæsars. - -With his chosen standard of the cross, Constantine has subdued the -opposing factions—in the Roman empire, and over his vast realm there -goes the edict that sets the Christians free from Pagan tyranny and -persecution. - -The church has grown through three centuries of stern conflict with the -error and darkness, the evils and wrongs of the world, to be a mighty -power in the earth. - -Her course through suffering and toil, along a path tracked with the -blood of the martyrs, has been a march of victory and conquest. A -long list of eminent names is on her calendar. But now in the period -of emancipation and prosperity she is beset by a complication of new -dangers. Alliance with the state exposes her to a strain of corrupting -influences. In the removal of compacting pressure from without, -dissensions spring up within. Factions in the empire having been -overcome, Constantine finds himself compelled to deal with factions in -the church. - -In Alexandria, the most learned see of Christendom, a difference of view -and a violent discussion had sprung up on the doctrine of the Trinity. -The schism extended until the whole church became agitated over the -question. - -Arius, one of the prime movers in it, reasoning upon the relation of the -terms Father and Son, arrived at the conclusion that the Son, though -the first born of beings, did not exist from eternity. “The controversy -turned,” says Dean Stanley, in his “History of the Eastern Church,” “on -the relations of the divine persons in the Trinity, not only before -the incarnation, before creation, before time, but before the first -beginnings of time. ‘There was,’ the Arian doctrine did not venture to -say _a time_—but ‘there was _when_ he was not.’ It was the excess of -dogmatism upon the most abstract words in the most abstract region of -human thought.” - -But subtle and abstract as the question was, there was thought to be -involved in it the root of a perilous departure from sound Christian -faith. It touched the most central and fundamental doctrine of the -Christian religion. Hence it engaged the profoundest thought and -solicitude of the most powerful minds of that age; and the first general -council was called, in order to bring the united wisdom of the church to -bear upon the settlement of the question. - -The council met at Nice in the year 325. - -The place selected was not far from Nicomedia, then the capital of the -East. The number of bishops from all parts of the empire is supposed -to have been about 318, with a retinue of presbyters and attendants -amounting to 2,000. - -“There were present the learned and the illiterate, courtiers and -peasants, old and young, aged bishops on the verge of the grave, and -beardless deacons just entering on their office. It was an assembly in -which the difference between age and youth was of more than ordinary -significance, coinciding with a marked transition in the history of the -world. The new generation had been brought up in peace and quiet. They -could just remember the joy diffused through the Christian communities by -the edict of toleration published in their boyhood. They had themselves -suffered nothing. Not so the older and by far the larger part of the -assembly. They had lived through the last and worst of the persecutions, -and they now came, like a regiment out of some frightful siege or battle, -decimated and mutilated by the tortures or the hardships they had -undergone. Most of the older members had lost a friend or a brother. Some -bore on their backs and sides the wounds inflicted by the instruments -of torture. Some had suffered the searing of the sinews of the leg, to -prevent their escape from working in the mines, and several had lost the -right eye.” - -It is said that their authority reposed on their character as an army of -confessors and martyrs, no less than on that of an ecumenical council. - -“In this respect no other council could approach them, and in the -proceedings of the assembly the voice of an old confessor was received -almost as an oracle.” Even the emperor himself regarded them with homage. - -They came in groups over the Mediterranean, and along the Roman roads -from the different parts of the vast empire, from Alexandria and far up -the Nile in Egypt; from Syria, Euphrates, and the distant East; from -Greece, and Cyprus and Rome; and from the west as far as Spain. - -Of the characters present I will copy sketches of a very few: - -“The aged Alexander, Bishop of Alexandria, was the only one present known -by the title of pope. Papa was the special address given to the head of -the Alexandrian church long before the name of Patriarch or Archbishop.” - -“Close beside Pope Alexander is a small, insignificant young man of -hardly twenty-five, of lively manners and speech, and of bright, serene -countenance. Though he is but the deacon or archdeacon of Alexandria (at -this time), he has closely riveted the attention of the assembly by the -vehemence of his arguments. That small, insignificant young man is the -great Athanasius,” the chief opposer of Arius, and defender of the Nicene -creed. - -“Next to these was an important presbyter of Alexandria, the parish -priest of its principal church. In appearance he is the very opposite -of Athanasius. He is sixty years of age, tall, thin, and apparently -unable to support his stature. He would be handsome, but for the deadly -pallor of his face and a downcast look caused by weakness of eyesight. At -times his veins throb and swell, and his limbs tremble, as if suffering -from some violent internal complaint. There is a wild look about him -that is at times startling. His dress and demeanor are those of a rigid -ascetic. He wears a long coat with short sleeves, and a scarf of half -size, the mark of an austere life, and his hair hangs in a tangled mass -over his head. He is usually silent, but at times breaks out into fierce -excitement. Yet with all this there is a sweetness in his voice, and a -winning, earnest, fascinating manner. This strange, captivating giant -is the heretic Arius.” He is described as a man of peculiar loveliness -and purity of character from his childhood, of great personal power -and influence, and as exerting, at whatever cost of self-sacrifice, an -uncompromising resistance to the popular worldly policy which he believed -would degrade and enslave the church in its subordination to the temporal -power. - -Two notable characters, Potammon and Paphnutius, came from the interior -of Egypt. They had lived a great part of their lives in the desert. Both -had lost the right eye, and suffered otherwise in the persecution. Bishop -Paul, from near the Euphrates, had had his hands paralyzed by the searing -of the muscles with a red-hot iron. - -There was Jacob of Nisibis, who had lived for years as a hermit, on -the mountains, in forests and caves, browsing on roots and leaves, and -clothed in a rough goat-hair cloak. This dress and manner of life he -retained after he became a bishop. - -From the distant east came John the Persian, Aristaces, son of Gregory -the illuminator, and founder of the Armenian church, and Eusebius -the Great, of Nicomedia, were of the number. Also Eusebius, bishop -of Cesarea, the interpreter, chaplain and confessor of Constantine, -and the father of ecclesiastical history. One of the most interesting -characters, of whom many remarkable stories are told, was Spyridion, from -the island of Cyprus, a shepherd both before and after his elevation to -the episcopate. Hosius, Bishop of Cordova in Spain, was one of the most -powerful and revered men in the council. He had been a confessor during -the persecutions of Maximin. The council was opened by the emperor in -person. It continued about twenty days. - -A creed was first produced which all could sign—one which would doubtless -_now_ be pronounced full and orthodox by Christians generally. The part -relating to the Son reads as follows: “I believe in one Lord Jesus -Christ, the Word of God, God of God, Light of Light, Life of Life, the -only begotten Son, the first born of every creature, begotten of the -Father before all worlds, by whom also all things were made,” etc. - -But full as this was it did not touch the test point in controversy. That -point turned upon two Greek words, signifying respectively, “_of the same -substance_,” and “_of like substance_.” The Arians admitted that Christ -in his divine nature was of _like substance_ with the Father, but denied -that he was of the _same substance_. - -Athanasius and his party feared that this would lead, not to the denial -of the divinity of Christ, but to the belief in two Gods instead of one. -“Polytheism, Paganism, Hellenism was the enemy from which the church had -just been delivered by Constantine, and this was the error under whose -dominion it was feared the teaching of Arius might bring them back.” -These scarred and maimed veterans of Christianity had suffered because of -their steadfast testimony to the truth that _there is one God_; and here -in the first great council of the entire church the creed was formulated -which has stood through the centuries as a protest and guard against such -distinction of persons in the Trinity as shall make a plurality of Gods. -The Nicene creed as adopted had the additional clause inserted regarding -the Son—_of the substance of the Father_. - -Arius was condemned as a heretic and sentenced to banishment with -some other leaders of his party, including Eusebius of Nicomedia. But -afterward at the entreaty of the Princess Constantia, sister of the -emperor, they were recalled. For 300 years after the date of its origin -Arianism was a considerable power, both political and religious, not only -in the East where it had its birth, but in western and Teutonic nations. -“The Gothic population that descended on the Roman empire, so far as it -was Christian at all, held to the faith of Arius. Our first Teutonic -version of the Scriptures was by an Arian missionary, Ulfilas. The first -conqueror of Rome, Alaric, the first conqueror of Africa, Genseric, were -Arians. Theodoric the Great, King of Italy, was an Arian. The Gothic -kingdoms of Spain and France were the stronghold of Arianism.” - -But the orthodox doctrine established at Nice won its way and secured its -place in the heart of Christendom, which, as Dean Stanley says, “with -but few exceptions receives the confession of the first council, as the -earliest, the most solemn, and the most universal expression of Christian -theology.” - - - - -SONNET ON CHILLON. - - - Eternal Spirit of the chainless Mind! - Brightest in dungeons, Liberty! thou art, - For there thy habitation is the heart— - The heart which love of thee alone can bind; - And when thy sons to fetters are consign’d— - To fetters, and the damp vault’s dayless gloom, - Their country conquers with their martyrdom, - And Freedom’s fame finds wings on every wind. - Chillon! thy prison is a holy place, - And thy sad floor an altar—for ’twas trod, - Until his very steps have left a trace - Worn, as if thy cold pavement were a sod, - By Bonnivard! May none those marks efface! - For they appeal from tyranny to God.—_Byron._ - - - - -AN OCEAN MONARCH. - -By G. BROWNE GOODE. - - -The gray old city of Siena, hidden away, almost forgotten amidst -the hills of Tuscany, contains one object peculiarly interesting to -Americans. Within its walls Christopher Columbus was educated, and -hither returning in his days of prosperity, he deposited, doubtless -with impressive ceremonies, a memento of his first voyage over the sea. -His votive offering hangs within and over the main portal of the old -collegiate church, for many years closed, and now rarely visited by -tourists. Grouped together in a picturesque and very dusty trophy may -be seen the helmet, armor and weapons of the great navigator, and with -them the weapon of a warrior who was killed resisting the approach of the -strange ships—the sword of an immense sword-fish. A sword-fish was no -novelty to seafaring men accustomed to the waters of the Mediterranean, -still the beak of this defender of the coast was preserved by the crew of -Columbus, and for nearly four centuries has formed a prominent feature in -the best preserved monument of the discoverer of America. - -A similar though less impressive memorial hangs in the great hall of the -Bremen Rathaus, side by side with the clumsy ship-models, the paintings -of stranded whales, and the trophies of armor which illustrate the -history of the old Hanse-town (Free City). It is a painting, of the size -of life, of a sword-fish, taken by Bremen fishermen in the river Weser, -with a legend inscribed beneath in letters of the most angular type: - - “ANNO . 1696 . DEN . 18 . JULI . IST . DIESER . - FISCH . EIN . SCHWERTFISCH . GENANNT . VON . DIESER . - STADT . FISCHERN . IN . DER . WESER . GEFANGEN,” ETC. - -This swift, mysterious animal seems at a period remote in antiquity to -have literally thrust itself into the notice of mankind by means of its -attacks upon the boats in the Mediterranean. Pliny knew it and wrote: -“The sword-fish, called in Greek Xiphias, that is to say in Latin, -Gladius, a sword, hath a beake or bill sharp-pointed, wherewith he will -drive through the sides and planks of a ship, and bouge them so that they -shall sink withall,” and the naturalists of the sixteenth century knew -almost as much of its habits as those of the present day. Few fishes -are so difficult to observe, and a student may, like the writer of this -article, spend summer after summer in the attempt to study them with few -results, other than the sight of a few dozen back-fins cutting through -the water, a chance to measure and dissect a few specimens, and perhaps -the experience of having the side of his boat pierced by one of their -ugly swords. Yet, while little is known of their habits, few fishes are -so generally known by their external characters. - -No one who has seen a sword-fish or a good picture of one, soon forgets -the great muscular body, like that of a mackerel, a thousand times -magnified, the crescent shaped tail, measuring three feet or more from -tip to tip, the scimitar-like fins on the back and breasts, the round, -hard, protruding eyes, as large as small foot balls, and the sword-like -snout, two, three or four feet in length, protruding, caricature like, -from between its eyes. This feature has been recognized in almost every -European language, and while many other fishes have names by the score, -this has in reality but one. The “Sword-fish” of our own tongue, the -“Zwaard Fis” of Holland, the Italian “Sifio” and “Pesce-Pada,” the -Spaniard’s “Espada,” and the French “Espadin,” “Dend” and “Epee de Mer,” -are variations upon a single theme, repetitions of the “Gladius” of -ancient Italy, and “Xiphias,” the name by which Aristotle, the father of -Zoölogy called the same fish twenty-three hundred years ago. The French -“Empereur,” and the “Imperador” of the Spanish West Indies carry out the -same. - -A vessel cruising in search of sword-fish proceeds to the fishing grounds -and sails hither and thither, wherever the abundance of small fish -indicates that they ought to be found. Vessels which are met are hailed -and asked whether sword-fish have been seen, and if tidings are thus -obtained the ship’s course is at once laid for the locality where they -were last noticed. A man is always stationed at the masthead, where, with -the keen eye which practice has given him, he can readily descry the -tell-tale dorsal fins at a distance of two or three miles. - -The sword-fish has two cousins, the spear-fish and the sail-fish, which -bear to it a close family resemblance. Their bodies, however, are -lighter, their outlines more graceful, and their swords more round and -slender. The latter has an immense sail-like back fin, which it throws -out of the water while swimming near the surface. An English naval -officer, Sir Stamford Raffles, wrote home from Singapore in 1822: “The -only amusing discovery we have recently made is that of a sailing fish, -called by the natives _Ikan layer_, of about ten or twelve feet long, -which hoists a mainsail, and often sails in the manner of a native boat, -and with considerable swiftness. I have sent a set of the sails home, as -they are beautifully cut, and form a model for a fast sailing boat. When -a school of these are under sail together they are frequently mistaken -for a fleet of native boats.” - -While there is but one species of sword-fish which occurs in the tropical -and temperate parts of the Atlantic, in the Mediterranean, about New -Zealand, and in the eastern Pacific from Cape Horn to California -there are several kinds of sail-fishes, and at least eight species of -spear-fish. The naturalists of the United States Fish Commission have -recently discovered that we have along our Atlantic coast a fine species -of sail-fish, and one or two of spear-fishes, in addition to the true -sword-fish, which has been known to exist here since the days of the -Spanish explorers. - -It seems somewhat strange that no reference to the sword-fish is to be -found in the narratives of the voyages of Columbus. The earliest allusion -in American literature occurs in Josselyn’s “Account of two Voyages to -New England,” printed in 1674, in the following passage: - -“The twentieth day we saw a great number of sea-bats or owles, called -also flying-fish; they are about the bigness of a whiting, with four -tinsel wings, with which they fly as long as they are wet, when pursued -by other fishes. In the afternoon we saw a great fish called the -Vehuella, or Sword-fish, having a long, strong and sharp fin like a -sword-blade on the top of his head, with which he pierced our ship, and -broke it off with striving to get loose; one of our sailors dived and -brought it aboard.” - -Although sword-fish were sold in the New York fish market as early as -1817, it was not until 1839 that the writers in ichthyology consented to -consider it an American fish. - -The sword-fish comes into our waters in pursuit of food. At least this -is the most probable explanation of their movements, since the duties of -reproduction appear to be performed elsewhere. Like the horse-mackerel, -the bonito, the blue-fish and the squeteagus, they pursue and prey upon -the schools of menhaden and mackerel which are so abundant in the summer -months. “When you see sword-fish, you may know that mackerel are about!” -said one old fisherman to the writer. “Where you see the fin-back whale, -following food,” said another, “there you find sword-fish.” They feed -chiefly upon fish which swim crowded together in close schools, rising -among them from beneath and striking to the right and left with their -swords until they have killed a number, which they then proceed to -devour. An old fisherman described to the writer a sword-fish in the act -of feeding in a dense school of herring, rising perpendicularly out of -the water until its sword, with a large portion of its body, was exposed, -then falling flat over on its side, striking many fish as it fell, and -leaving a bushel of dead ones floating at the surface. - -They are most abundant in the region of Cape Cod, or between Montaulk -Point and the eastern part of George’s Banks, and during July and August, -though some make their appearance in the latter part of May, and a few -linger until snow falls. They are seen at the surface only on quiet -summer days, in the morning before ten or eleven, and in the afternoon -after four o’clock. Old fishermen say that they rise when the mackerel -rise, and follow them down when they go. - -A sword-fish, when swimming near the surface, usually allows its dorsal -fin and the upper lobe of its caudal fin to be visible, projecting out of -the water several inches. It is this habit which enables the fishermen -to detect the presence of the fish in the vicinity of their vessel. It -moves slowly along, and the schooner, even with a light breeze, finds no -difficulty in overtaking it. When excited its movements are very rapid -and nervous. Sword-fish are sometimes seen to leap entirely out of the -water. Early writers attributed this habit to the tormenting presence -of parasites, but such a theory seems unnecessary. The pointed head, -the fins of the back and abdomen snugly fitting into grooves, the long, -lithe, muscular body, with contour sloping slowly from shoulders to tail, -fit it for the most rapid and forcible movement through the water. Prof. -Richard Owen, the celebrated English anatomist, testifying in court in -regard to its power, said: “It strikes with the accumulated force of -fifteen double-handed hammers. Its velocity is equal to that of a swivel -shot, and is as dangerous in its effects as a heavy artillery projectile.” - -Many very curious instances are recorded of their encounters with other -fishes, or of their attacks upon ships. It is hard to surmise what may be -the inducement to attack objects so much larger than themselves. Every -one knows the couplet from Oppian: - - “Nature her bounty to his mouth confined, - Gave him a sword, but left unarmed his mind.” - -It surely seems as if the fish sometimes become possessed with temporary -insanity. It is not strange that when harpooned they retaliate upon -their assailants. There are, however, numerous instances of entirely -unprovoked assaults upon vessels at sea, both by the sword-fish, and -still more frequently by the spear-fish (known to American sailors by -the name of “boohoo,” apparently a corruption of “Guebucu,” a word -apparently of Indian origin, applied to the same fish in Brazil). The -writer’s note-book contains notes upon scores of such instances. The -ship “Priscilla,” from Pernambuco to London had eighteen inches of sword -thrust through her planking; the English ship “Queensbury,” in 1871, -was penetrated to a depth of thirty inches, necessitating the discharge -of the cargo; the “Dreadnought,” in 1864, when off Colombo, had a -round hole, an inch in diameter, bored through the copper sheeting and -planking; the schooner “Wyoming,” of Gloucester, in 1875, was attacked in -the night time by a sword-fish, which pushed his snout two feet into her -planking, and then escaped by breaking it off. - -One of the traditions of the sea, time honored, believed by all mariners, -handed down in varied phrases in a hundred books of ocean travel, relates -to the terrific combats between the whale and the sword-fish, aided -by the thrasher shark. The sword-fish was said to attack from below, -goading his mighty adversary to the surface with his sharp beak, while -the shark, at the top of the water, belabors him with strokes of his -long lithe tail. Thus wrote a would-be naturalist from Bermuda in 1609: -“The swoard-fish swimmes under the whale and pricketh him upward. The -threasher keepeth above him, and with a mighty great thing like unto -a flaile, hee so bangeth the whale that hee will roare as though it -thundered, and doth give him such blows with his weapon that you would -think it to be a crake of great shot.” - -Skeptical modern science is not satisfied with this interpretation of -any combat at sea seen at a distance. It recognizes the improbability of -aggressive partnership between two animals so different as the sword-fish -and a shark, and explains the turbulent encounters occasionally seen at -sea by ascribing them to the attacks of the killer whale, _Orca_, upon -larger species of the same order. - -There can be little doubt that sword-fish sometimes attack whales just as -they do ships. This habit is mentioned by Pliny, and furnishes a motive -for all of Edmund Spenser’s “Visions of the World.” - - “Toward the sea turning my troubled eye - I saw the fish (if fish I may it cleepe) - That makes the sea before his face to flye - And with his flaggie finnes doth seeme to sweepe - The fomie waves out of the dreadfull deep. - The huge Leviathan, dame Nature’s wonder, - Making his sport, that manie makes to weep: - A Sword-fish small, him from the rest did sunder, - That, in his throat him pricking softly under, - His wide abysse him forced forth to spewe, - That all the sea did roare like heavens thunder, - And all the waves were stained with filthie hewe. - Hereby I learned have not to despise - Whatever thing seems small in common eyes.” - -Baron Sahartur, in a letter from Quebec in 1783, described a conflict -between a whale and a sword-fish which took place within gun shot of -his frigate. He remarks: “We were perfectly charmed when we saw the -sword-fish jump out of the water in order to dart its spear into the -body of the whale when obliged to take breath. This entertaining show -lasted at least two hours, sometimes to the starboard and sometimes to -the larboard of the ship. The sailors, among whom superstition prevails -as much as among the Egyptians, took this for a presage of some mighty -storm.” - -There are two great sword-fisheries in the world, one on the coast of -New England, and the other in the waters about Sicily. The former gives -employment, in different years, to from twenty to forty vessels, and from -sixty to one hundred and twenty men; the latter to over three hundred -boats and seventeen hundred men. In Italy the annual product of the -fishery amounts to about 320,000 pounds, while in New England, counting -the fish taken incidentally by halibut and mackerel vessels, the yield is -at least 1,000,000 pounds. - -The apparatus used in killing sword-fish is very simple. It consists of -the “pulpit” or “cresembo,” a frame for the support of the harpooneer -as he stands upon the end of the bow-sprit, the “lily iron” or “Indian -dart,” which is attached by a long line to a keg serving as a buoy, and -is thrust into the fish by means of a pole about sixteen feet in length. -As the vessel cruises over the schooling grounds a lookout is stationed -at the masthead, whose keen eye descries the tell-tale dorsal fins at -a distance of two or three miles. By voice and gesture he directs the -course of the vessel until the skipper can see the fish from his station -in the pulpit. There is no difficulty in approaching the fish with a -large vessel, although they will not suffer a small boat to come near -them. When the fish is from six to ten feet in front of the vessel, it is -struck. The harpoon is never thrown, the pole being too long. The dart -penetrates the back of the fish, close to the side of the high dorsal -fin, and immediately detaches itself from the pole, which is withdrawn. -The dart having been fastened, the line is allowed to run out as far as -the fish will carry it, and is then passed into a small boat, which is -towing at the stern. Two men jump into this and pull in upon the line -until the fish is brought in alongside. - -The pursuit of the sword-fish is much more exciting than ordinary -fishing, for it resembles the pursuit of large animals upon land. There -is no slow and careful baiting and patient waiting, and no disappointment -caused by the capture of worthless “bait-stealers.” The game is seen -and followed, outwitted by wary tactics, and killed by strength of arm -and skill. The sword-fish sometimes proves a powerful antagonist, and -sends his pursuers’ vessel into harbor, leaking and almost sinking from -injuries which he has inflicted. I have known a vessel to be struck by -wounded sword-fish as many as twenty times in one season. There is even -the spice of personal danger to give savor to the chase. One of the crew -of a Connecticut schooner was severely wounded by a beak thrust through -the oak floor of the boat in which he was standing, and penetrating two -inches into his naked heel. A strange fascination draws men to this -pursuit when they have once learned its charm. An old sword-fisherman, -with an experience of twenty years, told me that when he was on the -fishing ground he fished all night in his dreams, and that many a time he -had bruised his hands and rubbed the skin off his knuckles by striking -them against the ceiling of his bunk when he raised his arms to thrust -the harpoon into imaginary monster sword-fishes. - - * * * * * - -The home and its apartments should not be treated as a dead thing, where -we make best arrangement of its fittings, and there leave it. It must -grow in range and in expression with our necessities, and diverging, and -developing tastes. The best of decorators can not put that last finish -which must come from home hands. It is a great canvas always on the easel -before us—growing in its power to interest every day and year—never -getting its last touches—never quite ready to be taken down and parted -with. No home should so far out-top the tastes of its inmates that they -can not somewhere and somehow deck it with the record of their love and -culture. It is an awful thing to live in a house where no new nail can -be driven in the wall, and no tray of wild flowers, or of wood-mosses be -set upon a window sill. The ways are endless, in short, in which a house -can be endowed with that home atmosphere which shall be redolent of the -tastes of its inmates.—_Donald G. Mitchell._ - - - - -ECCENTRIC AMERICANS. - -By COLEMAN E. BISHOP. - - -IX.—A PIONEER ECCENTRIC WOMAN. - -This artificial arrangement called society seems to be possible only -upon unreal standards of truth and morality; it has a system of “white -lies”—as if any lie _could_ be white and true. It is because children -haven’t learned the difference between real truth and the “play -truth” of the world that they are such a holy terror in society. We -have to squelch their questionings and hide our blushes. Children and -fools—distinguished puritans!—always tell the truth, we say, and confess -our false lives in the saying; but occasionally one who is not a fool, -but who preserves a child’s truth, comes into this masquerade of life and -insists on recognizing the real persons behind the masks. Heavens, what a -disturbance! Put him out! He’s an Eccentric. - -Give one of these uncomfortable persons the clairvoyant insight into -character and motives and the clear-speaking tongue or pen; put him on -a higher moral plane than society about him travels, and two things -will likely come to pass, viz.: martyrdom for himself and an uplift for -his neighbors. Such a touch for truth, such a power to convey it, such -a purpose had Jane Grey Swisshelm, and it’s safe to say that she has -put more people to bed with uncomfortable bed-fellows in the shape of -smarting consciences than any other woman of her time. - -She was a rare combination of feminine and masculine qualities. Timid -and courageous; yielding to kindness, hard as steel on questions of -principle; domestic in all her tastes, public in all her life; slight -of form and sickly by heredity, for fifty years she “endured hardship -as a good soldier.” To a fanatical religious nature and a wonderfully -analytical mind, she brought that childlikeness of conscience, and with a -rare command of language for a weapon, she became a moral blizzard in a -half century of upheaval in our political elements. - -No one, I think, can read her autobiography without the conviction that -this life of controversy was foreign to her nature, that the pugnacious -pen was forced into her hand when it would have preferred to wield the -pencil of the artist, or even the distaff in a happy home. She was thus -forced aside from her natural course by an incompatible theology and an -incompatible marriage. Benevolence was her mastering trait, but her hard -theology gave no exercise to it. Perhaps better to say in her own words, -she “obeyed the higher law of kindness under protest of her Calvinistic -conscience.” Her religion taught her that everything that she liked to -do and enjoyed in the doing, was, by that token, sinful; and her husband -and his family by thwarting her in all such enjoyments, unconsciously -executing her theology against herself, set her upon expiating her -sinfulness by engaging in the most disagreeable and trying work that -she could find. Men and women before her have sought “in the world’s -broad field of battle” relief from disappointment of the heart’s wishes, -but few have put on the armor to punish themselves for not enjoying -that disappointment. It is, therefore, to the crucial tenets of her -Calvanistic faith and the exorbitant demands of her conscience that we -owe the great work Mrs. Swisshelm did in the cause of humanity. What it -cost her only God and herself know; but we are not without evidence that -she got some recompense as she went along, in achievements which must -have been grateful to the heroic side of her nature. - -For in the veins of this slight girl ran the blood of a race of heroes -and martyrs—a family which fetched its line direct from signers of The -Solemn League and Covenant. “My kith and kin,” she says, “had died at -the stake, bearing testimony against popery and prelacy; had fought on -those fields where Scotchmen charged in solid columns, singing psalms.” -She hated the devil of her theology, because she considered him a sneak, -“but I never was afraid of him,” she says—a statement we can well believe -of one who at the age of six watched an alleged haunted place by night -to catch a ghost. She never knew the time when she did not believe the -cast-iron creed of her ancestors; read her Bible, understood all of Dr. -Black’s metaphysical sermons, and was converted before her third year, -and completed her theological education before she completed her twelfth -year. Truly she “had no childhood,” as she says. - -Born in Pittsburgh in 1815, she married at the age of sixteen a -too-well-to-do farmer, and spent most of her life in the country. “I -spent my best years cooking cabbage,” she says. She taught school much -of the first ten years of her married life. She found her pen-power and -her work in 1844, at the age of twenty-nine. Mrs. Swisshelm was one of -the first, if not the very first, American woman to enter the field of -political journalism. At this day, when all the avenues of literature -throng with gifted women, when no considerable daily paper is without -female contributors and staff writers, and some of our best magazines -are conducted by women, it is hard to appreciate what it cost a timid, -devout woman like Mrs. Swisshelm to take that step in 1844; it was in -her mind voluntary consecration to martyrdom. This call came to her -during an illness brought on by an attack on her by her husband and his -mother, so outrageous that she had fled wildly to the woods, and been -taken up and cared for by kindly neighbors. Her afflictions came to her -as chastisements for not remembering those in bonds as bound with them; -specifically for assisting to build a church for the “Black-gagites.” She -wrote her first attack in an anti-slavery cause, propped up in bed, and -it was in verse. She states the situation: - - No woman had ever done such a thing, and I could never again hold - up my head under the burden of shame and disgrace which would be - brought upon me. But what matter? I had no children to disgrace, - and if the Lord wanted some one to throw into that gulf, no one - could be spared better than I. No Western Pennsylvania woman - had ever broken out of woman’s sphere. All lived in the very - center of that sacred inclosure, making fires by which husbands, - brothers and sons sat reading the news; each one knowing that she - had a soul, because the preacher who made his bread and butter - by saving it had been careful to inform her of its existence as - preliminary to her knowledge of the indispensable nature of his - services. - -Her articles created a sensation, and no wonder that they did. For, -although she had but little literary culture, she had simplicity and -intensity. Her style was modeled on the English of the Bible (which -she says was for years the only book that she allowed herself to read, -in her dread of becoming wiser than her plodding husband), and on this -sturdy stem she grafted the simple, homely, direct illustrations of the -rural folk around her. Thus, it arrested the attention of learned and -unlettered alike. But there was more than phraseology in her power. She -was as intensely in earnest as if she were herself in bonds—that is what -“remembering them as bound with them” means. She was one of a few who -_meant it_; one of the kind of “fools” that “hear His word and _do_ it.” -McDuffee, when he heard that Andrew Jackson had sworn to hang the first -seceder, said: “Yes, and he’s just dashed fool enough to do it.” She -felt that two races, the white and the black, were to be rescued from -the curse of slavery; and for such a cause it was with her as “Hosea -Bigelow” says, “P’izen-mad, pig-headed fightin’.” She had been reared an -abolitionist, and that which was bred in the bone had been converted into -a clear, blazing passion by a year’s residence in Kentucky (1832), where -she witnessed scenes, the narration of which make that awful chapter in -her biography entitled “Habitations of Horrible Cruelty.” She says: - - For years there had run through my head the words: “Open thy - mouth for the dumb, plead the cause of the poor and needy.” From - first to last my articles were as direct and personal as Nathan’s - reproof to David. Every man who went to the war (_i. e._, against - Mexico), or induced others to go, I held as the principal in the - whole list of crimes of which slavery was a synonym. Each one - seemed to stand before me, his innermost soul made bare and his - idiosyncrasy I was sure to strike with sarcasm, ridicule, odium, - solemn denunciation, old truths from the Bible and history, and - the opinions of good men. I had a reckless abandon, for had I not - thrown myself into the breach to die there, and would I not sell - my life at its full value? - -I think this keen sense for the weak places in men’s character and -reasoning, and her reckless assaults thereon were what made her so -formidable. She always struck for the heart, and rarely missed her aim. -“Exposing the weak part of an argument soon came to be my recognized -forte,” she says. With what disregard of everything she rode after the -oriflamme of humanity let her tell: - - Hon. Gabriel Adams had taken me by the hand at father’s funeral, - led me to a stranger and introduced me as: “The child I told you - of, but eight years old, her father’s nurse and comforter.” He - had smoothed my hair and told me not to cry; God would bless me - for being a good child. He was a member of the session when I - joined the church; his voice in prayer had smoothed mother’s hard - journey through the dark valley; and now, as mayor of the city he - had ordered it illuminated in honor of the battle of Buena Vista, - and this, too, on Saturday evening, when the unholy glorification - extended into the Sabbath. Measured by the standard of his - profession as an elder in the church whose highest judicatory - had pronounced slavery and Christianity incompatible, no one was - more vulnerable than he, and of none was I so unsparing, yet as I - wrote, the letter was blistered with tears; but his oft repeated - comment was: “Jane is right,” and he went out of his way to take - my hand and say: “You were right.” - - Samuel Black, a son of my pastor, dropped his place as leader - of the Pittsburgh bar and rushed to the war. My comments were - thought severe, even for me; yet the first intimation I had - that I had not been cast aside as a monster, came from his - sister, who sent me a message that her father, her husband - and herself, approved my criticism. Samuel returned with a - colonel’s commission, and one day I was about to pass him without - recognition, where he stood on the pavement talking to two other - lawyers, when he stepped before me and held out his hand. I drew - back, and he said: - - “Is it possible you will not take my hand?” - - I looked at it, then into his manly, handsome face, and answered: - - “_There is blood on it!_ The blood of women and children slain - at their own altars, on their own hearthstones, that you might - spread the glorious American institution of woman whipping and - baby stealing.” - - “Oh,” he exclaimed, “This is too bad! I swear to you I never - killed a woman or a child.” - - “Then you did not fight in Mexico, did not help to bombard Buena - Vista.” - - His friends joined him and insisted that I did the Colonel great - wrong, when he looked squarely into my face, and, holding out his - hand, said: - - “For the sake of the old church, for the sake of the old man, for - the sake of the old times, give me your hand.” - - I laid it in his, and hurried away, unable to speak, for he was - the most eloquent man in Pennsylvania. He fell at last at the - head of his regiment, while fighting in the battle of Fair Oaks, - for the freedom he had betrayed in Mexico. - -Her destructive attack on the private character of Daniel Webster, in -1850, also illustrates her reckless courage and her sagacity. She was -in Washington pending the fugitive slave bill. Webster was supporting -the measure—a damaging defection from the anti-slavery side, because of -his supposed moral as well as intellectual greatness. Mrs. S. discovered -“that his whole panoply of moral power was a shell—that his life was -full of rottenness. Then I knew why I had come to Washington.” She -put the facts into one short paragraph, and published it in her own -paper, against the advice of all her friends, and even of such stanch -anti-slavery men as Giddings, Julian, and Dr. Snodgrass. They said it -was true, and no one would dare to deny it; yet no one had dared to -make it public; the publication would ruin her and her influence. She -said: “The cause of the slave hangs on the issue in Congress, and Mr. -Webster’s influence is against him; his influence would be less if the -public knew just what he is. I will publish it and let God take care of -the consequences.” Eccentric conduct, surely! It was published, and it -did bring ruin—but on Daniel Webster, instead of Jane Grey Swisshelm. It -killed Webster’s influence with the conscientious part of the Whig party, -and probably gave the _coup de grace_ to his presidential prospects. She -was long known as “the woman who killed Webster.” - -It was in 1847 that Mrs. Swisshelm took the decisive plunge by founding -the Pittsburgh _Saturday Visiter_. The sensation created by this -unprecedented appearance of politics in petticoats she characteristically -describes: - - It was quite an insignificant looking sheet, but no sooner did - the American eagle catch sight of it than he swooned and fell off - his perch. Democratic roosters straightened out their necks and - ran screaming with terror. Whig ’coons scampered up trees and - barked furiously. The world was falling, and every one had “heard - it, saw it, and felt it.” - - It appeared that on some inauspicious morning each one of - three-fourths of the secular editors from Maine to Georgia had - gone to his office suspecting nothing, when from some corner of - his exchange list there sprang upon him such a horror as he had - little thought to see. A woman had started a political paper! A - woman! Could he believe his eyes? A woman! Instantly he sprang to - his feet and clutched his pantaloons, shouted to the assistant - editor, when he, too, read and grasped frantically at his - cassimeres, called to the reporters and press-men and typos and - devils, who all rushed in, heard the news, seized their nether - garments and joined the general chorus, “My breeches! oh, my - breeches!” Here was a woman resolved to steal their pantaloons, - their trousers, and when these were gone they might cry, “Ye have - taken away my gods, and what have I more?” The imminence of the - peril called for prompt action, and with one accord they shouted, - “On to the breach, in defense of our breeches! Repel the invader - or fill the trenches with our noble dead!” - - “That woman shall not have _my_ pantaloons,” cried the editor - of the big city daily; “nor my pantaloons,” said the editor of - the dignified weekly; “nor my pantaloons,” said he who issued - manifestoes but once a month; “nor mine,” “nor mine,” “nor mine,” - chimed in the small fry of the country towns. - - Even the religious press could not get past the tailor shop, and - “Pantaloons” was the watchword all along the line. George D. - Prentice took up the cry, and gave the world a two-third column - leader on it, stating explicitly, “She is a man all but the - pantaloons.” I wrote to him, asking a copy of the article, but - received no answer, when I replied in rhyme to suit his case: - - “Perhaps you have been busy - Horsewhipping Sal or Lizzie, - Stealing some poor man’s baby, - Selling its mother, may be. - You say—and you are witty— - That I—and ’tis a pity— - Of manhood lack but dress; - But you lack manliness, - A body clean and new, - A soul within it, too. - Nature must change her plan - Ere you can be a man.” - -Mrs. Swisshelm was scourged into the woman’s rights agitation as she had -been into the anti-slavery struggle, by her own troubles, brought on her -again by her husband. - -The house left to her by her parents she wished to sell. Under the laws -of Pennsylvania a wife could not alone give title, and her husband in -this case refused to sign the deed unless the purchase money were given -to him to be put into improvements on his mother’s estate, where all his -wife’s earnings had so far been put out of her reach. Upon the death of -her mother, whom she idolized and had nursed tenderly for some weeks -against the opposition of her husband, the latter filed a claim against -the mother’s estate for his wife’s wages as nurse. Of these applications -of the law she writes: - - I do not know why I should have been so utterly overwhelmed by - this proposal to execute a law passed by Christian legislators - for the government of a Christian people, a law which had never - been questioned by any nation or state or church, and was in - full force all over the world. Why should the discovery of its - existence curdle my blood, stop my heart-beats, and send a flush - of burning shame from forehead to finger-tips? Why blame him for - acting in harmony with the canons of every Christian church? Was - it any fault of his that “all that she (the wife) can acquire - by her labor, service, or act during coverture belongs to the - husband?” Certainly not! - - It occurred to me that all the advances made by humanity had - been through the pressure of injustice, and that the screws had - been turned on me that I might do something to right the great - wrong which forbade married women to own property. So, instead of - spending my strength quarreling with the hand, I would strike for - the heart of that great tyranny. I studied the laws under which - I lived and began a series of letters on the subject of married - women’s rights to hold property. - -The result of the agitation thus begun was an amendment to the statute -in 1848, securing to married women the right to hold property. The -predictions of evils to follow from this introduction of “an apple of -discord into every family,” made by sage and serious men then, sound -marvellously like some of the warnings we hear from objectors to woman -suffrage now. But Mrs. Swisshelm refused to join the organized suffrage -movement, and had many hot debates with its organs as to method, not as -to principles; she herself, curiously enough, predicted evils to flow -from woman suffrage, similar to those her critics had predicted would -flow from granting property rights. - -She opposed the Washingtonian temperance movement, scornfully rejecting -the plan of reforming drunkards by coddling them; waged warfare against -the encroachments of the Church of Rome; and on more than one occasion -successfully resisted the tyranny of trade unions. To defeat the latter -she herself learned and taught other women the art typographic, and -became independent. It is a notable fact that she was driven into this -contention, also, by her own troubles with union printers. She seems to -have been generally a conscript, not often a volunteer to fight, but the -result always was to advance the interests of oppressed classes more than -her own interests. It was to establish a precedent in behalf of other -female correspondents that she applied for and secured a seat in the -reporter’s gallery in the Capitol, Washington, being the first woman who -ever sat there. She was then (1850), as for many years before and after, -a correspondent of the New York _Tribune_. - -In 1847, after twenty years of vain efforts to “live up to the lights” -of her mother-in-law, Mrs. Swisshelm and her husband parted, she taking -their only child and going to Minnesota to live with her sister. - -Her Minnesota experience was almost tragic. Before reaching there she -was informed that Governor Lowrie allowed no abolition sentiments in -St. Cloud. “Then there is not room there for General Lowrie and me,” -stoutly replied the little crusader. General Lowrie was the territorial -governor under Buchanan’s administration; he was a Mississippian who -kept slaves in Minnesota, and ruled the territory with so high a hand -that he was called dictator. When Mrs. Swisshelm started the St. Cloud -_Visiter_ she invited the governor, among others, to subscribe, and -received from him a letter promising it “a support second to that of no -paper in the territory, if it will support Buchanan’s administration.” -To the confusion of her friends, Mrs. Swisshelm accepted the terms, and -frankly announced in the paper that General Lowrie owned everybody in -Minnesota, and so she had sold herself and the paper to him and would -support Buchanan’s administration—its object being, as she understood it, -the subversion of all freedom in the United States, and the placing of a -master over every northern “mud-sill” as over the Southern blacks; that -Governor Lowrie had promised to support the paper in great power and -glory for this, and she was determined to earn her money. It was simply -the unconventional, blunt truth-telling of a child applied to a lying -system of politics, and it cut like a knife. - -Lowrie swore vengeance. “Let her alone, for God’s sake!” said one who -knew her career. “Let her alone, or she will kill you. She has killed -every man she ever touched. Let her alone.” He did not, and she did kill -him with the truth. To his threats she returned the promise that she -should continue to support Buchanan until she had broken him down in -everlasting infamy. Her office was sacked one night and a notice left -that if she revived the paper she would be tied to a log and cast into -the Mississippi. The issue could not be avoided. An indignation meeting -was called, and Mrs. Swisshelm said “I will attend and speak.” She made -her will, settled her business, wrote a history of the trouble to testify -if she could not, and employed a fighting man to attend the meeting by -her side, and shoot her square through the brain if there were no other -way to prevent her falling into the hands of the mob. Mrs. Sterns, a -Yankee woman, held her arm, saying, “We will go into the river together; -they can’t separate us.” So this descendant of the old Covenanter martyrs -made her first speech to the, to her, doubtless, sweet music of a howling -mob, stones and pistol shots. - -The _Visiter_ was reëstablished on new type, by a stock company, and the -first issue brought down on them a libel suit from Governor Lowrie, to -compromise which Mrs. Swisshelm published a retraction, which released -the owners from $10,000 bonds. She then bought the material, suspended -the bonded _Visiter_, and issued the St. Cloud _Democrat_. Its first -issue rang the death-knell of Governor Lowrie and border ruffianism in -Minnesota. It was useless to sue her for libel, and she was too well -protected to fear force. The state election in 1859, when Governor -Lowrie was a candidate for Lieutenant-Governor, turned on the policy of -border ruffianism, press-breaking, and woman mobbing. “The large man who -instituted a mob to suppress a woman of my size [_i. e._, 100 lbs.], and -then failed, was not a suitable leader for American men,” and Lowrie was -snowed under, and not long after was taken to an insane asylum. The next -year Mrs. Swisshelm felt honored at being burned in effigy in St. Paul by -her enemies, as “the mother of the Republican party in Minnesota.” She -afterward lectured two years in the northwest. - -Then came the terrible civil war. Mrs. Swisshelm engaged in hospital -work, bringing to it the consecration, indomitable energy and eccentric -gumption that she displayed in politics and business. She walked through -the red tape and professional etiquette which were killing more than -bullets were, as she had through conventional chains. She says: “It was -often so easy to save a life, where there were the means of living, that -a little courage or common sense seemed like a miraculous gift to people -whose mental powers had been turned in other directions.” In one hospital -she found gangrene, and to her call for lemons, specific for it, she was -gravely told by the surgeon that he had made a requisition a week before -for them, and could not get them. She telegraphed the _Tribune_: - - Hospital gangrene has broken out in Washington, and we want - _lemons!_ LEMONS! LEMONS! No man or woman in health has a right - to a glass of lemonade till these men have all they need. Send us - lemons! - -The next day lemons began to pour into Washington, and soon into every -hospital in the country. Governor Andrew sent two hundred boxes, and -at one time she had twenty ladies with ambulances distributing lemons. -Gangrene disappeared. - -She felt about equal anger and contempt for masculine indifference and -the mushy inefficiency of women who flocked to Washington to nurse in -the hospitals. She sarcastically says the vast majority of the women -who succeeded in getting into hospitals were much more willing to “kiss -him for his mother” than to render the soldier any solid service; they -“were capable of any heroism save wearing a dress suitable for hospital -work. The very, very few who laid aside their hoops—those instruments of -dread and torture—generally donned bloomers and gave offense by airs of -independence.” - -Mrs. S. was one of three women who followed Grant’s advance upon the -Wilderness. Her courage, endurance and good sense never showed to better -advantage than during the Petersburg battles. - -Mrs. Swisshelm’s marital experience was but an episode to her true -career—the counter-irritant that brought out her character. Its -unhappiness was due to four causes: 1. Religious differences. Both sides -were fanatical, and her husband’s people felt a call to give her no -rest till they had got her “converted and saved” by their theological -scales. 2. It was a sad case of mother-in-law, on the husband’s side. -3. The brains, character and courage were all on one side. No woman had -a higher reverence for strong manly character, and she was married to -a male shrew and weakling. But above all she belonged to the last half -of the nineteenth century in her ideas of woman’s sphere, and he to the -last half of the eighteenth, in his. Aside from this, they loved each -other, and after their separation each bore high testimony to the right -intention and purity of the other. - -Few women of this day appreciate how much of their freedom to work and -think they owe to such pioneers as Jane Grey Swisshelm. Few men can be -made to see how much of the great advance of American life is due to the -nobler, broader womanhood made possible by the self-immolation of such -pioneers. They made their impression on the point most needing change -and strength, if our society and government were to become pure, strong -and enduring. For it has become a law of sociology that the condition of -its women is the measure of the civilization and possible growth of any -people. Mrs. Swisshelm did more than her share to lengthen that measure -for this people, and, happily, lived to see the fruits of her work. But -it was a desolate life for a woman, for all that. - - - - -THE IMPERIAL COLLEGE IN PEKING. - -By REV. GEO. W. SMYTH, President of Fouchow College. - - -Among the many interesting places to be seen in the old and strange city -of Peking, that which must claim the chief attention of every visitor -intent on noting the changes which the last twenty-five years have -wrought in this ancient empire is the Túng Wên Kuan, or College of United -Literatures. It is an imperial college in which Chinese students are -taught the principal languages and literatures of modern Europe. Their -studies are in Chinese and in one or other of the western languages, and -hence doubtless its high-sounding but significant name. The students are -government cadets, paid from the public treasury, and preparing to enter -the consular and diplomatic service of their country in foreign lands. -A short account of the origin, purpose and methods of this school may -not be uninteresting, as showing how great a change has come over the -high official mind of this country in the last quarter of a century. -The change, indeed, was the result of necessity, but it is not on that -account any the less real, and the movement it inaugurated can not now be -stopped. - -The war of 1860, which so nearly destroyed the present dynasty, and -showed the ruling classes at Peking the greatly superior power of the -West, necessitated a great change in the foreign policy of the empire. -Hitherto they had complacently looked upon foreigners, subjects and -sovereigns alike, as uncouth barbarians, who were to be excluded from -the capital, or allowed to enter it only on admitting their subjection -and vassalage to the Celestial ruler. But the war which came so near -overthrowing the dynasty and bringing down the whole fabric of government -crashing about their ears, convinced even the proudest of the mandarins -that further resistance would be destruction, and that China, whether -she would or not, must step out of her seclusion, and take an open place -among the nations of the world. She must henceforth enter into treaty -relations with the kingdoms of the West, treat them as equals, trade -with them on reasonable terms, receive their ambassadors, and submit -herself to the public laws of the civilized world. New methods had to be -devised to meet these unusual conditions, and the first thing done was -to establish the Tsungli Yamên, or office for the transaction of Foreign -Affairs. In the following year a school was opened for the training of -interpreters, and out of this grew in time the well equipped Imperial -College of to-day. In 1865 this school was raised to the rank of a -college by adding a scientific department. With this view new buildings -were erected, and steps taken toward engaging the services of a competent -corps of foreign professors. In a memorial to the throne presented -by Prince Kung in 1866, that enlightened statesman thus declares the -scope and motives of this undertaking: “What we desire,” he says, “is -that students shall go to the bottom of these subjects (that is, the -astronomical and mathematical sciences), for we are firmly convinced -that if we are able to master the mysteries of mathematical calculation, -physical investigation, astronomical observation, the construction of -engines, the engineering of water courses, this, and this only, will -assure the steady growth and power of the empire.” The prince had to meet -many objections, and after stating that the nations of the West learn -from each other, daily producing something new, and that even Japan has -recently sent men to England to acquire the language and science of that -country, he adds: “Now, when a small nation like Japan knows how to enter -on a career of progress, what could be a greater disgrace than for China -to adhere to her old traditions, and never think of waking up?” - -It was some time before the college was thoroughly organized. W. A. P. -Martin, D.D., once a missionary of the American Presbyterian Church at -Ningpo, was appointed president. Other appointments followed as speedily -as the fitting men could be found, till the plan contemplated was -realized. - -This, then, is the Imperial College at Peking. What does it do? What -is taught there, and what are the influences of its training? While in -Peking this summer I was fortunate enough to visit it, to see something -of its working, and to gain some familiarity with its purposes and -plans. The learned president, Dr. Martin, courteously showed me over -the buildings, and told me of the work they were doing. The college -buildings adjoin the foreign office or Tsungli Yamên. They are in no -sense imposing, being ordinary Chinese structures of one story, without -attempt at adornment or splendor of any sort whatever. The rooms are -small and plain, containing nothing that is not needed for the immediate -work of teaching. The room of the president is a very plain one for -so high an officer. The departments of chemistry and physics are well -supplied with the instruments and chemicals needed for their work. The -professor of astronomy, who is also professor of mathematics, showed me -a fine equatorial telescope just arrived from Grubb, one of the most -celebrated makers in Europe. The rooms of the language professors are -in keeping with the rest, small and bare, but sufficiently well adapted -for the purposes to which they are put. The languages taught are four, -English, French, German, and Russian, the English receiving far more -attention than the others. The full course extends over a period of eight -years, and in that time the students are led from “reading, writing -and speaking,” through all the intermediate departments to “astronomy, -geology and mineralogy, political economy and the translation of books.” -After completing the course, those so disposed may remain in the college -or be sent abroad, at the option of the government, for the pursuit of -special studies, with a view to professional use. Many so remain. Last -year one man left who had been in attendance for eighteen years. - -The work done is as thorough as it can be. It can not be said that the -students make as much progress as foreign students would make in much -less time, but the slowness is due not more to the difficulties of a -foreign language than to the utter strangeness of the subjects pursued. -I was fortunate in being there on Wednesday, when the students of the -higher English classes read essays of their own before the president -and the English professor. Some of those I heard were very creditable, -especially one on the subject of currency. He seemed to have thought for -himself, to have a fair understanding of the subject, and would have -delighted the fiscal reformers of America by the soundness of his hard -money principles. He expressed great dissatisfaction with the currency -of China, and hoped for a speedy and thorough reform. So does every man -who travels in this strange country. Inside the walls of Peking there is -one way of reckoning money, outside there is another; a few miles off one -may find a third, and so on, _ad infinitum_. The currency of China is -the most bewildering subject on the face of the earth. The rest of the -essays did not impress me so much by the thoughts they expressed (indeed, -there was little originality in any of them), as by their fair command of -English style. The writers had evidently some mastery of the intricacies -of the English idiom. I confess some of the themes disappointed me. They -were taken from somewhere or other in the ancient classics, instead of -being characteristic of the subjects they were studying. But it is hard -to avoid this. The students know very little of the literature of the -languages they are studying, and it is almost impossible, I am told, to -induce them to take the great foreign works from the library and attempt -to read them for themselves. They have not yet reached the state of -intelligent enthusiasm which refuses to think a language known before a -fair acquaintance is made with its literature. But this, too, will come -in time. As to the students personally, a few of them impressed me as -intelligent men, and as anxious to do their work well. The great trouble -with them, the one which must seriously interfere with their studies, -since it can not but narrow and distort their intellectual sympathies, -is their seemingly invincible pride. I was told that scarce any but the -Cantonese students care to take the slightest notice of their professors -when they meet them on the street. Think of the difficulties of teaching -such men! They probably look upon their instructors as far beneath -themselves, and possibly think of the languages they are studying as the -speech of barbarians. With such material, and with such dull and sullen -prejudices to fight against, the professors must be regarded as having -accomplished much. They could do more were their students men of liberal -minds, eager to acquire knowledge for its own sake, and pursuing it with -a generous enthusiasm. It is not easy to do your best work where you fail -to rouse the sympathies of the student and make him feel something of the -ardor which a liberal mind ever feels in the acquisition of knowledge. -The Chinese are not an enthusiastic people, and except in a very few -cases, it is impossible to make them such in learning of foreign things. -They like to know as much as suits their imperative needs, and but few -care enough about more to study with eager diligence. This struck me as -being true of many of the students of this Peking college. - -Beside teaching there is here another department of the first -importance—that of translating and publishing foreign books. Several -important works have already been translated by the professors of -the college, or by the students under their supervision. Wheaton’s -“Elements of International Law,” Woolsey’s “International Law,” Faucett’s -“Political Economy,” Bluntschli’s “Droit International Codifié,” the -“Code Napoleon,” Kerl’s “English Grammar,” and Tytler’s “Universal -History;” these are the chief works hitherto translated. In addition, -several compilations have been made, such as “Natural Philosophy,” -“Chemical Analysis,” “Mathematical Exercises,” and “Mathematical -Physics.” - -The printing office is a commodious building, with several presses, -several fonts of movable Chinese, and one of English type. When I was -there one great book had just been finished, and another was just -being printed. No more remarkable books have ever been issued from the -government press, and if they are prophetic of the near future we may -look for its coming with no little hope. - -The book just published is a report on education in the West, by Dr. -Martin. It is the result of a recent examination of the chief schools -of learning in America and Europe. The report is quite full, giving an -account of the principal classes of schools, elementary and professional, -of the two continents, and closing with an exhibit of the present state -of our own Michigan University. I wish there were space to speak of it at -length, but the mere catalogue of some of the titles of its chapters will -show its scope and purpose as well as the most elaborate description. -Among the principal headings are such as these: “Elements Common to the -Education of all Western Nations;” “Classification of Schools;” “Primary -Schools;” “Education of Women;” “Education of the Blind and Deaf;” -“Literary and Scientific Associations;” “The Nations Learning from Each -Other;” “Rise and Progress of Science;” “Educational Statistics.” Beside -these there is an account of professional schools of all classes. These -will give some conception of the character of this most significant work. -It is published with a preface by one of the ministers, by order of the -Council for Foreign Affairs. - -Who may estimate the influence of such a work as this, published and -sanctioned by such high authority? The educational system of the West -could have no more favorable introduction, as no foreigner in the empire -is more highly esteemed than the learned author. It was fitting that such -a book should come from the pen of Dr. Martin. In his translations of -Woolsey’s and Wheaton’s treatises on international law, he had already -shown the Chinese the public law of the nations of the West, and in this -he describes the educational system on which their intellectual life is -based. Others, it is true, have already taught the Chinese much, but it -is scarcely injustice to say that from no one could this work come with -such weighty authority as from the president of their own highest western -school. It may be regarded as destined to play no unimportant part in -shaping the intellectual life of the China of the future. - -The other book, a much larger one, is an exhaustive treatise on anatomy, -in ten volumes, by Dr. Dudgeon, a professor in the college, and a member -of the London Missionary Society in Peking. He has been in charge for -many years of the London Mission Hospital, and has long been engaged in -the preparation of this great work. One of the conditions on which it was -published was that the authorities should retain one hundred and fifty -copies for their own use. How great a change this indicates, and how -eloquently it speaks for the future of medical science in China, none -but the older missionaries can adequately appreciate. Twenty years ago, -few even of the most sanguine, could have believed that in the ancient -capital itself, almost under the very shadow of the Imperial Palace, the -work of an English medical missionary would be printed at the public -expense, and official sanction be given to this recent innovation of -the once universally feared and detested foreigner. Yet so it is. It is -needless to speculate on what its influence must be on the future of -medical education in this ancient empire. - -Such is some of the work done in this most interesting school. It -would be a pleasing task to note the changes which its very existence -indicates, and speak of what its influence must be on the future. But -this paper, being too long already, with a single further remark I will -bring it to a close. The president of this great school is a Christian -man, once a missionary of the Presbyterian Board, and still interested in -all missionary work. In accepting his new position he gave up neither -his faith nor his interest in the evangelization of the land. This is a -matter of great moment, and it can not but be a theme for rejoicing that -the highest foreign school in the empire is under the presidency of such -a man. Of course he is not permitted to teach Christianity directly, -but his influence and life are on the side of Christian principles, and -Christianity will suffer no injustice at his hands. China is slowly -opening her doors to the introduction of Western learning. She cares -nothing as yet for our religion, but our science she will have. Is it -not then important that it should be given her by Christian men, and -not by such as him who, in the Japanese University at Tokio once told -his students, that in the West Christianity was the religion of only -women and babes? If Christian educators can take a leading part in this -movement now, they may be able to hold it when it becomes more general, -and thus the Chinese, in receiving science may the more readily accept -that best of all gifts, a pure and undefiled Christianity. This must be -the hope of all men interested in the future of China, and patiently -waiting for the time when the religion of Christ shall cover the whole -earth. - - - - -EIGHT CENTURIES WITH WALTER SCOTT. - -By WALLACE BRUCE. - - -In the providence that regulates human affairs there seems to have been -no ordained quiet for the exiled Stuarts, but the quiet of the grave. -During the early and unpopular reigns of the imported “House of Hanover” -the Jacobite party eagerly watched and weighed every opportunity for -restoring the ancient line. The throne of England was too great a prize -to be readily abandoned. Some of the attempts to regain the glory and -power which had departed from these Ichabod princes seem more like a -romance than real history. - -The Chevalier de St. George, whom we saw in the story of “Rob Roy,” -retired to Italy after his unsuccessful enterprise of 1715, “where the -sufferings of his father for the Roman Catholic religion gave him the -fairest right to expect hospitality.” He was at this time thirty years of -age, and, following the suggestions of his counselors, fixed his choice -of a wife on the Princess Clementina Sobieski, daughter of the Prince -of Poland. The romantic history of the Chevalier in pursuit of a throne -was now to be paralleled in the getting of a wife. This young lady was -accounted one of the greatest fortunes in Europe. She was granddaughter -of that King John Sobieski, who defeated the Turks before Vienna. The -dazzling expectations of the Pretender gratified the ambition of her -parents, and they agreed to conduct her privately to Bologna, with a view -to the marriage. The preparation became known to the British Court. The -Emperor of Austria, at the request of England, arrested the bride as she -passed through Innspruck, and detained her as prisoner in a cloister. - -A bold attempt for the release of the Princess was contrived and executed -by Charles Wogan—a devoted partisan to the Stuart cause. “He obtained a -passport from the Austrian ambassador, in the name of Count Cernes and -family, stated to be returning from Loretto to the low countries. Major -Misset and his wife personated the supposed count and countess; Wogan -was to pass for the brother of the count; the Princess Clementina, when -she should be liberated, was to represent the Count’s sister, which -character, in the meantime, was enacted by a smart girl, a domestic of -Mrs. Misset. Captain Toole, with two other steady partisans, attended on -the party of the supposed Count, in the dress and character of domestics. -They arrived at Innspruck on the evening of the 27th of April, 1719, and -took lodging near the convent. It appears that a trusty domestic of the -princess had secured permission of the porter to bring a female with him -into the cloister, and conduct her out at whatever hour he pleased. This -was a great step in favor of their success, and taking advantage of a -storm of snow and hail, Mrs. Misset’s domestic was safely introduced -into the cloister, and the princess, changing clothes with her, came out -at the hour by which the stranger was to return. Through bad roads and -worse weather the liberated bride and her attendants pushed on until they -quitted the Austrian territories, and entered those of Venice. On the -second of May, after a journey of great fatigue, and some danger, they -arrived at Bologna.” - -The Jacobites drew many happy omens from the success with which the -romantic union of the Chevalier de St. George was achieved, although -after all it may be doubted whether the Austrian Emperor, though obliged -in appearance to comply with the remonstrances of the British Court, was -either seriously anxious to prevent the Princess’s escape, or extremely -desirous that she should be retaken. By this union the Chevalier -transmitted his hereditary claims, and with them his evil luck, to two -sons. The first, Charles Edward, born the 31st of December, 1720, was -remarkable for the figure he made during the civil war of 1745-6; the -second, Henry Benedict, born the 6th of March, 1725, for being the last -male heir, in the direct line, of the unfortunate House of Stuart. He -bore the title of Duke of York, and, entering the Church of Rome, was -promoted to the rank of Cardinal. - -This interesting betrothal and marriage, condensed from Scott’s -picturesque narrative in the “Tales of a Grandfather,” serve as a -connecting link between our last paper, which dealt historically with -the affair of 1715, and the present paper which deals with the affair of -1745. It is, moreover, simple politeness to our readers to introduce the -parents, who are passing from the stage, before presenting the son, whose -fortunes were destined to be more romantic than his ancestors, and whose -name will survive in song and poetry as the “Prince Charlie from over the -sea.” - -“Waverley” reveals the true state of Scotland during the middle of the -eighteenth century. In fact, the titles of the chapters present almost -a history in themselves. While it reveals in every page the great power -of the novelist in portrayal of character, in discerning the motives -which influence the actions of individuals, in the poetic description of -scenery, in elevated tone and fitting and graceful dialogue, it differs -from his greater and later works as the “Hypatia” of Charles Kingsley -differs from the “Romola” of George Eliot. It is not so much an inner -growth as an algebraic demonstration; each chapter being _plus_ to -the one that precedes it. In the early part of the story he conducts -Waverley step by step through his boyhood to the choice of a profession. -He then introduces him to the Highlands, and deals with the customs and -manners of the people in a succession of chapter-essays. He gives us a -border-raid; he portrays the “Hold of a Highland Robber;” describes the -chief and his mansion; introduces us to a Highland feast; treats us to -a display of Highland minstrelsy; and thus the story moves on step by -step, so many _stadia_ a day, like the march of Julius Cæsar through -Germany, or the retreat of the ten thousand Greeks under Xenophon. But -in spite of this step-by-step process, which marks the first work of Sir -Walter in prose fiction, no volume of the series presents more vividly or -graphically the historic features of the times to which it is related. - -The wild and fierce Highlanders, who stalked to and fro in pages of the -“Fair Maid of Perth,” are greatly modified and toned down in “Waverley.” -Civilization has girdled their mountain fastnesses. They have been taught -to acknowledge law, or at least to respect and fear it. The patriarchal -system, however, still continues. The chief is the leader in war, and -their arbitrator and protector in peace. The whole income of the tribe -is paid to the chief, and helps to support his rude hospitality. In the -mansion of Fergus MacIvor, Waverley is introduced to the surviving and -modified customs of this northern Gælic people. The description of the -feast and the music of the bard, chanting the deeds of their ancestors, -are worthy of special mention. “A huge oaken table extended through the -whole length of the hall. The apparatus for dinner was simple, even to -rudeness, and the company numerous, even to crowding. At the head of the -table was the chief himself, with Waverley, and two or three Highland -visitors of neighboring clans; the elders of his own tribe sat next in -rank; beneath them their sons and nephews, and foster-brethren; then the -officers of the chief’s household, according to their order, and lowest -of all the tenants who cultivated the ground.” - -“Even beyond the long perspective, Waverley might see upon the green, to -which a huge pair of folding doors opened, a multitude of Highlanders -of a yet inferior description, who nevertheless were considered as -guests, and had their share of the cheer of the day. In the distance, -and fluctuating round the extreme verge of the banquet, was a changeful -group of women, ragged boys and girls, beggars, young and old, large -greyhounds, terriers and pointers, and curs of low degree; all of whom -took some interest in the main action of the piece. Some pains had been -bestowed in dressing the dishes at the upper end of the table. Lower -down stood immense joints of mutton and beef, which resembled the rude -festivity of Penelope’s suitors. But the central dish was a yearling -lamb roasted whole. It was set upon its legs, with a bunch of parsley in -its mouth, and was probably exhibited in that form to gratify the pride -of the cook, who piqued himself more on the plenty than the elegance of -his master’s table. The sides of the poor animal were fiercely attacked -by the clansmen, some with dirks, others with the knives which were -usually in the same sheath with the dagger, so that it was soon rendered -a mangled and rueful spectacle. Lower down still, the victuals seemed of -a still coarser quality, though sufficiently abundant. After the banquet -the chieftain made a signal for the pipes to cease, and said aloud, -‘Where is the song hidden, my friends, that MacMurrough can not find it?’ -The family bard, an aged man, immediately took the hint, and began to -chant with low and rapid utterance a profusion of Celtic verses, which -were received by the audience with all the applause of enthusiasm. As -he advanced in his declamation, his ardor seemed to increase. He had at -first spoken with his eyes fixed upon the ground; he now cast them around -as if beseeching, and anon as if commanding attention, and his tones rose -into wild and impassioned notes, accompanied with appropriate gestures. -The ardor of the poet seemed to communicate itself to the audience. Their -wild and sun-burnt countenances assumed a fiercer and more animated -expression; all bent forward toward the reciter; many sprung up and waved -their hands in ecstasy, and some laid their hands on their swords.” - -It was in such halls as these that the cause of the Pretender was -cherished. The Lowlanders were for the most part disposed to peace. The -relation of landlord and tenant had gradually lost its feudal character. -The payment was in pounds sterling and not in warlike service. The result -of the Pretender’s adventure might therefore have been foretold at the -outset, but it was brilliant while it lasted, and he had the pleasure of -giving a few feasts in Holyrood—the palace of his ancestors. It will be -remembered that he landed with seven followers in Moidart on the 25th -of July, 1745. The place was well chosen for concealment, being on the -main land south of the islands of Skye. He opened communication with the -clans in the neighborhood, but at first received little encouragement. By -wise measures and cordial address his numbers grew slowly. An association -was drawn up and signed by the chiefs who had taken the field, in which -the subscribers bound themselves never to abandon their prince while he -remained in the realm, or to lay down their arms, or make peace with -government, without his express consent. He marched to Perth with his -little army, where the Chevalier first found the want of money. When he -entered that town, he showed one of his followers a single guinea of the -four hundred pounds which he had brought with him from France; but the -towns and cities north of the Tay supplied men and money, and for a time -his fortune was in the ascendant. - -The English troops at that time in Scotland were under a second rate -commander, Sir John Cope. He moved north to Inverness and left Edinburgh -undefended. The Pretender captured Edinburgh, and entered it the 17th -of September. He began his march on foot, but, on account of the crowd -who pressed upon him to kiss his hand, he was compelled to call for his -horse as he approached the eastern entrance of the palace. His personal -appearance was prepossessing. His graceful manners, noble mien and ready -courtesy “seemed to mark him no unworthy competitor of the crown. His -dress was national. A short tartan coat, a blue bonnet with a white rose, -and the order and emblem of the thistle, seemed all chosen to identify -him with the ancient nation he summoned to arms.” It was indeed a proud -moment, but the bubble was soon to burst. After a few successful battles, -and an ill-timed excursion into England, the army was disbanded, and the -unfortunate Wanderer was compelled to flee for his life, disguised as -a servant. He sought refuge in a cavern where seven outlaws had taken -up their abode. With these men he remained about three weeks, and when -the hour of his departure came they said: “Stay with us; the mountains -of gold which the government have set upon your head may induce some -gentleman to betray you, for he can go to a distant country and live on -the price of his dishonor; but to us there exists no such temptation. -We can speak no language but our own—we can live nowhere but in this -country, where, were we but to injure a hair of your head, the very -mountains would fall down to crush us to death.” On the 20th of September -he embarked in a French frigate, and reached Morlaix in Brittany the 29th -of September. - -If there ever was truth in the words, “there is a divinity that doth -hedge a king” it finds illustration in the thirteen months that Charles -Edward spent on this expedition in Scotland. No history or romance -recounts such perils of flight, concealment and escape. The secret of -his concealment was known to persons of every age, sex, and condition, -but no individual from the proudest Earl to the meanest outlaw would -stoop to give up their leader, even for the promised reward, which would -have purchased the half of Scotland north of the Forth. That the Prince -was bold and generous, in this campaign, no person can doubt; and if -Charles the First had possessed as much humor as his amiable descendant, -he might have preserved his head which was an “unco’ loss” to the whole -Stuart line. After the victory at Preston, the Pretender sent word to the -Edinburgh preachers to preach the next day, Sunday, as usual; and the -Rev. Neil M’Vicar offered the following prayer: “Bless the king! Thou -knowest what king I mean. May the crown sit long on his head. As for that -young man who has come among us to seek an earthly crown, we beseech -thee to take him to thyself and give him a crown of glory.” It is said -that when the Prince heard of M’Vicar’s prayer he laughed heartily, and -expressed himself quite satisfied. - -I have spoken of this novel being true to history. It could hardly have -been otherwise when we consider the opportunities Scott had for studying -all the facts. In the closing chapter of “Waverley” he says: “It was -my accidental lot, though not born a Highlander, to reside, during my -childhood and youth, among persons who cherished a lingering though -hopeless attachment, to the House of Stuart; and now, for the purpose of -preserving some idea of the ancient manners of which I have witnessed -the almost total extinction, I have embodied in imaginary scenes, and -ascribed to fictitious characters, a part of the incidents which I then -received from those who were actors in them. Indeed, the most romantic -parts of this narrative are precisely those which have a foundation in -fact. There is scarce a gentleman who was ‘in hiding,’ after the battle -of Culloden, but could tell a tale of wild and hair-breadth ’scapes, as -extraordinary as any which I have ascribed to my heroes. The accounts -of the battle at Preston and skirmish at Clifton are taken from the -narrative of intelligent eye-witnesses, and corrected from the ‘History -of the Rebellion’ by the late venerable author of ‘Douglas.’ The Lowland -Scottish gentlemen, and the subordinate characters, are not given as -individual portraits, but are drawn from the general habits of the -period, of which I have witnessed some remnants in my younger days, and -partly gathered from tradition.” - -“Guy Mannering,” the next in sequence, is rather a portrayal of character -than a historic picture. It gives us a glimpse of gipsey-life in Galloway -true to fact, and also reveals the traits of the hardy smugglers that -invested its shores. The characters stand out by themselves with -little or no background. Here is Dandie Dinmot, with his numerous dogs -and children; Attorney Pleydell, with his old-time courtesy; Dominie -Sampson, a cyclopædia of worthless erudition—a man to be laughed at and -loved—possessing a fund of knowledge, but no wisdom; Guy Mannering, a -courtly gentleman, deep and undisturbed as a tropic sea; two sweet young -ladies and their lovers, who are at last happily married; Meg Merrilies, -as generous and sensible a gipsey as ever lived; Dirk Hatterick, as false -a sea rover as ever hoisted sail; and Glossin, a fawning scoundrel, whose -course through life was like the trail of a serpent. The book is in fact -a drama rather than a novel, or rather both in one—a dramatic romance. -Coleridge regarded it as one of the greatest of Scott’s novels, and -mentions it in this connection with “Old Mortality.” - -In “Redgauntlet” we find a continuation of the smuggler trade, and -are also introduced to the Pretender, who has not improved either in -appearance or character since we last saw him in “Waverley.” His friends -and supporters for the most part consist of the very dregs of society. In -his blind adoration for a person not to be named with respect, the Prince -lost the confidence of friends who had risked their all to support his -title. In a cup of dissolute pleasure he dissolves the pearl of his good -name. If he had died at the head of his army of adherents in Scotland, -or after his return to France, he would have survived in history as a -worthier man. “He proved to be one of those personages who distinguish -themselves during some singular and brilliant period of their lives, like -the course of a shooting star at which men wonder, as well on account -of the briefness, as the brilliancy of its splendor. A long trace of -darkness overshadowed the subsequent life of a man who, in his youth, -shewed himself so capable of great undertakings; the later pursuits and -habits of this unhappy Prince are those painfully evincing a broken -heart, which finds refuge from its own thoughts in sordid enjoyments.” - -The man was also in the hands of persons full of wild plots and political -impatience. They formed schemes wholly impracticable. They invited him in -1750 to London; but he was soon convinced that he had been deceived, and -after a stay of five days he returned to the place from which he came. He -died at Rome the 31st of January, 1788, and was royally interred in the -Cathedral Church of Frescati, of which his brother was bishop. - -After his death his brother, the last direct male heir of the House of -Stuart, made no assertion of his right to the British throne, but had -a beautiful medal struck, in which he was represented in kingly garb -with the motto in Latin, “King by the grace of God, but not by the -will of the people.” He finally received an annuity of 4,000 pounds a -year given to him by George the Third, and on his death he bequeathed -to George the Fourth all the crown jewels, which James the Second had -carried along with him to the Continent in 1688. He died at Rome, June -1807, in the eighty-third year of his age. The volumes of “Waverley” and -“Redgauntlet,” taken in connection with Scott’s “Tales of a Grandfather,” -give the most complete history of this unfortunate struggle. - -“The Antiquary” and “Saint Ronan’s Well” present a postscript of manners -and customs, which seems tame from a historic standpoint, after living -so many centuries in the company of heroes and princes. Scott speaking -of “The Antiquary” says: “It wants the romance of ‘Waverley’ and the -adventure of ‘Guy Mannering;’ yet there is some salvation about it, -for if a man will paint from nature he will be likely to amuse those -who are daily looking at it.” He also says in his introduction of “The -Antiquary:” “‘Waverley’ embraced the age of our fathers, ‘Guy Mannering’ -that of our youth, and ‘The Antiquary’ refers to the last ten years of -the eighteenth century. I have in the last two narratives especially, -sought my principal personages in the class of society who are the last -to feel the influence of that general polish which assimilates to each -other the manners of different nations. Among some of the same class I -have placed some of the scenes, in which I have endeavored to illustrate -the operation of the higher and more violent passions; both because -the lower orders are less restrained by the habit of suppressing their -feelings, and because I agree with my friend Wordsworth, that they seldom -fail to express them in the strongest and most powerful language. This -is, I think, peculiarly the case with the peasantry of my own country, -a class with whom I have been long familiar. The antique force and -simplicity of their language, often tinctured with the oriental eloquence -of Scripture, in the mouths of those of an elevated understanding, give -pathos to their grief, and dignity to their resentment.” The pathos and -eloquence in the homes of the fishermen justify Scott’s criticism, and -the picture which he has drawn of the old grandmother will survive in our -memory as one of the most dramatic in the Waverley series. - -There are two references in “The Antiquary” to contemporary history, -which ought not to be entirely overlooked; one where the Antiquary -describes the excitement of preparation in Edinburgh against the -anticipated French invasion, when almost every individual was enrolled -either in military or civil capacity. Beacons were erected along the -coast to summon the newly organized army of defense when occasion -required, and Scott humorously refers, in one of his letters, to the -appearance he himself made decked out in regimentals. Near the close -of “The Antiquary” the signal light blazes out by mistake the 2d of -February, 1804; the person, who kept watch on the commanding station -of Home Castle, being deceived by some accidental fire in the county -of Northumberland. The only historical allusion in “St. Ronan’s Well” -relates to the Reign of Terror and to Napoleon Bonaparte at Acre. - -The twenty-six novels and five poems of Sir Walter, therefore, unite the -two greatest events of Europe—the wars of the Crusades, and the exploits -of Napoleon and the French Revolution. In “Count Robert of Paris” we -see Constantinople in her glory, under the rule of the crafty Alexius. -We hear the tread of armed hosts passing and repassing along the great -highway of the world. In “The Betrothed” we see England aroused by the -voice of her eloquent Archbishop. In “The Talisman” we see the craft -of Saladin opposed to the discordant army of Richard the Lion-hearted. -In “Ivanhoe” we find Saxon and Jew pressed down under the heel of the -Norman. We see Scotland rescued from the oppression of England in -“Castle Dangerous” and the “Lord of the Isles.” We note the state of the -Highlands in 1402 in the “Fair Maid of Perth,” and trace the wiles and -craft of the French Emperor in “Louis the Eleventh,” and in “Anne of -Geierstein.” We visit with “Marmion” the Battle-field of Flodden, we see -the light glimmer in the Chancel of Melrose as we turn the pages of “The -Lay of the Last Minstrel,” and wander with James the Fifth in disguise -through the wild passes of the Trosachs. In the “Monastery” and “Abbot” -we read the history of the Catholic and Protestant struggle in Scotland, -we weep with the unfortunate Mary, and glory in the triumph of Knox. In -“Kenilworth” we see the power and weakness of the Virgin Queen, and look -into the sad eyes of Amy Robsart sacrificed upon the altar of ambition. - -We see the London of James the First in the “Fortunes of Nigel;” we -hear in “Rokeby” the echo of the battle of Marston Moor; we follow the -struggle of Argyle and Montrose in the “Legend;” and talk with the young -exile, Charles the Second, in the groves of “Woodstock.” In “Peveril of -the Peak” we find the King upon his throne, surrounded by Buckingham -and the most desolate court of Europe. In “Old Mortality” we sympathize -with the Covenanters, a people devout and sincere in their character, as -they were unpractical in their conduct. In “The Pirate” we note some of -the surviving customs of old Scandinavia. In the “Bride of Lammermoor” -we see the decay of a noble House. “The Black Dwarf” is related to the -fierce discussion in Scotland at the time of the national Union. “Rob -Roy” introduces us to the Pretender in the Affair of 1715. “The Heart of -Midlothian” gives us a picture of Edinburgh; and so our historic chain, -composed of poetic links, brings us down to the beginning of our own -century. No wonder that Scott has been styled the Great Magician, when, -by the lifting of his wand, he was able to make the heroes of neglected -history burst their cerements. - -I sat one evening on the banks of the Tweed amid the ruins of Dryburgh -Abbey, by a plain monument in St. Mary’s Aisle; the soft moonlight, -streaming through broken casements, added solemnity and beauty to the -peaceful sylvan scene. I recalled the ruins of Kenilworth Castle, far off -on another poetic stream, and the pageant of history which there passed -before England’s Elizabeth; and I thought how much grander the procession -of Eight Hundred Years, which passed in long review before the mental -vision of the great novelist and poet, now resting beneath the quiet -stars. The ivy still rustles in the breeze; the gray ruins again gleam -in the moonlight, and, reader, the years can never lift their furrows of -care between me and that twilight picture hallowed by the poetic memory -of a noble man. - - - - -ALASKA—ITS MISSIONS. - -By the REV. WM. H. LEWIS. - - -No one familiar with the spiritual obstacles that missionaries encounter -expects that characters that shall be Christian from highest principle, -and through and through, will be formed in the first, or even the second -generation of converts, as a rule, though every mission field furnishes -shining exceptions to this rule. We shall not be disheartened, then, -when we come to look into the history of Alaska, if the present state of -society there is found to be slightly savage still. - -Dall, in his work, “Alaska and its Resources,” speaking of the Indian -character, says: “They are hospitable, good humored, but not always -trustworthy. They will steal, and have sometimes attacked small vessels -in the straits.… They sometimes have as many as five wives, though one or -two is the usual number. Drunkenness is a common vice among them. They -have an uncontrollable passion for alcohol, which is plentifully supplied -them by the whalers and traders. They hate the Russians, and will not -trade with them.… Their customs in regard to the treatment of the old and -infirm are, from a civilized point of view, brutal and inhuman.… When an -old person was sick for more than seven days the others put a rope around -his body and dragged him by it around the house over the stones. If this -did not kill or cure, the sick person was taken to the place of the -dead.… Here the individual was stoned or speared, and the body left for -the dogs to devour, the latter being themselves eaten by the natives.” -Of the Aleuts proper he says: “Since the time of their first intercourse -with the Russians, their character, habits, mode of life, and even their -very name, have been totally changed. Originally they were active, -sprightly, and fond of dances and festivals. Their mode of worship -partook more of the character of religion than that of any of the tribes, -which still remain unchanged. Ground into the very dust by the oppression -of ruthless invaders, their religious rights, gay festivals and -determined character have all passed away. A shade of melancholy is now -one of their national characteristics. All speak some Russian, and many -of them can converse fluently in that language. The Aleuts are light, and -nearly the same color as the Innuits of the Northwest. Their features, -perhaps from the great admixture of Russian blood, are more intelligent -and pleasing. They are all nominally Greek Catholics, but there is very -little knowledge of the principles of true Christianity amongst them. -While further advanced than any other native American tribe, they are far -from civilized, except in dress, and require careful guardianship and -improved methods of education to preserve them from the rapacity of the -traders. The reality of their devotion to a religion which they do not -comprehend may well be doubted.” He then quotes Veniamínoff’s description -of the native character, with the comment that it is marked by partiality -confessed, and that it is mainly due to his goodness of heart and love -for the people.… In another place, speaking of mission work not Russian, -he says; “In the evening, the Indians, old and young, gathered in the -fort yard and sang several hymns with excellent effect. Altogether, it -was a scene which would have delighted the hearts of many very good -people who know nothing of Indian character, and as such will doubtless -figure in some missionary report. To any one who at all understood the -situation, however, the absurdity of the proceeding was so palpable -that it appeared almost like blasphemy. Old Sakhuiti, who has at least -eighteen wives, whose hands are bloody with repeated and most atrocious -murders, who knows nothing of what we understand by right and wrong, by a -future state of rewards and punishments, or by a Supreme Being—this old -heathen was singing as sweetly as his voice would allow, and with quite -as much comprehension of the hymn as the dogs in the yard. Indians are -fond of singing; they are also fond of tobacco; and, for a pipeful apiece -you may baptize a whole tribe of them. Why will intelligent men still go -on, talking three or four times a year to Indians on doctrinal subjects -by means of a jargon which can not express an abstract idea, and the use -of which only throws ridicule on sacred things, and still call such work -spreading the truths of Christianity? When the missionary will leave the -trading posts, strike out into the wilderness, live with the Indians, -teach them cleanliness first, morality next, and by slow and simple -teaching lead their thoughts above the hunt or the camp—then, and not -until then, will they be competent to comprehend the simplest principles -of right and wrong.” - -The history of the early dealings of the Russian expeditions with the -natives is one of continued outrages and retaliations. Almost every -record of voyages for discovery or trading from 1648-1800 tells of -atrocities committed by the sailors, and of wholesale massacres by the -natives. The sole purpose of these expeditions was gain, and no attempt -was made even to conciliate, much less to evangelize, the Indians. It -was not until 1793 that a ukase was issued by the Empress of Russia, -authorizing the introduction of missionaries into the American colonies, -but unfortunately the same ukase ordered the shipment thither of convicts -from Russia, and was obeyed in the proportion of a hundred convicts -to one missionary. In 1794 (May) Shílikoff brought over 190 emigrant -convicts, two overseers and eleven monks, and Ióasaph, elder of the -Augustine Friars, was invited to settle in the colony. All the monks -were obliged to support themselves by constant work, as no provision was -made for them by the government, and Ióasaph complained bitterly of the -treatment they received from the Shílikoff Trading Company’s officials. -At the same time, in 1795, one year after his landing, he reported the -conversion of 1,200 natives, thus quite justifying the hard criticisms -quoted above. The census of this colony of Kadiák in the same year gave -a population of 3,600 natives. In 1796 Father Ióasaph was made bishop -by imperial ukase, and returned to Irkútsk to receive his consecration. -Father Iuvenáti was murdered by the natives for attempting to put down -polygamy. The first Russo-Greek Church was built at Kadiák during this -year. In 1799 Bishop Ióasaph, with a company of clergy, set sail for his -new diocese in the ship “Fenie,” which was lost at sea with all on board, -and from this time to 1810 only one monk was left in the colonies. On the -10th of June, 1810, Captain Golófnin brought one priest to Sitka in his -sloop of war “Diana,” and in 1816 Father Sòlokoff arrived from Moscow, -and took charge of all the mission work in the colonies. There were at -the death of Governor Baránoff in 1819 five colonies of the company in -the Aleutian Isles, four on Cook’s Inlet, two on Chujách Gulf, and one -on Baránoff Island, in Sitka Bay, with three priests in charge, three -chapels and several schools, where, however, nothing was taught except -reading and writing in the ecclesiastical characters. Father Mordóffski -reached Kadiák in 1823, and in 1824 the real history of the mission -begins with the arrival of the noble and devoted Innocentius Veniamínoff, -the Russian Selwyn, at Unaláshka, and the commencement of his life-long -labors among the Aleuts. He was made bishop and transferred to Sitka in -1834, and the record of his life gives all that there is to be said about -the progress of religious work among the natives, so far as the Russian -Church is concerned, up to the time of the transfer of the territory -to the United States. Mr. Dall’s estimate of his labors is well worth -quoting here to counterbalance some other quotations that have been made -from his book. He says, “Whatever of good is ingrained in their (the -natives’) characters may be in great part traced to the persevering -efforts of one man. This person was the Rev. Father Innocentius -Veniamínoff, of the Irkútsk Seminary, since Bishop of Kamchatka. He alone -of the Greek missionaries to Alaska has left behind him an undying record -of devotion, self-sacrifice and love, both to God and man, combined with -the true missionary fire.” - -John Veniamínoff was born September 1st, 1797, graduated from the -seminary at Irkútsk in 1817, and was ordained in May of that year. He was -advanced to the priesthood in 1821, made Bishop of Kamchatka in 1840, -and took the title of Innocent. In 1850 his see was made archiepiscopal, -and in 1868 he was recalled to Russia and made successor of Philaret as -Metropolitan of Moscow. In 1823 he offered himself as a missionary, and -was sent by his bishop to Unaláshka. The following extracts from his own -published account of his mission (“The Founding of the Orthodox Church in -Russian America,” St. Petersburg, 1840) will give the best idea of what -he had to do, and how well he did it: - - Although the Aleuts willingly embraced the Christian religion, - and prayed to God as they were taught, it must be confessed - that, until a priest was settled amongst them they worshiped one - who was almost an unknown God. For Father Macarius, from the - shortness of time that he was with them, and from the lack of - competent interpreters, was able to give them but very general - ideas about religion, such as of God’s omnipotence, His goodness, - etc. Notwithstanding all of which the Aleutines remained - Christians, and after baptism completely renounced Shamanism, - and not only destroyed all the masks which they used in their - heathen worship, but also allowed the songs which might in any - way remind them of their heathen worship to fall into disuse, so - that when, on my arrival amongst them, I through curiosity made - inquiry after these songs, I could not hear of one. But of all - good qualities of the Aleutines, nothing so pleased and delighted - my heart as their desire, or to speak more justly, _thirst_, for - the Word of God, so that sooner would an indefatigable missionary - tire of _preaching_ than they of _hearing_ the Word. - -But Veniamínoff, true missionary that he was, was not content with his -quiet, peaceful labors among the Aleuts. There was a fierce tribe that -hunted the Russians like wild beasts in the neighborhood of Sitka, and -to them he determined to carry the gospel. He began to get ready for -his mission to these Koloshes in 1834, but was detained a year, and at -last, ashamed of himself for his cowardice, he resolved that immediately -upon the close of the Christmas holidays he would take his life in his -hand and go. “Four days before I came to these Koloshes,” he says, “the -small-pox broke out among them. Had I begun my instruction before the -appearance of the small-pox they would certainly have blamed me for -all the evil which came upon them, as if I were a Russian Shaman or -sorcerer, who sent such plagues amongst them. But glory be to God, who -orders all things for good.” (Think of thanking God for opening such _a -door of entrance_, a door from whose opening in such a place any one but -a man of iron nerves and complete self-surrender would have fled away -and thanked God for his escape!) “The Koloshes were not what they were -two years previously” (when he _meant_ to come among them). “Few were -baptized then, for, while I proclaimed the truth to them, I never urged -upon them, or wished to urge upon them, the immediate reception of holy -baptism, but, seeking to convince their judgment, I awaited a request -from them. Those who expressed a desire to be baptised I received with -full satisfaction.” After sixteen years of missionary toil in such a -field Veniamínoff was sent to St. Petersburg to plead for help for the -mission. The Czar proposed to the Synod to send him back as a bishop, but -that body objected, because, though he was an excellent man, he had “no -cathedral, no body of clergy, and no episcopal residence.” “The more, -then, like an apostle,” said the Czar, and he was consecrated. No sooner -was he consecrated than he was impatient to get back to his see, and on -April 30th, 1842, he writes: “At last, thank the Lord God, in America! -Our doings since we came to Sitka (September 26th) have not yet been -very important. A mission was sent to Noushtau, which will reach its -destination not sooner than the _middle_ of _next June_. December 17th -a sort of Theological School was opened, containing now twenty-three -persons, creoles and natives. The theological student I. T. was sent -to Kadiák to learn the language, and in four months has had wonderful -success. The monk M. has been preaching to the Koloshes, and ⸺ has about -eighty candidates for holy baptism, and asks it for them; but I do not -care to be over hasty with them. The more and the better they are taught, -the more can they be depended upon. I went this spring to Kadiák to -examine into the affairs of the Church there, and was comforted beyond -expectation. The church is full every holy day, and Lent was kept by more -than four hundred of them, some coming from distant places.” - -_April 5, 1844._—“The children here (at Sitka) between the ages of -one and eighteen are very numerous. In the Theological School, in the -Company’s School, and in two girls’ schools, there are about one hundred -and forty, and yet I gathered about one hundred and fifty others.” He -reports four hundred children under instruction, and thirty-five adults -baptized at their own request. 1845.—The Kwichpak Church numbered two -hundred and seventy natives and thirty foreigners. Priests visited the -Kenai and Koetchan tribes, staying with them some months and baptizing -several converts. And so the good bishop went on from year to year, as -the Russian Mouravieff says, “Sailing over the ocean, or driving in -reindeer sledges over his vast, but thinly settled diocese, thousands -of miles in extent, everywhere baptizing the natives, for whom he has -introduced the use of letters and translated the gospel into the tongue -of the Aleutines.” - -“The good bishop has little to say of himself. We are told he became -master of six dialects, spoken in the field committed to his charge. He -himself translated, or assisted others in translating, large parts of -God’s Word and the liturgy of his church for the use of the natives. -For forty-five years, ten of them as Bishop of Kamchatka, eighteen more -as its archbishop, he labored on, in season and out of season.” (Hale’s -“Innocent of Moscow.”) And when, in 1867, Philaret died and Innocent was -chosen Patriarch of Moscow, one of the first works he undertook was the -organization of the Orthodox Missionary Society, which was the cause of -as much good at home in awakening the spirit of missions in the church as -it was abroad in supporting the work in distant fields. This society in -1877 raised and expended 141,698.65¾ roubles in missionary work. - -The following statistics are taken from a report in the _Mission Journal_ -of Irkútsk: “There are in the diocese of the Aleutian Islands and Alaska, -including about two hundred Sclaves and Greeks at San Francisco, eleven -thousand five hundred and seventy two members of the Eastern Church. The -church buildings are nine—viz., at San Francisco, at Sitka (where there -are about three hundred orthodox), at Kadiák, at Renai, at Bielkoffsky, -at Ounalashka, at Nonschatchak, on the Island of St. Paul, and at the -Michaeloffsky Redoubt at Kwichpak. There are two vacancies among the -clergy at Sitka and at the Kenai Mission.” - -Bishop Iohn succeeded Innocent, but soon returned to Russia. Bishop -Nestor, a man of ability, went out in 1879. He died in 1880, and has -had no successor. The most influential Russians left the country when -the territory was ceded, and interest in the missions has largely been -withdrawn, so that in the last two reports of the Orthodox Missionary -Society no mention whatever is made of Alaskan Missions. - -And this brings us to speak of another work going on there, viz., the -mission of the Presbyterians. On the 10th of August, 1877, the Rev. -Sheldon Jackson and Mrs. McFarland reached Fort Wrangel as the first -missionaries of the Presbyterian body to Alaska. Mr. Jackson reports -that one of the first sights he saw was an Indian ringing a bell to call -the people to school. The Indian was Clah, from Fort Simpson, and about -twenty pupils attended. The Lord’s Prayer was recited in Chinook jargon -(a mixture of French-Canadian, English, and Indian words), and the long -meter doxology was sung at closing. The book stock inventoried four -Bibles, four hymn books (Moody and Sankey), three primers, thirteen First -Readers, and one wall chart. Twelve thousand dollars were raised as a -special fund by Mr. Jackson’s efforts at home, and two other missionaries -were sent out in 1878. In 1880 one missionary and one teacher went -to Alaska. In 1879 the mission buildings were erected, and the First -Presbyterian Church of Fort Wrangel organized. The mission includes -a church building, a Girls’ Industrial Home and school houses, with -stations among the Chilcats, Hydahs and Hoonyahs, neighboring tribes. -There are at present three ministers and five male and female teachers at -the different stations. - -To provide for the Swedes and Germans in the employ of the Russian -American Fur Company, a Lutheran minister was sent to Sitka in 1845 and -remained till 1852. He was succeeded by the Rev. Mr. Nintec, preaching in -Swedish and German, who remained until the transfer in 1867, when, his -support being withdrawn by the Russian government, he returned to Europe. - -A Roman Catholic bishop, with one priest, also came to Fort Wrangel in -1879 to establish a mission, but it is believed that the work has now -been stopped and the priest withdrawn. - -It must be remembered that all that has been cited of the missions so far -has only to do with the Indians in the neighborhood of Sitka and Fort -Wrangel, along the southern coast, and on the Lower Yukon. So far, the -great continent, with its vast and almost unexplored interior, has only -been trimmed around the edges. Full 40,000 of the possible 60,000 natives -are yet without Christianity, and one might as well establish a mission -in Cuba to evangelize Spain, or in the Jerseys to reach the Mahometans, -as to sit down in a mission at Sitka and hope to reach the scattered -tribes of Alaska. If we should send missionaries to that neighborhood -it would only be to make of it a Fort _Wrangel_ indeed, but the whole -country is open to us, and on the Grand Yukon and its tributaries and -among the Eskimos of the northern coast there is work enough, yet -untouched, for all the men the church could send. - -Here, then, in as small a compass as possible, is the field, its -past history and its present condition; a few Greek priests, whose -congregations are decreased by removals and will eventually die out; -eight or ten Presbyterians, men and women, who confine their labors to -Sitka and Fort Wrangel, and have enough to do there; and one clergyman -of the Church of England, on a river 2,500 miles long, whose banks from -end to end are his parish; 11,000 members of the Greek Church, 700 or -800 Presbyterians, and between 2,000 and 3,000 Church of England folk -familiar with her services and loving her ritual; and at the very least -calculation 5,500 natives that might be reached and cared for, and -_should_ be cared for. Here is a chance to show the people of America -that the church does know how to deal with the Indian question. There -will be a clear field and no favor for several years to come. A fund of -$15,000 appropriated by Congress in 1878 for educational purposes, but -never called for, might be claimed by any party proving to Congress by -their works that they meant to educate the people. A government of some -sort, military perhaps, will soon be established. Prospectors after -everything valuable will overrun the country as soon as it is safe and -profitable to do so. What shall be done by Christian people for all these -heathen souls? - - - - -OUR NAVAL FORCE. - -By LIEUTENANT G. W. MENTZ, U. S. Navy. - - -Beside torpedoes and fortifications there should be always at hand for -the defense of our coasts, a sufficient number of as good iron-clads and -torpedo boats as any nation in the world possesses, vessels that can go -to sea, so that we can meet the enemy with the same kinds of weapons he -opposes to us, and with enough of them to prevent the first hard blows. -Then with this as a nucleus, and our ship-builders and our mechanics -skilled in the work necessary to keep up such an establishment, we could -build up a sufficiently large navy as the war progressed. - -If we wait until war is upon us before we provide ourselves with such -modern weapons, and such as every nation of any importance, except -ourselves, possesses, our officers and men would have to fight with -weapons with which they are unfamiliar, while their opponents are trained -in their management. - -It requires time to learn to handle the new weapons of naval warfare, -which are very different and much more complicated than those of the -days of wooden frigates and smooth-bore guns, such as our navy is still -composed of, and that is another reason why we should keep up a navy in -time of peace. Torpedo and torpedo-boat attacks, for instance, depend -almost entirely upon the _skill_ in their management. We have no such -things as torpedo-boats and whitehead torpedoes, etc., and our officers -have had no experience or practice with such weapons. - -Germany, the leading military nation of the world, has the proper idea -of preparing her navy for war in time of peace. Beside being provided -with the best and most effective weapons, all her naval force, active -and reserve, are exercised each summer and the men and officers are -trained in their duties on board the vessels, and with the weapons they -will have to use in time of war. Then, each article, from a sailmaker’s -needle to a gun is kept ready at the naval stations, all the articles -belonging to one ship being labeled with the ship’s name, and all kept -together so that they can instantly be put on board. The German Admiralty -has recently reported that the whole naval force can be put in effective -working order, for offensive or defensive movements, in one week’s time. -It was only by similar preparations with her army in time of peace, that -she was enabled, so promptly, to meet and to conquer France in 1870. - -But let us glance at the kind of weapons which would be used against -us in a foreign war, and with which we are unprovided and with which -we must supply ourselves. Except the United States, every nation of -any maritime importance possesses immense war vessels. There are some -vessels which have an average speed of sixteen miles an hour; which -have their batteries and their machinery protected by solid iron of a -thickness of two feet, or of steel and iron combined of one and a half -feet thickness; whose battery, or armament rather, consists of a few -_very_ heavy guns, capable of sending a mass of metal weighing one ton a -distance of eleven miles, several guns of less weight and power, a number -of revolving cannon, a dozen or two dozen torpedoes, two torpedo-boats, -each of these fitted with four torpedoes and a revolving gun; whose crews -are supplied with rapid, accurate and distant-firing small arms (muskets -and pistols). In addition to all this, these vessels are rams, and are -themselves most powerful weapons of war, and could cut in two and sink -any ship they struck. These vessels, when complete, with their guns, -ammunition, crews, provisions and coal, everything in fact on board, -weigh from 9,000 to 13,000 tons. About twenty-seven feet of the depth of -such a vessel while she floats is beneath the surface of the water, and -the whole ship is divided into fifty or more water-tight compartments, so -that if any two compartments are filled with water the ship will still -float. These iron-clads (more properly armor-clads) do not have this two -feet thickness of iron all around the ship, only the vital parts, the -engines and boilers, etc., and that part of the ship where the great guns -are fought, are so protected. The armor consists of a belt eight to ten -feet wide (deep) and from one to two feet thick; half of its width or -depth is below the surface of the water and half is above. The machinery, -engines and boilers in a war vessel are put in the ship as low down as -possible, the farther below the surface of the water the better, as below -the surface of the water a shot is not effective, that is, for a greater -depth below the surface than one or two feet. - -The machinery then is protected from shot on the sides and underneath. -To protect it from shot on top, a steel deck of three inches thickness -is built in the ship immediately over the engines and boilers, the deck -inclining toward the sides of the ship, so that if a shot did strike the -deck it would be deflected upward and away from the engines and boilers. -This deck is also placed below the surface of the water, if practicable. - -The guns of such a ship are generally placed in a citadel and on the deck -underneath the citadel. The citadel is clad with iron or steel, and the -guns on the deck beneath are protected by the belt of armor spoken of -above. - -The amount of metal that the guns can fire from one side of such a ship -is anywhere from 6,700 to 8,960 pounds. The shot composing this mass of -metal travel through the air with a velocity of 1,800 feet per second, -and travel nine miles in about twenty-five seconds. When a shot weighing -one ton and traveling with such velocity strikes an object squarely, the -object must indeed be strong to withstand the shock. - -What resistance to such a force could the walls of a wooden ship give, or -even those of ten-sixteenths of an inch of steel or of seven inches of -iron? Yet there is no United States war vessel with a greater thickness -of side than seven inches of iron. Most of our monitors have only 5″ -armor. - -The people of this country have reason to be proud of the deeds of their -navy in the past, and many a time has the “ruler of the seas” lowered his -flag to the stars and stripes. But those victories were gained with ships -the equal of any in the world, and with guns which had no superiors and -with crews and officers well trained and accustomed to the use of their -weapons. Is it so now with our navy? No. We would go into battle with -the odds all against us. The sides of our ships are as pasteboard to the -high-power guns of the present time. - -Our guns are as much use against two feet of iron armor, or its -equivalent in steel, as a pop-gun is against a stone wall, and would make -just about as much impression. And, although we have just as brave, -patriotic and skillful men and officers in our navy to-day as we ever -had, they are not skilled or trained in the use of the proper weapons, in -the management of modern weapons—such as their opponents will use against -them. - -The possession of these instruments of war would make all governments -very careful and respectful in their treatment of us and increase the -probabilities of their never being used in actual warfare. The annual -cost would not amount to the one millionth of the amount of damage -Brazil, or Italy, or Germany, or France, or England, or Chili even could -do us in the same length of time if we are without them. - -Our navy costs about $15,000,000 yearly, about half of that sum is for -the pay of officers and men, and it is misapplied, because they are -being trained in the use of weapons which are no longer effective, and -our people are not getting the proper return for their money. But the -fault is their own and the navy is not to blame. The cause of the great -change that has taken place in the last twenty years in the weapons of -naval warfare is due to the use of iron and steel, instead of wood, in -the construction of ships, and, although the navy has asked the country -repeatedly for modern ships and guns, the people have not seen fit to -grant them. - -This is what our navy consists of: Of high-power rifle guns, such as -almost every nation possesses, we have one, recently finished, and which, -owing to lack of experience, required _one year_ to construct. - -Of cruising vessels, fit only to destroy merchant vessels of slow speed, -we have thirty-six, four of which are of iron, whose sides are about one -half inch thick. None of these vessels would be able to engage the battle -ships of any maritime nation. - -For coast defense, we have nineteen iron-clads; many require extensive -repairs, and it would take time to put them in condition. None of them -have sides of a greater thickness than seven inches of iron, and they -could not withstand the blows of modern guns. - -Of guns for the whole fleet, we have, beside the one mentioned above, -eighty-seven converted rifle guns worth retaining, but they are only of -fair power. The other guns in the navy, 2,577 in number, are, according -to a late report of the Secretary of the Navy, “in no real sense suited -to the needs of the present day.” - -Of torpedo-boats such as every other navy has, we have _none_ nor have we -any torpedo-boats, except the “Alarm.” - -Of the personnel, there are, all told, officers, seamen, apprentices and -marines, 11,918. - -Of reserves, we have none but the merchant marine, and merchant sailors -require considerable training to fit them for war purposes, and none of -them are trained for such a purpose now. - -This force is to protect 10,000 miles of sea coast, the lake coast, the -second largest merchant marine in the world, the amount of property is -incalculable, and the interests of 55,000,000 of people. Our country -is rich and prosperous, and the treasury is fairly bursting with the -money we have saved. Every year we put away in its vaults $100,000,000, -for which we have no present use. Our resources in metal in the ore, -and in everything connected with the material of ship building and gun -building is almost beyond comparison with any other country. With one -year’s surplus of revenue we could build a navy that would cause the -most powerful nations to fear and respect us, and which would be the -surest harbinger of peace. But our people are beginning in a slow way -to realize that we need a reorganization of the navy, and Congress has -appropriated the money for the building of four new vessels. These are -to be of steel, and are for the purpose of protecting our shipping, our -citizens abroad, and to police the seas in time of peace and to prey upon -the enemy’s commerce in time of war. They will have high speed, about -seventeen miles an hour, and (if Congress appropriates the money) they -will have high-power modern rifle guns which will compare favorably with -the guns of similar size of other nations. But they will not be _battle_ -ships, nor coast defense ships. Their sides will be about ten-sixteenths -of an inch thick, and, although of steel, that thickness will not resist -a shot from a high-powered rifle gun. These four vessels have been named -the “Chicago,” “Boston,” “Atlanta” and “Dolphin.” The “Dolphin” is now -afloat, having been launched Saturday, April 12th, at Chester, Pa., at -the works of John Roach & Co. The same firm is building the other three -new vessels. They will all be finished one year from now. The guns for -the armament are being constructed, some at the Washington Arsenal, some -at Cold Springs, N. Y., and some at South Boston, Mass. They are all to -be of steel, and this metal, which is used throughout in the construction -of the ships and guns, if possible is to be manufactured in the United -States, however, it may be necessary to send to England for the tubes for -the larger sized guns. The building of these vessels and guns has given -an impetus to the steel industry in our country and has been the means -of giving employment and experience to our mechanics, which almost alone -repays for the outlay in money. - -Building ships and guns in our own country, and of our own metal, and -with our own workmen, increases our resources just so much, and adds just -so much to our war strength; and adds just so much, too, to the interest -the people of the country take in their defenses, in their navy. The -employment affects thousands of families; not only are the ship builder, -the gun constructor and the skilled mechanics employed by them benefited, -but the miners, and all those engaged in transporting the ore and the -coal from the mines to the workshops, and _their_ families are benefited. -We have grown to be a great manufacturing country, and the skill and -ingenuity of our mechanics in the manufacture of some articles are -recognized by all. Many of our manufactured articles are in use in every -part of the world. We are unrivaled in our labor-saving machines, because -it requires, to think out and invent the sewing machine, the agricultural -machine, etc., etc., something which the mechanics of other countries do -not possess, superior mental ability, due to our free institutions and -general education. Here is a field for our mechanics, _the manufacture of -all war material_. Why should not _we_, instead of Mr. Krupp, supply the -world with guns? Why should not _we_, instead of Mr. Yarrow, of England, -supply the world with torpedo-boats, etc., etc.? - -We have supplied other nations with muskets; an American invented the gun -which fires a hailstorm of 1,200 bullets per minute, and which bears his -name, the Gatling gun; and our fellow countryman is supplying the world -with revolving cannon, but _not_ from the United States. Every one of -our manufacturing industries has been assisted by the government by high -tariff on similar articles of foreign manufacture. But that would not be -the kind of assistance the manufacture of war material would need to boom -it along. All that would be necessary for the government to do for that -industry is to accept and adopt such articles for the use of our army and -navy as are proved to be valuable, and to provide itself liberally with -them, and cease doing as it did with the Hotchkiss gun, purchase one or -two, and drive the inventor to a foreign land, where his invention is -better appreciated. - -It is humiliating to every patriotic man and to every mechanic in our -land, and a disgrace to the American people that we, a manufacturing -country, a country full of mechanical genius, a country full of iron ore -and of coal, a rich country, should go to other nations to buy steel -plates to use as armor for our monitors, and steel for the tubes of our -guns. That is what we have recently done, and the “Alert” is now bringing -us some steel plates made in England. Why should not our manufacturers -get the large profit there is in the manufacture of weapons of war? All -they need is a little encouragement from the government, and orders would -soon come in from foreign governments, for it can not be doubted that -our superior mechanics in a very short time would produce a superior -style of weapon. There is at present no demand by our government for -such articles, while in England there is _constant_ demand for them; -our mechanics are inexperienced, and governments which have a need for -such material, and which _do_ prepare for war in time of peace, purchase -from those skilled and experienced in their make. Our government, by -encouraging such an industry, would be but providing itself with the best -of weapons, and would be putting the country in a secure state of defense. - -Germany, ten years ago, adopted a scheme for the improvement of her navy, -which before that time was of little consequence, and part of the policy -was, to build her own armor-clads, and everything pertaining to the navy -in her own country, and she has so far succeeded that her navy, though -not the largest, is one of the _best_ in the world, and was all created -by her own people, and at a small annual expenditure. Now, the private -dock-yards in Germany that build some of the new ships of the navy are -building war vessels for other countries. It is unnecessary to say that -Germany’s wealth and natural resources are not nearly as great as our own. - -At the opening of Congress in 1872, the President, in his message, called -attention to this subject in the following few but apt and unequivocal -words: - - I can not too strongly urge upon you my conviction that - every consideration of national safety, _economy_, and honor - imperatively demands a thorough rehabilitation of our navy. - - With a full appreciation of the fact that compliance with the - suggestions of the head of the Department and of the advisory - board must involve a large expenditure of the public money, I - earnestly recommend such appropriation as will accomplish an end - which seems to me so desirable. - - Nothing can be more inconsistent with true public economy than - withholding the means necessary to accomplish the object intended - by the constitution to the national legislature. One of these - objects, and one which is of paramount importance, is declared by - our fundamental law to be the provision for the “common defense.” - Surely nothing is more essential to the defense of the United - States, and of _all_ our people than the efficiency of our navy. - - We have for many years maintained with foreign governments the - relations of honorable peace, and that such relations may be - permanent is desired by every patriotic citizen of the republic. - - But if we heed the teachings of history we shall not forget that - in the life of _every_ nation emergencies may arise when a resort - to arms can alone save it from dishonor. - -The Secretary of the Navy commences his annual report for the same year -with this earnest appeal in behalf of the navy: - - The condition of the navy imperatively demands the prompt and - earnest attention of Congress. Unless some action be had in its - behalf it must soon dwindle into insignificance. From such a - state it would be difficult to revive it into efficiency without - dangerous delay and _enormous expense_. Emergencies may at any - moment arise which would render its aid indispensable to the - protection of the lives and property of our citizens abroad and - at home, and even to our existence as a nation.… The mercantile - interests of our country have extended themselves over all - quarters of the globe. Our citizens engaged in commerce with - foreign nations look to the navy for the supervisory protection - of their persons and property. Calls are made upon the Department - to send vessels into different parts of the world, in order - to prevent threatened aggression upon the rights of American - citizens and shield them in time of civil commotion in foreign - lands, from insult or personal indignity. It is to be deplored - that in many such instances it has proved impossible to respond - to these calls, from the want of a sufficient number of vessels. - - These things ought not to be. While the navy should not be large, - it should _at all times_ afford a nucleus for its enlargement - upon an emergency. Its power of prompt and extended expansion - should be established. It should be sufficiently powerful to - assure the navigator that in whatsoever sea he shall sail his - ship he is protected by the stars and stripes of his country. - -Notwithstanding such messages from the highest authority in our land, -only _some_ of the money necessary to build four new cruisers has been -appropriated by Congress. Our people must instruct their representatives -in Congress to provide them with the means to put them and their -country in a secure state of defense, else that body, composed of many -politicians and few statesmen, will never show that they have any other -welfare at heart than their own reëlection, and the getting or retaining -of their party in power. - - - - -THE COMING SUMMER MEETINGS AT CHAUTAUQUA. - - -The advance number of the _Assembly Herald_ for 1884, already in -the hands of many of our readers, contains a well arranged, though -necessarily condensed, program of the exercises for July and August at -this well known and increasingly popular summer resort. The tens of -thousands who expect both pleasure and profit from spending part of -the season there, will be glad to have some notice beforehand of the -rich things in preparation for them. For our friends who have already -acquaintance with the place and the persons who have brought it into such -favorable notice, it is enough to say, there is, in the schedule before -us, unmistakable evidence that the motto of those in the management of -Chautauqua is still _Excelsior_. The attractions of the place itself -have by manifold improvements been constantly increasing. Means have not -been wanting, and their outlay has been generous—science and art, under -skillful direction, have done much, never to mar the beauties of nature, -but rather to unveil features of exquisite loveliness that were partially -concealed. The grandeur of the noble forest trees that tower above the -neat cottages is even more majestic since the occasional openings show -them to better advantage, and afford glimpses of the cerulean vault, -or floating clouds against which they seem to thrust their branches. -The native flora, of great richness, has, whenever practicable, been -protected, while many carefully tended exotics display their modest -beauty or shed sweet fragrance on the air. The little patches of lawn -are becoming more beautiful, and the larger one extending from the hotel -Athenæum to the lake, is arranged with taste, and kept in fine condition. -The hotel itself is very commodious, furnished and kept in the best -style. From its spacious verandas there is a delightful view of the lake -and the landscapes adjacent to it. There are accommodations for about -five hundred guests, who at moderate cost can, if they will, enjoy all -the conveniences, comforts and luxuries furnished at the best hotels in -the large cities. - -The places for all public meetings, concerts and class lectures are in -good order, and many interesting and valuable additions have been made -to the museum, among which are mentioned a cast of the arch of Titus; -several new statuettes, just received from the British Museum; also casts -of the Siloam inscriptions, and of the Moabite stone. Much valuable -information may be gathered, as well as a pleasant recreation enjoyed -in the museum. The grounds and principal buildings are provided with -electric lights, so that there is no groping around in the dark, as was -the case at our first visits to “The Fair Point,” as the retreat was then -called. - -But “Chautauqua” has a meaning far beyond what belongs to the place, -charming as the site is, and beyond the material improvements that -have been made. It is often, and not inaptly, spoken of as an “idea,” -a thought or conception of a desired object, and the way to reach it. -The thought, however vague at first, had life and power in it, took -form, and was cherished till a new system was evolved—one that at first -proposed more complete normal instruction and thorough preparation for -Sunday-school work. But the _idea_ soon so expanded as to take in -everything pertaining to the proper development and culture of human -beings. From the first inception of this grand work that, in eleven -years, has extended into every state in the Union, and influenced many -kindred educational enterprises, there has been no standing still. -The idea having thorough possession of the minds that entertained it, -“progress” has been the watchword, and, fortunately, the management has -been in such competent hands that the advance movements have always -been in the right direction. The trustees and other business officers -have approved themselves as wise counselors, and been liberal in their -personal sacrifices of the time and means necessary to forward the -enterprise, while the Superintendent of Instruction and President of -the association have demonstrated to all their rare qualifications for -the responsible positions they occupy. With faith in the enterprise, a -worthy object in view, and the resolute purpose to accomplish it, all -obstacles have been overcome, and a marvelous fertility of invention -shown in the methods adopted. It is not too much to say that all the -important measures proposed and adopted have been found both practicable -and useful. Skilled architects have wrought in the Assembly, but their -united efforts did not make it. Chautauqua, as it is to-day, confessedly -far surpassing the most sanguine hopes of its founders, was never made. -It was born and grew. It has vital elements; and whereunto it may yet -grow, no one can tell. It is already, though in its youth, a university -in fact, as well as by the charter obtained from the legislature. It -employs some thirty or more able professors, selected because of their -known ability and success as teachers in the several departments to which -they are assigned. - -We take note of a few things in their order: - -_The Teachers’ Retreat_, under the personal direction of some of the -foremost educators of the age, will open July 12. It is specially for the -benefit of secular teachers, and a large number of them are interested -in it. The time thus spent in counsel and delightful social intercourse, -without interfering with the needed rest, recreations and pleasures of -the summer vacation, will lead to a higher appreciation of their work, -with a knowledge of the best methods of accomplishing it, and make their -return to the school room a delight. - -_The Chautauqua School of Languages_ includes Hebrew, Greek, -Latin, French, German, Spanish and English. This school is not for -undergraduates alone, as the instruction is given in a way to illustrate -the best methods of teaching. Students, if prepared, may profitably -pursue the study of several languages at the same time, but are not -registered as beginning more than one. As all having experience in the -matter know, much depends on starting right, and any one, of fair ability -and a firm purpose, with the help and direction furnished at Chautauqua, -can, in due time, become an accomplished and thorough linguist. - -_The School of Theology_, J. H. Vincent, D.D., President, is to commence -its first session July 12. It will be an attraction to many. The studies -and topics for discussion, we see, are arranged not alone for beginners, -but to allure ministers of experience to review first principles, and -extend their acquaintance with truths that the wisest know but in part. - -_The School of Elocution_—open from July 12th to the 25th—will be in -charge of Prof. Cummock, a gentleman of culture, and thoroughly fitted -for his position. Too many offer themselves to read and speak in public -who know almost nothing of English phonation, and were never trained to -pronounce the language distinctly and forcibly. If two-thirds of the -average clergymen of the country, who are not wanting in ability, could -be persuaded to seek, in their summer vacations, such instructions in -voice culture and manner, as are now offered them, it would add much to -their present efficiency, and make the Sabbath services a delight to -their hearers. - -_The Sunday-School Normal Department_ retains its prominent place in the -program, and the managers have made a wise selection of the persons to -whom the work is committed. - -_Chautauqua Music_, both instrumental and vocal, has always been of a -high order, and a source of much pleasure to those in attendance. From -the grand organ, chorus choir, Tennesseeans, skillful directors and -distinguished soloists that are promised, we may expect special richness -in that part of the feast of fat things. - -The lectures in the Amphitheater and Hall of Philosophy will be by men of -acknowledged ability, equal to the best that have been on the platform -before them. By such men to such audiences no second rate productions -will be presented. - -Recreations are recognized as desirable, and provided for—such as will -please all and injure none. Nothing innocent and elevating is forbidden. -Those who enjoy good society, and the friendly intercourse of cultured -people, find that at the Assembly in the grove thoroughly refining -influences are prevalent, and seem never to tire of praising the resort. - -Although some imitations have been attempted, the original Chautauqua is -unrivaled, the cheapest, most accessible, and for many reasons the most -enjoyable summer resort in all the land. If you are a stranger, get the -program as published in the _Assembly Herald_, study it, and in due time -report in person on the ground. You will then know, and unless different -from most well disposed persons, you will not need a second invitation to -come. - - - - -GOING TO EUROPE. - - -Stowed away among the cherished plans of most people is generally a -European trip. Sometimes the plan is vague, to be sure. Sometimes the -probabilities are that it will never in the world be carried out. However -that may be, it is a good thing for which to plan. Learning something -about the conditions and details of European traveling gives not a little -of the relish of the actual trip, and a preparatory journey on paper does -much to educate us to travel—as important a training, by the way, as -traveling. - -The value of this practice was admirably illustrated last summer at -Chautauqua by Dr. Vincent, in his introduction to the first tourist’s -trip beyond the sea. He said: - - When I was a boy I took a trip to Europe without leaving home. I - imagined myself traveling all over the continent of Europe, going - to Egypt and Palestine. I cut out a lot of paper and gave it - value as money, foreign money and American money, and every once - in a while I would take it up and imagine it covering the expense - of the trip. I would read a little, and imagine myself going - almost everywhere. I said to myself: “If I can ever go to Europe - I shall certainly go,” and I went. - - I have often said to myself, if I were a teacher, knowing the - power of the imagination over children, I would take my school on - a trip to Europe, and when they grew weary with the recitations - and of the monotonous tasks or other routine of school life, I - would say: “Now let us have a bit of fun, let us go to Europe.” - I have thought of how much geography, history and architecture I - could bring out on a trip to Europe! What demand there would be - all the while for the knowledge of arithmetic! How many things - I could teach a lot of youngsters in the average school room in - the way of an imaginary trip to Europe that should last several - weeks or months! And what an opportunity we have, what facilities - we have for the furtherance of a scheme like this, in the - photographs, the engravings and books of travel, and all sorts of - things that abound everywhere, by which little people might go - with you, and be glad all the while they went, and learn all the - more because they were glad. - - And then how much more intelligent the traveler would be in - his maturer years! Men and women who imagine themselves going - to Europe become much more intelligent observers on a trip to - Europe. It pays double value to them. - -Imaginary trips beyond the sea may teach two very important things: How -to travel and how to observe. It is impossible for a novice to make a -European trip with the ease with which one would journey about the -United States. One must encounter strange customs, trying climates, new -languages, endless interesting sights. He will be on the verge of losing -his baggage, dire calamity! he will have his trunk ransacked, he will be -charged extra for over-weight, he will have to wait and fight and worry -his way unless fortified by a knowledge of what he must go through with, -and of how to act under all circumstances. He will miss much that he -wants to see, and see much in which he is not particularly interested, -unless his trip is thoroughly planned and he knows accurately what he is -going to see and where to go to see it. - -To study up for a European trip begin with your pocket-book, and ask, -“Can I afford it?” The voyage is of course the first item. The different -lines which cross the Atlantic—no less than twelve in number—are very -nearly uniform in their charges, in their accommodations, and in their -provisions for the safety of their passengers. A first-class passage over -and back may be put at $140, but as steerage passenger one may go for -about $60. The expense of traveling in Europe varies with the caution, -tastes and habits of the person. Supposing that you are willing to walk -much, to go to second-class hotels, to ride in second or third-class -carriages, and take very little luggage, you may make your trip for from -$2 to $3 per day, and in that way, too, you have the advantage of seeing -and hearing very much that the more expensive and, in consequence, more -exclusive style of traveling denies. More than half of the unpleasantness -of traveling second-class in Europe is in the disagreeable sound of the -word “second-class.” On the Continent the associations of the third-class -carriage are by no means unpleasant—nearly all students and many -professional men travel in that way. It is, too, the only way in which to -come in contact with the people and study their habits: - -First-class traveling may be estimated at about $7 per day in Great -Britain, and $6 on the Continent. The items which must be added to the -usual hotel expenses and car and carriage rates consist largely of fees -to servants in the hotels and restaurants, and to the guards, porters -and guides that seem to be essential to each traveler. It is said that -many servants on the Continent receive no wages except the fees from -travelers. It is not strange then that the result is that in order to -receive any respectable attention one must pay often and liberally. A -not inconsiderable part of the day’s expense is the little fee which is -required at the gate of churches, castles, museums, parks, and where-not. - -It may be roughly estimated that a tour of three months through England, -Scotland, France, Germany, Holland and Italy can be made for $650. Of -course this is making no allowance for purchases, which latter, it is -well to warn lovers of bric-a-brac, are a continual snare to pocket-books -and incumbrance to luggage. - -If you can afford the trip, then pack your trunk. Apropos of this -operation it is well to remember that much luggage is a continual -annoyance and expense. In France you can carry but fifty-five pounds -free; for all over that amount you must pay. On the railways of Germany, -Holland, Italy and Switzerland no luggage, as a rule, is free. The -truth is, you must submit to expense and trouble for every vestige over -what you can carry in your hand. A sorry outlook for Americans, who -are accustomed to the generous outfit which our capacious “Saratogas” -allow. The useful little “steamer trunks,” about twenty-five inches in -length, eighteen in width and fourteen deep, hold considerable property -if they be well packed, and one can easily arrange to leave all the ocean -paraphernalia, including the steamer chairs—a _sine qua non_ to ocean -travel, by the way—at the port of landing, until their return. Perhaps -the best plan is to take only necessary clothing—very little finery and -all the small conveniences which are requisite for comfortable living at -home. A very useful and formerly essential part of your outfit will be -your passport. Although not now absolutely necessary, except in Russia -and Portugal, it is a very convenient document, as it secures many -privileges to its possessor. It does seem strange to be obliged to carry -a paper testifying that you are yourself but in the masses of humanity -which throng Europe it is not surprising that it is sometimes necessary -to be identified. In the United States the Secretary of State has the -power of granting passports. In order to procure one an affidavit of -citizenship, with papers of naturalization, if a naturalized citizen, -must be forwarded. This must be accompanied by the affidavit of a -witness, and an oath of allegiance to the United States, all these duly -made and sworn before a justice of the peace. With these go a description -of your person, in which your age is given, your height, the color of -your eyes and hair, the size of your nose and mouth, the length of your -chin, your complexion and the shape of face. - -On reaching Europe it will be necessary to secure the indorsement, -or _visa_, as it is called, of the American minister, or consul, and -afterward of the minister of the country to be visited. The last item of -business to worry you before you leave is to put your funds into a shape -in which you will have no trouble. The “letter of credit” is undoubtedly -the favorite method, as by it any amount may be drawn at almost any -place a tourist will visit. Several banking houses of New York furnish -them. Napoleons are current in all parts of the Continent, and English -sovereigns pass in Belgium, Holland and Germany. _Circular notes_ of from -£10 to £20 and upward may be obtained and are available throughout Europe. - -These matters arranged, there is a much more important one to occupy your -attention—to plan your trip. The indefinite purpose of tourists, their -hap hazard efforts to see everything, involves them too often in a jumble -of misconnections, lost days, out-of-the-way trips, and unnecessary -expense, where a careful arrangement of their plan beforehand would have -saved them time, trouble and money. Plan your trip. If you can go for -but six weeks or three months, do not try to see all Europe and part of -Asia in that time. Be content to “do” thoroughly a smaller territory, -and be assured that you will be the gainer. It is well to invest in a -guide-book—a stout, latest edition, reliable guide-book—Harper’s or -Appleton’s is best—and select your trip. Decide exactly where you want to -go, and what you want to see. If you are interested in paintings, prepare -an outline of the European schools of painting, with the examples of each -that will be found on your route. Put down on your chart the subjects of -these pictures, and an outline history of the artists. Thus equipped you -can study and enjoy the work without wasting time in learning historical -details. It is wise to know something of the history of each locality -which you visit, to be familiar with the palaces, cathedrals and museums -of the cities, and the government, customs and employments of the people. -Nor is it at all difficult to learn these things. Books of travels, -delightful magazine papers, newspaper letters teem with information which -can all be utilized on an imaginary European trip. It would be wiser -if many people who spend much time in acquiring a slight smattering of -French, German and Italian in order to make their way understandingly -on the Continent would let the language go and study the countries, -their cities and their people. Better, because English is spoken at -all the leading European hotels and by most guides, and at nearly all -points interpreters may be found to assist in making any necessary -arrangements. Of course the greatest amount of good can only be gained by -one commanding the languages, but where there must be a choice between a -smattering of them and general information on what one is about to see, -by all means choose the latter. - - * * * * * - -Through the whole course of life it is right to hold, and to have held -in a preëminent degree, the kindest language toward our parents, because -there is the heaviest punishment for light and winged words; for Nemesis, -the messenger of Justice, has been appointed to look after all men in -such matters.—_Plato._ - - - - -C. L. S. C. WORK. - -By Rev. J. H. VINCENT, D. D., SUPERINTENDENT OF INSTRUCTION. - - -July is one of the C. L. S. C. vacation months. - - * * * * * - -“Memorial Day,” Sunday, July 13. Read Paul’s wonderful words about -“Charity” in 1st Corinthians, xiii. - - * * * * * - -Salutations—sincere and abundant—to all the members of the Circle who -have opportunity this month of meeting in the green woods or by the -lake-side at one of the “Summer Assemblies.” Hold “Round-Tables.” Talk -and plan, and then report the new things you think of. If you can not go -to any of the great Assemblies, hold a comfortable little “C. L. S. C. -Grove-Rest” or “Go-to-the-Grove” picnic in your own neighborhood. One -such humble gathering may be the seed of a grand Assembly one of these -days. - - * * * * * - -A member of the class of ’87 asks concerning the mountain known as -Quarantania. This is a high bluff on the west of the Jordan, near the -north end of the Dead Sea, and believed to be the Mountain of Temptation. - - * * * * * - -“Hand Book of Abbreviations and Contractions, current, classical and -mediæval; also of secret, benevolent, and other organizations, legal -works of the United States and Great Britain, and of the Railroads of the -American Continent.” By the Rt. Rev. Samuel Fallows, A.M., D.D. Chicago: -The Standard Book Company. - -A _multum in parvo_ for the general reader. The title fully unfolds the -character of the volume. - - * * * * * - -“A Complete Hand Book of Synonyms and Antonyms, or synonyms and words -of opposite meaning. With an appendix.” By the Rt. Rev. Samuel Fallows, -A.M., D.D. Chicago: The Standard Book Company. - -This compact, neatly printed, well-bound volume is one of the most -valuable of the “Standard Hand-Book Series,” edited by Bishop Fallows, -of Chicago. For the English reader or writer desiring carefully to -discriminate between words and phrases, anxious to use language most -appropriately, we know of no single volume equaling this hand-book for -utility and general adaptation to his needs. - - * * * * * - -To a member of the circle who is really a very large-hearted and noble -man, as I have since found him, but who is “decidedly opposed to teaching -religious truths in schools of any kind,” and who objects to being -required to read the “Philosophy of the Plan of Salvation,” I have made -the following reply, which I insert here, as it may meet similar cases: - -_My Dear Sir_:—Your letter of December 27 is before me. We have provided -a college outlook, a college outlook which touches every department -in the realm of culture. We give a bird’s eye view of this vast world -which appeals to every faculty of the soul. We touch the physical man, -the physical world in which he lives, above among stars, below among -stones, about among plants and animals. We study history, the history -of the earth as revealed in science, the history of man as unfolded in -the traditions and records of the race. We study political and social -economy. We also study somewhat (to a very limited degree) the phenomena -and laws of man’s moral and spiritual being. _It would be a strange -course of study that ignored faculties as real, as universal, and as -persistent in their operations as the religious faculties._ We avoid -scrupulously everything that tends to the promotion of sectarianism in -thought or spirit, but we believe in that profound philosophy, which all -leading educators of life have recognized, that “the fear of the Lord -is the beginning of wisdom.” A culture of muscle alone is a one-sided -culture. The culture of the reason alone is equally one-sided. A culture -of memory alone is folly. The true culture is a culture of body, mind -and heart, the soul in its entirety, with its many-sided relations to -the truths which belong to those relations: God, neighbor, home, life, -nation, time, eternity. The C. L. S. C. would indeed be a most narrow -and bigoted thing if it were to refuse attention to the religious world. -Now concerning Dr. Walker’s work on “The Plan of Salvation,” the name is, -I confess, quite misleading. It is a book written forty years ago, by -one of the ablest intellects of America. No American religious book has -had a wider circulation. It is profoundly philosophical, and it gives a -most original view of the old Jewish history; and a man’s education who -calls himself an infidel is incomplete without reading that book. There -is not the slightest tinge of sectarianism about it. It is a vigorous -classic which every student of the English tongue should read. Hundreds -of our readers, who are not members of any evangelical church, and who -are skeptical in their tendency, have read the book with great delight, -and though prejudiced somewhat against the title, have given words of -testimony to its wonderful power as a literary production, to say nothing -about the vigor of its arguments. You say you “find sermons in stones, -and _good in everything_.” Can you not, _if you find good in everything, -find good in a philosophical book written by a mighty intellect, -acknowledged by the scholars of the past forty years_? “The Plan of -Salvation” is not a discussion of the way a soul is to be saved. It is -a discussion of the philosophy underlying the biblical history. You can -not afford not to read it, even if you decline to prosecute our course -of study. I am a little surprised that a broad man should be “decidedly -opposed to teaching religious truths in schools of any kind.” What would -a culture be that ignored the religious? One of the strongest arguments -that I ever read in favor of the Bible as a text-book for study, was -written by Huxley, who pleaded fervently for it as _a book for study in -every secular school_. I do not “compel” you to read Walker’s book; I do -not say you MUST buy the book. You may read any book on any phase of the -question, Roman or Protestant, according to the tendency of your faith. -_Something_ on that line you must read to complete our broad survey. - - - - -THE C. L. S. C. COURSE FOR 1884-’85. - - -Beginner’s Hand Book in Chemistry, Prof. Appleton. - -Scientific Readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN: “The Circle of the Sciences;” -“Huxley on Science;” “Home Studies in Chemistry,” by Prof. J. T. Edwards; -“Easy Lessons in Animal Biology,” Dr. J. H. Wythe; “The Temperance -Teachings of Science;” “Studies in Kitchen Science and Art.” - - * * * * * - -Barnes’s “Brief History of Greece.”[A] - -“Preparatory Greek Course in English;”[B] Wilkinson. - -“College Greek Course in English;” Wilkinson. - -Chautauqua Text-Book No. 5, “Greek History;”[A] Vincent. - -“Cyrus and Alexander;” Abbott. - -Historical Readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN: “Ancient Life in Greece;” “Greek -Mythology.” - - * * * * * - -“The Art of Speech,” volume one; Dr. L. T. Townsend. - -General Readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN: “Talks About Good English.” - - * * * * * - -“The Character of Jesus;” Horace Bushnell. - -“How to Help the Poor;” Mrs. James T. Field. - -“History of the Reformation;” Bishop J. F. Hurst. - -Sunday Readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - - * * * * * - -Readings in _Our Alma Mater_:[C] “Lessons in Every-Day Speech,” Prof. W. -D. MacClintock; “Lessons in Household Decoration,” Miss Susan Hayes Ward; -“Lessons in Self-Discipline—Memory, Thinking, Selection of Books,” etc. -Official Communications to Members.[D] - -[A] Not to be read by the classes of ’85, ’86 and ’87. - -[B] Not to be read by the classes of ’85 and ’86. - -[C] The _Alma Mater_ is sent free to all members of the C. L. S. C. who -are recorded at Plainfield, N. J., and whose annual fee is paid. - -[D] To recorded members several other valuable documents are forwarded -without additional expense. - - - - -LOCAL CIRCLES. - - -If we change our order this month and begin the gossip from our letters -with the “University Circle,” of =San José, Cal.=, it is only because -we wish to call particular attention to the thrifty growth of our work -on the Pacific coast. Mrs. Fields, the competent secretary of that -branch, sends us this pleasant report of the San José work: “Colleges -and universities are no longer confined to the east. They spring up -like Jonah’s gourd with the westward moving star of empire, and are -only checked by the setting of that star in the great western ocean. -California boasts of its grand State University at Berkeley, which she -thinks rivals Harvard and Ann Arbor, and we of San José point to our -university with its commodious buildings, its noble president, Dr. C. -C. Stratton (widely known also as president of our Pacific Coast C. L. -S. C.), its excellent faculty, and hundreds of earnest students, and -feel that it is an institution of which any city or state might well be -proud. In the shadow of this university there very naturally has arisen a -Chautauqua circle. There are no unfriendly comparisons and inhospitable -exclusiveness, no neighborhood jealousies or rivalries between ‘the -University of the Pacific’ and that little branch of the great ‘People’s -University,’ known as the ‘University Circle.’ Two of the oldest and -most honored professors in the former institution, together with all the -ladies of the faculty, are members of the circle. They freely give their -time and genial presence to the semi-monthly meetings of the C. L. S. -C. whenever it is possible for them to do so, and by their wide range -of knowledge add greatly to the interest and profit of these occasions. -The rest of the members of the University Circle are neighbors and -friends who are greatly interested in the reading, and who believe in -the value of association and mutual helpfulness. They are mostly middle -aged people, though there is a sprinkling of gray hairs on some brows, -and here and there is a bright young face. They count twenty when all -told, and usually have a good representation present. The meetings are -held in the different homes, so that to each falls his allotment of these -hospitable pleasures. One evening there was ‘a chiel amang ’em takin’ -notes,’ who felt sure that this University Circle ought to let its light -shine for the benefit of the whole Chautauqua family, and these notes -are herewith presented: ‘Eighteen Chautauquans present in the cheerful -double parlors of Mrs. G. A gentle-faced member of the Society of Friends -presided, and illumined the circle with her beaming smile and her bright, -suggestive leadership. The members recited from slips of paper, each -naming a theme numbered in the order of their occurrence in the lesson, -and distributed previously among the class. Each person, while studying -the whole lesson carefully, had made special preparation on his or her -own topic. This brought a great deal of careful research and fresh -thought to bear on the lesson, and every one seemed thoroughly prepared, -from the tall, scholarly Prof. M., with his slight, professional stoop, -arising from a long habit of digging among Greek roots, down to the -bright young girl who had brought her fine new classical atlas and was -ready to point out all localities and routes of travel named in the -lesson. The various themes were taken up in order, eliciting considerable -discussion, bits of comment and remark, with ever and anon a seed-thought -of spiritual application from the gentle Quakeress. If THE CHAUTAUQUAN -were not crowded with good things this report might be made of indefinite -length, but it shall be brought to a speedy close. It needs not to be -added that the onlooker went away saying: How beautiful, how rational, -how Christian a method of spending an evening! Who can estimate the -power for good which such a circle exerts upon its members and upon the -community which is so fortunate as to possess it!’” - -An interesting plan has just been carried out by the =Montreal, Canada=, -circle. They have held an open meeting, where a _resumé_ of the winter’s -work was given by the president, and the objects of the society were -explained for the benefit of outsiders. An admirable plan, we should -think it would prove. A _resumé_ of one winter’s work in the C. L. S. -C. must impress a candid person of the genuine merit in the scheme, and -necessarily would enlarge the borders of the Circle’s influence. They -do things well in Canada. That famous Toronto Central Circle impresses -this truth upon us afresh each time we receive a report from them. This -month they send an admirable program of their regular monthly meeting, at -which, in addition to a lecture by Prof. Hutton, of University College, -on “Phases of Roman Life and Literature with some Modern Analogies,” -reports from local circles were called for, a Round-Table conference on -the work was held, and a half hour was spent in singing Chautauqua songs, -every one who could sing being specially invited to come and join. - -The C. L. S. C. movement has reached the beautiful village of -=Strondwater=, near Portland, =Maine=, where they have a small but -enthusiastic circle of seven members. Their weekly meetings are pleasant -and profitable, and they enjoy to the utmost their studies in Greek and -Roman History and Literature. From the neighboring state of New Hampshire -is reported the “Parker’s Falls Circle” of =Newmarket=, another “little -pentagon of ladies” holding occasional meetings, conducted on the -conversational plan. They write that they are so situated that they can -not well have regular meetings, but all enjoy the course, and hold fast -to the motto, “Do not be discouraged.” - -In October of 1883 the “Longfellow Circle” was organized at =North -Cambridge, Mass.= From their report we find that they have over twenty -members, whose exercises are varied to avoid monotony. A committee of -three arrange a program for each month, which is printed by hectograph -and circulated among the members. They have observed the memorial days -of Longfellow, Shakspere and Addison, and find their meetings very -interesting. - -At =West Newton, Mass.=, where there is a flourishing circle of forty -who show a great deal of interest and pride in the work, Shakspere’s day -was observed with a very interesting program, in which we are pleased to -notice that tableaux took a prominent part. This circle sends us word -that this is their first year’s experience with a local circle, but that -they have enjoyed it so much that they will certainly continue it again -another winter. - -From =Chelsea, Mass.=, is a suggestive account of the origin of their -circle: “In 1880 three members of one family heard of the C. L. S. C. and -immediately seized the idea and joined the class of 1884. In the fall of -1882 they discovered that an elderly lady of their church had been to -Chautauqua that year, and was also an ’84 member, full of enthusiasm. -In 1883 three of their group enjoyed Framingham from beginning to end, -while the fourth spent the season again at Chautauqua. Result—in October, -1883, was organized the ‘Mt. Bellingham Local Circle,’ with fourteen -live members, among whom are the four irrepressibles, of ’85, while the -rest are proud of belonging to the ‘Pansy Class.’ We have just become -acquainted with a sister circle of some ten members connected with the -Central Congregational Church, and have enjoyed an evening together. -We meet on the first Monday and third Wednesday of each month, while -the ‘Pansy Circle’ meets fortnightly on Monday evening. This gives us a -chance to make visits without interfering with the regular work of either -circle.” - -At =Shirley, Mass.=, a circle was organized in December, 1883, with -a membership of seven. Much interest is felt, and the meetings are -thoroughly enjoyed. - -From historic =Plymouth, Mass.=, the secretary of the “Plymouth Rock -Circle” writes: “Having been very quiet and studious the past winter, and -not having increased in numbers, we thought it best to invite some of our -friends to a Chautauqua supper. Accordingly, on the evening of May 12 -quite a goodly number entered the prettily decorated Grand Army Hall, -and were soon seated at the well filled tables. The supper seemed to be -enjoyed, also the program which followed. Some of our guests were so well -pleased that they think of becoming members of the class of ’88.” - -The tide of Chautauqua enthusiasm reached =Brighton, Mass.=, last fall, -and on October 8, 1883, a local circle was organized. It was called the -“Union Circle of Brighton and Allston,” as the members come from both -places. At the meetings of the circle they review the readings of the -intervening two weeks, and for that purpose questions are prepared on -the different subjects by the members. The circle is composed of eleven -members, one of whom is vice president of the class of ’87 of the New -England Branch of the C. L. S. C. - -At =Lawrence, Mass.=, the circle is doing excellent work. Prof. Richards -gave them three lectures in November, and Rev. W. F. Crofts another -January 21. The Round-Tables have been well attended and thoroughly -appreciated. The circle laments the loss of one of their members, Mrs. C. -E. Daniels, a devoted Christian and an enthusiastic worker in the C. L. -S. C., who sailed with her son on the ill-fated “City of Columbus.” Her -place can not be easily filled, and her sad fate has cast a gloom over a -large circle of relatives and friends. - -From =Gloucester, Mass.=, a member writes: “We are still alive as a -circle and at work. We feel that the true C. L. S. C. spirit is here. We -meet once a month and study unitedly sections of the month’s readings. We -have found this year’s course more in accordance with our need than any -previous year’s. We number not quite a dozen regular members, all of whom -expect to forward their memoranda by July 1.” - -The “Vincent Circle,” of =Troy, N. Y.=, remembered the bard of Avon’s -day. Each member of the large circle received the neatly printed program -with this stirring call to duty attached: “Don’t fail to attend this -extra meeting. Come with true Shaksperean enthusiasm. Have a half score -of quotations on tongue’s end. Bring a friend with you, and ‘Chautauqua -Songs.’ Invite members of other circles.” - -A report comes from =Brocton, N. Y.=, one of Chautauqua’s neighbors, -of the really remarkable work going on there: “In our _sixth_ year of -reading in the C. L. S. C. we number twenty-five members. We have kept -up our weekly gatherings in class through the winter with a good degree -of interest, feeling that there is an influence of power in the work, -and its surroundings, which lifts us above the common level of life -into a purer and nobler atmosphere. The graduates of 1882 are formed -into a class of the ‘Hall in the Grove,’ and have most of the winter -been reading Blackburn’s ‘Church History.’ We are all hoping to live to -celebrate the Founder’s Day.” - -A very enjoyable social reunion was recently held by the circle at -=Syracuse, N. Y.= From the newspaper report we learn that there were -about one hundred and fifty past and present members of the C. L. S. C. -there. The Syracuse professors of the public schools and university have -shown great kindness to this circle. The principal of one of the schools -is at present president of the circle. Through the kindness of the Board -of Education one of the school buildings was thrown open to the club -for their reunion. We notice on the program of exercises carried out, a -humorous poem by Mrs. Frank Beard, and an address from Mr. W. A. Duncan -on “The Chautauqua Idea,” as well as several addresses by well known -Syracuse educators. - -=Prattsburgh, N. Y.=, has a circle but one year younger than that of -Brocton. They write: “Our local circle organized October 1, 1883, for -its fifth year’s work, with eighteen regular members, an increase over -former years. We have representatives in each of the six classes; one -graduate of ’82 and two of ’83 still remaining true to the local circle. -Our meetings are held weekly at the homes of the members, and though in a -measure informal, we find them both interesting and profitable.” - -In the college town of =Ithaca, N. Y.=, a circle has, of course, -splendid opportunities of getting assistance from Cornell University, -opportunities which the large circle of forty there improves. This -society spent a very interesting evening with Shakspere—the first -memorial day they have had the pleasure of celebrating. - -The =Oswego= and =Scriba, N. Y.=, circles joined in a reunion in the -spring, at which they carried out a fine program, and were served -afterward with a sumptuous repast. From =Fulton, N. Y.=, comes a very -enthusiastic report: “The ‘Lawrence’ C. L. S. C. of this village is -a flourishing and enthusiastic circle, numbering about forty regular -members, and nearly as many honorary members. It was organized in October -1883, and was the outgrowth of a small circle of eight which had been -formed the year previous. During 1883 these classes met separately, -as two distinct circles, but at the commencement of the present year -they consolidated, and now form a large class of earnest, interested -students. We have observed the memorial days, giving a short sketch of -the individual and extracts from his writings, interspersed with music. -In March we had the rare treat of listening to a lecture by Dr. Vincent, -he being one of the lecturers of our village ‘Popular Lecture Course.’ -After the lecture the Chautauquans gave him a reception, and all had the -pleasure of being personally introduced to him. He gave us an inspiring -talk upon the theme of which he never tires, and intensified our love -for this noble course, and increased our desire to do more and better -work, feeling that though it may be superficial in comparison to a -regular college course, it is elevating in its influence and character, -and enables those of us who have left youth and school days far back -in the past, to feel that we are not retrograding, but at least can be -within hailing distance of those who are fresh and thorough in the same -subjects. We have retained nearly every one of our original members, and -are constantly gaining new ones. Already can we see the influence of the -C. L. S. C. work in our thriving village in the increase of literary -societies, and a growing desire for a more solid class of reading. We -feel that the Chautauqua Idea is of heavenly birth, and have faith that -each circle is a link in a chain that will encircle the earth.” - -The “Tremont Social Circle,” of =New York City=, has been in existence -only since December, but their membership is large, and their -associations have been very pleasant. They celebrated both Longfellow’s -and Shakspere’s days; the latter with tableaux, with the admirable -supplement of a brief synopsis of the play, from which the subjects were -taken, before each piece. - -The “Spare Moment Circle” is reported this month from =New York City=. -They are finding much profit in their readings. There seems to be little -union work among the New York circles. One member writes: “We hear there -is but one other circle existing in New York City. There must be a number -of members reading alone, who would be pleased to join a local circle, -and who would, no doubt, be desirable members. Would you kindly notice in -THE CHAUTAUQUAN as early as convenient that there is a circle connected -with the Central M. E. Church, 7th Avenue and 14th Street, New York -City?” There are several New York circles and several “lone readers.” -An effort should be made by some one to hold a general reunion at which -an organization could be effected and plans laid for occasional joint -meetings. Such organizations are in successful operation in several -cities where there are a number of circles. - -New circles have been reported from =West Philadelphia= and =Sugar Grove, -Pa.= Also at =Chester, Pa.=, there is a thriving circle of between forty -and fifty members. The circle is divided into sub-circles, meeting -weekly, with a reunion of the entire circle monthly. At the weekly -meetings a regular teacher leads in the lesson, and the different members -have essays on subjects bearing on the readings. At the monthly meetings -each member contributes ten written questions on the readings of the -previous month, which are asked promiscuously by the president. Generally -there is also a lecture and music by outside talent, and the circle -has met with kindest encouragement from all outsiders. They celebrated -Longfellow and Shakspere days, each in turn. - -In the “Pansy Circle,” at =Frankford, Philadelphia=, they have wisely -made practical Mr. Blaikie’s excellent hints on getting strong, and spend -the latter part of each evening in dumb-bell drill and other gymnastic -exercises. This circle was formed last fall, and all told numbers -thirty-five members, active and local. - -The circle at =Bradford, Pa.=, is still progressing. A few of their -members have left the town, but nothing discouraged the rest are keeping -up their work. - -April 17th the Alumni Association of =Pittsburgh, Pa.=, held their annual -meeting. One of the features of the evening was a paper on “The C. L. S. -C.,” by a prominent lady member. A general survey of the aims and methods -of the organization was given, and a glance taken at the home work. The -writer stated that: “Pittsburgh has the honor of being in the advance in -adopting the new departure, the ‘Central Circle’ having been projected at -Chautauqua but a few days after the organization of the parent circle. -At the first few meetings held, more than three hundred members were -enrolled. The ‘Central Circle’ has ever since maintained more or less -healthy existence. It has proved of great service in providing a home for -such Chautauquans as were not able to attend any of the local circles. It -has also by its regular monthly meetings brought into contact members of -the different local circles, thus making them mutually helpful. Around -this original ‘Central Circle’ have grown up not a few hopeful daughters, -both in Pittsburgh and Allegheny, of which the mother organization has -just cause to be proud. Lawrenceville boasts one of the most efficient -local circles to be found anywhere. ‘South Side Circle’ is not only -prosecuting the regular course with vigor, but has recently ambitiously -attached a school of languages. The members are tugging away at Latin -roots. The ‘Emerson,’ ‘Woodlawn’ and ‘Vincent’ circles, in Allegheny, -are moving steadily forward. The ‘Allegheny Circle’ of ’87 seems to be -worthy of special mention. It is composed of twenty earnest, enthusiastic -members, who intend to graduate—ladies and gentlemen in about equal -numbers, representing occupations as various, probably, as their number -will permit. The ‘Mt. Washington Circle’ has twenty-one names enrolled -at Plainfield—seven gentlemen and fourteen ladies, residents of three -different wards, and representing five religious denominations. One -feature of membership, of which we feel somewhat proud, in which I -fear we are alone among the circles of these cities, is that we have -one member who, if permitted to finish the course, will add another to -the only too small list of graduates under twenty years of age.” The -“Allegheny Circle” of ’87, of which the writer speaks, often favors us -with programs and interesting reports. One of the latest was of their -evening with France. - -=Washington, D. C.=, gives us three breezy reports this month. A member -from the “Foundry M. E. Church Circle,” organized in 1882, writes: -“The four Chautauqua circles of this city have been doing excellent -work, and their prospect for the future grows brighter and brighter -as the Chautauqua Idea of self education becomes better known to the -people. During the existence of our societies Dr. J. H. Vincent has -paid us a number of visits, each time preaching and lecturing to large -congregations in Foundry Church. His lectures and sermons never fail to -exert a good influence, for it is a noticeable fact that each time we -are honored with his presence our circles have the greatest increase -in membership. We trust he can find it convenient to be with us more -frequently in the future. The ‘Foundry’ C. L. S. C. is the largest in -the city. The officers of the circle constitute a board of instructors; -at the meetings each instructor takes charge of but one topic. If there -remain other subjects of discussion they are distributed among individual -members so that our lessons are always very satisfactorily discussed. -After the recitations we have a literary exercise, consisting of -readings, essays, recitations, debates, etc. We always take pleasure in -observing each memorial day with an appropriate program. The C. L. S. C. -of this city is yet only in its infancy, but as its members and friends -become more enthusiastic for its success we hope to accomplish much for -it in the near future.” The second comes from the “Pansy Circle,” of -whom we have never before had the pleasure of hearing, and opens with an -excellent plan: “In addition to our weekly meetings, where we discuss the -subjects for the week’s reading, we have a monthly gathering. We began -work late in the year, so that we have had but three such. At the first, -Professor O. T. Mason, of Columbia University, gave us a lecture-talk on -Vegetable Biology, which was delightful to all. The second entertainment -was a lecture by Professor Cleveland Abbe, the scientist of the Signal -Bureau, and he selected the topic ‘Thunder Storms, and the few things -we know about them.’ He concluded an hour’s talk with a suggestion, -which he said we should hear more of later. It was to this effect: The -Signal Office needed many observers—those who were able to understand and -appreciate this work—and they had proposed to have one or more in every -county in the States. He had thought it a good idea for the Chautauquans -to be invited to do such work in connection with their studies. The -purpose expressed gave our little ‘Pansy Circle,’ although composed of -ladies, considerable pleasure, and you may hear more of this, if we do. -We spent our last monthly meeting celebrating Shakspere’s day, members of -the circle reading selections from the ‘Merchant of Venice,’ and giving -us all great enjoyment. Closed the evening with general conversation -about the great dramatist.” - -The “Meridian” Chautauqua Circle, of =Washington, D. C.=, is now in -its second year, throughout which period the interest has been great, -notwithstanding the smallness of the circle; there being nine active and -three local members. At the last weekly meeting was held the Shaksperean -celebration. The exercises consisted, in part, of a brief sketch of his -life and works, the question of their authenticity, citations of wit -and wisdom, an argument relative to the sanity of Hamlet, together with -selections from his plays. Among the decorations were sketches of his -birthplace, the desk at which he studied “Little Latine and less Greeke,” -his seal, his epitaph, and a portrait of the author. After the literary -exercises a supper was served. - -At =Sudlersville, Md.=, there is a pleasant circle of two, which sends -word that “Having for the first time observed information in the March -number of THE CHAUTAUQUAN encouraging the report of two as a local -circle, we, the ‘Eureka Circle,’ take great pleasure in reporting with -the multitude of others.” - -=Snow Hill, Md.=, claims to have the finest C. L. S. C. on the Peninsula. -“Of our twenty members one is a clergyman, two are lawyers, and six -are school teachers. The study of Biology was facilitated by the use -of a splendid microscope of 600 diameter power. We have a regular -organization, a board of officers, and after the usual preliminaries of -a formal assembly, the program. Three readers, one in each book, are -appointed, a ‘commentator’ listens to each, then epitomizes the matter, -and comments upon the manner. An examiner has been previously appointed -in each study, whose business it is to prepare five written questions; -these are thrown together and drawn by the members, who answer whatever -falls to their lot.” - -The “Bryant” C. L. S. C., of =Toledo, Ohio=, is a flourishing circle of -about twenty-five members, part of whom are “regular” and part “local.” -A lively interest has been manifested, and many warm discussions held -concerning some of the characters studied about. Addison’s day was -celebrated in a very quiet manner, at a regular meeting of the circle. - -The C. L. S. C. of the Third Presbyterian Church of =Cincinnati, Ohio=, -had an unusually pleasant meeting on April 23. Although they have been -organized for nearly two years, they have never before celebrated a -Memorial Day. We trust their pleasant experience will lead to more -frequent “special occasions” in the future. - -The celebrations of Shakspere’s and Addison’s days were combined at -=Springfield, Ohio=, and a very successful meeting was the result. This -circle was organized in 1878, and the class of ’82 are happy to read -the “White Seal Course” with the other classes, while they read the -“Crystal Seal” alone. All the Memorial Days have been observed this year, -commencing with Garfield’s and closing with Shakspere’s and Addison’s, -but they claim that their Chautauqua picnic, given annually in June, is -the jubilee of their C. L. S. C. year. - -From the _Toledo Evening Bee_ we learn that a very delightful evening -was spent by the members of the =Bryan, Ohio=, C. L. S. C., in memory -of William Shakspere. The circle here has been holding regular meetings -since October, 1881. There are now sixteen members. Among the “days” none -are more pleasant than Arbor Day. It does not receive much attention, we -fear, but here is one circle at least that planted a tree. From =Amelia, -Ohio=, a letter comes, saying: “In our little town we have a small C. L. -S. C., and as you wanted all circles reported to THE CHAUTAUQUAN, we give -ours as the ‘Elm-tree Circle.’ We are but four girls studying together, -but a circle of one hundred could not be more enthusiastic. On Arbor Day -we planted a tree and named it ‘Vincent.’ We hope that in another year we -can report a much larger circle.” - -The sixth annual reunion of the circle at =Norwalk, Ohio=, was held on -April 23. They have thirty members enrolled, and are reading the books -of the seal course in the circle, while the books in the regular course -are read at home. The exercises at their reunion were conversational -entirely. The questions of the authorship of what are known as -Shakspere’s plays, and which is Shakspere’s best play, being informally -argued until the party were summoned to supper. The circle expect to -resume their conversations another year. - -From =Cincinnati= we have an encouraging account of the good things -the circles have been enjoying there. The topics discussed at their -Round-Table are particularly good. “The second Round-Table of the C. L. -S. C. of Cincinnati and vicinity was held at Christie Chapel on April -22. An essay was read on ‘Stray Leaves from a Chautauqua Journal,’ and -one on ‘Tent Life at Chautauqua.’ Then followed some impromptu talks on -Chautauqua, and some experiences, amusing and otherwise, were related. -The second topic of the evening was ‘The advantages of the study of the -classics in the original, and as we study them in translations, in the -C. L. S. C. Course.’ The discussion of this was fully participated in -by the members, and a goodly meed of praise was given to the C. L. S. -C. Classical Course. On April 24, at the invitation of the Grace Church -Circle, the other circles were treated to a very fine lecture by their -pastor, Rev. A. L. Reynolds. His subject was, ‘The Survival of the -Fittest.’ The fifth annual reunion of the C. L. S. C. of Cincinnati and -vicinity was held at Grace M. E. Church on Friday evening, May 9. It was -a most enjoyable affair, and brought together members from some sixteen -circles in and around the city, including Cheviot, Elmwood, Madisonville, -Athens and Ironton, Ohio, and Covington and Newport in Kentucky.” - -A very delightful thing it is to have a C. L. S. C. home, a room that -belongs to your circle, where you may surround yourself with the emblems, -mottoes and banners of your brotherhood, and with the implements for -successful work. Such a home belongs to the circle of =Lima, Ind.=, of -which they write: “We have a large and handsome room for our meetings. At -present it is modestly furnished, but money is in the treasury to be used -in making the room more attractive with bright rugs, fanciful screens and -pictures.” This circle succeeded in doubling its numbers last summer -by holding a Chautauqua reception, at which the attractiveness of the -work was so well shown that no trouble was experienced in increasing the -circle. - -=Petersburg, Ind.=, reports a circle of seven members; =Rushville, Ind.=, -one of twenty-two; and =Liberty, Ind.=, one of eleven. All three are -energetic, faithful bodies, up in their readings, loyal to the customs of -the C. L. S. C., and full of enthusiasm. - -A brief history of “Alpha Circle,” of =Quincy, Ill.=, has lately been -sent us. This circle was formed in January, 1883, with thirteen members. -Eleven were added the following season. At the close of the studies in -June, 1883, a literary and musical feast was prepared at the home of -one of the members. Fifty invitations were sent out to the members and -interested friends of the circle. A public meeting was held in September, -for the purpose of explaining the objects and aims of the Circle, and -an effort was made to organize others. At least two societies resulted -from this meeting: the ‘Beta’ Circle, composed entirely of ladies; they -are great workers, and are giving the subjects very thorough attention; -beside this, a small circle has been organized in the neighboring -township—=Melrose=. The circle has had several little excursions, etc., -and spent the fourth of July most delightfully in the woods on Bredewig’s -Alps. The ‘Alpha’ and ‘Beta’ Circles joined in observing Longfellow’s -day. Seventy-five invitations were sent out to friends, and the program -was highly interesting. The meetings of the circle are very interesting. - -=Alton, Ill.=, also has a circle with a steady membership of twelve. - -On Longfellow’s day the three circles at =Sycamore, Ill.=, held a -delightful service in the poet’s honor; essays, music and recitations -made up the program. One of the circles at Sycamore reports: “Our first -meeting was held November 14, 1882, when we organized a class with twelve -members; now we have sixteen, four of whom are local members only. We -have good officers and most of our class are doing very thorough work, -though we are nearly all busy housekeepers and mothers. We grow more -and more in love with the work. We have lively and free discussions on -all topics studied, and meet every week, rain or shine.” The “Dunlap” -local circle was organized in the fall of 1883, and consists of some -thirty members, mostly of the class of ’87, but with two members who -have completed the four years’ course. Considerable enthusiasm prevails. -Each meeting has been well attended, and all who started in with the -course are steadily pursuing it. April 21 a “Shaksperean Social” was -held. A program was presented consisting of music, essays and readings. -Refreshments were served to some forty members and their friends. Every -one went home more enthusiastic Chautauquans than ever. A “Cicero” night -was recently held, and a “Virgil” night is the next on the program. - -At =Memphis, Tenn.=, the South Memphis local circle of the C. L. S. C. -is composed of fourteen active members, beside several who are only -local members. There is a good average attendance, and each one takes an -active part. The meetings are begun with roll call, followed by reading -of minutes, songs, and a full program of essays, readings, and “talks.” -These latter are really essays memorized and recited without notes. The -circle is very earnest in its work. - -A few ladies of =Prairieville Center, Mich.=, belonging to classes 1886 -and 1887, would acknowledge some of the pleasure brought into their busy -lives by Chautauqua. Last year, as a nucleus, four ladies met once a -week, read or held informal conversations on the lesson; now they are -officered and dignified by the title of the “Kepler Circle,” including -five farmers’ wives, one school teacher and one gentleman—five members, -two local. As yet they have had no help, such as observance of memorial -days or lectures, but are trying by personal influence to help on the -work. - -=Atlas, Mich.=, has a live C. L. S. C. organized in March, though -several of the members began the course in October. There are eight -regular members and ten local ones, who will probably take up the full -course next year. - -Dr. Vincent has kindly sent us a very remarkable report of the results -of the circle work at =Detroit, Mich.= We have given much of the letter, -for it shows vividly how much individual growth oftentimes is due to -the thoughtful reading of good books. The writer says of the circle: -“Nine persons met on October 1st, and formally organized. The growth -both in numbers and interest was small during the first month, but -continuing, we have held up to date twenty-one meetings, at which two -hundred and twenty-two persons have been present; we keep a record -of each evening’s work, and also a visitors’ list, trying to have a -visitor each evening, which has generally ended in a new member. We open -with singing, responsive reading, roll call with quotations, literary -exercises, question box, Round-Table. For the first three months we were -obliged to use ‘Gospel Songs,’ but, thanks to Miss Kimball, we now have -the Chautauqua song books and are learning to enjoy them. By unanimous -consent the responsive service consists of a selection of Scriptures -by the leader, each member bringing her Bible. It has been our aim to -conduct ‘Pansy’ Circle on as near the Chautauqua principle as possible; -now for a few results. At the commencement of this season a neighbor -was induced to visit the circle, with the promise of exemption from -questions, etc. To-day that lady is a member of the general Circle, -and an active member of the local, and from formerly being in such ill -health that she was in a fair way of losing her mind, she has now quite -recovered, and it is due to the C. L. S. C. Another member, who does not -profess religion, was offered a copy of Ingersoll’s works, by a fellow -workman, but it was refused, with the statement that he had a better -book to read, which proved to be Walker’s ‘Philosophy of the Plan of -Salvation.’ That book has done wonders, bringing into active Christian -life several hitherto backward ones. Another member told me that having -lacked educational advantages, and feeling the need of them, she made it -a subject of prayer, but for a long time seemed to have no answer, until -an apparently accidental call on a friend discovered to her the C. L. -S. C., and now she is one of our most enthusiastic members. There are -many other cases worthy of mention, where the C. L. S. C., working like -leaven, transforms individuals into active factors in life’s warfare. -It is indeed a glorious cause, and I am never weary of sounding its -praises. We are a household altogether Chautauquan, singing the songs -with our children; indeed, we have a six months’ old girl who will not be -quieted by me unless I sing ‘The Winds are Whispering,’ and our boy looks -anxiously forward to the time when he can join the Circle. May your life -be spared to see the ingathering from the grand Idea.” - -About the middle of last February six ladies and one gentleman met at -the house of a lady interested in the C. L. S. C. workings, to see if a -circle could not be started in =Markesan, Wis.= It was not until March -11 that they had a regular working meeting. They call the circle the -“Climax,” and now have fourteen enthusiastic regular members, and five -local members. Shakspere day was observed with an interesting program, -consisting of roll call, response to be a gem of thought from Shakspere, -a biographical sketch of his life, a paper on his eccentricities, songs, -and several readings. - -Monona Lake Assembly has aroused enthusiasm for the C. L. S. C. work -among very many of its visitors. Another tribute to its good influence -comes from a friend writing of the origin of the oldest circle at =Eau -Claire, Wis.=: “In 1882 one of our circle visited the Assembly at Monona -and came back full of enthusiasm, which resulted in the organization -of a circle. We started with six members. It took us some time to get -acquainted with the method of instruction, and to gain the necessary -discipline for memorizing (we are none of us very young). We have never -increased our original membership, because we found that six who -were congenial could work profitably together. Our circle, with one -exception, visited Monona last summer. We gained a fresh inspiration from -the ‘Round-Table.’ Last fall two other societies were organized, one -consisting of members of the Congregational Church, numbering eighteen, -and professing great pleasure in their work. The other society consists -of young ladies, graduates of the high school. They have a membership of -ten; they feel great satisfaction in the work. They are all young, fresh -minds, and enjoy that advantage over our circle, but they can’t exceed us -in enthusiasm. When the societies multiplied we gave our little society -a name. We are now known as the ‘Alpha Society.’ We often bless good Dr. -Vincent in our hearts for originating and developing the plan of C. L. S. -C. work. I recently met a Chautauquan from a little town of a few hundred -people—=Knapp=. She said: ‘We have only a little circle of six. We are -farmers’ wives, and are very busy, but we do enjoy our reading. We can -see we are doing better work this year than we did last year, so we feel -encouraged.’” - -=Iowa= never fails to send us fresh and interesting items. This month two -circles organized in October of 1883 are reported, one from =Corydon= of -ten members, and another of fifteen members from =Humboldt=. In both the -interest is good and the work growing. - -=Anamosa, Iowa=, has a circle of fourteen now on its second year of -work. The secretary writes: “Our hearts and minds are aglow with genuine -Chautauqua enthusiasm. It has all been full of suggestive life and -interest. We have kept all the Memorial Days, and followed out its -principles and precepts.” At their Longfellow memorial the circle kindly -opened their doors to their friends, hoping by this means to extend -the field of C. L. S. C. work in the town. A well written article in -a local paper on the work done, shows how thoroughly its influence is -appreciated: “When one has passed an evening with such a club, that has -been faithfully kept up year by year, not for social delight but for hard -study of history, philosophy, _belles lettres_ and the evidences of the -Christian religion, he realizes the worth of it and since music, good -music too, is ever added to the mental labor as joint refiner of mind and -heart, he approves the ‘club’ as one of the finest social and literary -organizations that has ever blessed this city.” - -A capital subject for a talk or essay is this, which we find on the -program of the Shakspere exercises at =Shanandoah, Iowa=: “How Shakspere -is regarded by literary men.” - -At =Carthage, Missouri=, a “Chautauqua Anniversary” was recently held by -the two-year-old circle there. Between forty and fifty were present. The -literary exercises were followed by an elaborate supper. The subjects of -the evening’s toasts were the Memorial Days, taking them in order. - -The various local circles of the Chautauqua Literary and Scientific -Circle of =Kansas City, Missouri=, united in a service commemorative of -Shakspere. The church in which the exercises were held was handsomely -decorated for the occasion with flowers and plants, and with three -elegant banners prepared for and presented to the circle in Kansas City -by the Columbus Buggy Company, of Columbus, O. The gift of these was -prompted by the Milton Memorial Services held by these circles several -months since, at which the donors were present. Beside the circles of -Kansas City and the Wyandott circle, a large audience was present to -listen to the exercises. The local circles of Kansas City are the “Kansas -City Circle,” the “Dundee,” the “Central Circle” and the “Clyde Circle,” -the “Ladies’ Forest Avenue Circle,” and a circle on Summit Street. - -In a letter from a circle in =New Orleans, La.=, we find some interesting -points. The circle selects topics for discussions at their meetings. Each -member is required to bring in thoughts, statistics or quotations bearing -upon the subject. Popular topics are taken, as for example, one given at -a recent meeting was “The Higher Education of Women.” The idea is a good -one. Such discussions give an agreeable change from so much historical -and scientific reading. Among their officers they have a chaplain who -conducts the opening exercises of the evening; another excellent plan. -Just now they are meeting a difficulty which comes to many circles. -The writer says: “The majority of the circle are of class of ’85. They -commenced the course as _young_ members, with no outside interests, and -now at their maturity are branching off to their respective callings; one -an ordained Episcopalian minister, in a distant parish; another leaves -this summer to finish a collegiate course for the Presbyterian ministry, -and others go elsewhere, yet we may feel assured, never to lose interest -in the C. L. S. C.” Losing the tried, trusty “stand-bys” of a society -is generally one of the most dangerous trials it goes through. Only a -persistent putting of the shoulder to the wheel will carry it over, but -that _always_ does it. - -From =Cañon City, Col.=, a lady writes: “We have organized a little -circle of about ten members and have worked hard up to this time to -demonstrate to ourselves our interest and determination to prosecute -the studies. For housekeepers who have long been out of the discipline -of students the work pushes us so that we, as yet, have not been able -to read anything additional to the course. One of our number prepares -questions on the lessons and acts as president or referee. These -questions are on slips of paper, and each member draws one, on which to -gather information to report to the class at the next meeting. Enough -to say thus far we enjoy our reading very much, and hope it is but the -beginning of a systematic study, which will end only with life.” - -A friend sending us the program of the Longfellow celebration at -=Durango, Colorado=, writes: “I send you a copy of our Longfellow -program. While it may suggest nothing new as a literary program, it may -be a satisfaction to lovers of the C. L. S. C. to hear that in this new -frontier town of Southwestern Colorado, sandwiched between the Ute and -the Navajo Reservations, the ‘Chautauqua Idea’ has taken root.” One -exercise of the evening we do not remember to have seen before in any -report: “The exercise—quotation guesses—was a pleasant little diversion. -The president distributed slips of paper amongst the members, each slip -containing a line from some one of Longfellow’s poems. Each slip was -numbered, and as the president called the number the member holding -that number would read the sentiment from her slip and finish it in the -language of the poem from which it was taken. The evening’s entertainment -closed with a banquet, and everyone went home feeling better acquainted -with Longfellow and more deeply in love with the C. L. S. C.” - -The pastor of the M. E. Church at =Idaho Springs, Col.=, last fall called -a meeting to organize a club in the interest of good reading. “When the -people came together some friends of the Chautauqua Idea were found; -three or four of them had been regular or local members of the C. L. S. -C., and it was decided that we form a branch of that great home college. -We have a membership of about twenty. We frequently have a half-dozen -visitors, but we do not consider our meetings public; they have been -very interesting, and the interest is unabated. We have adopted various -methods of examination on the required reading, but none seem to us so -good as that of giving to each person present a written question; this -being by him answered is then discussed by any person who so desires. We -strive to be informal, and since we have become acquainted, are able to -express ourselves on the subjects being discussed better than at first. -Since the first of January we have recruited by taking in some desirable -local members, thereby filling the places of those who have dropped out -of the ranks by the pressure of other business. We can see the good -effects of our circle on our little town in many ways already. With one -or two exceptions we belong to the class of 1887; at the end of April, in -our first year, we report ourselves as making good progress.” - - - - -C. L. S. C. TESTIMONY. - - -_Massachusetts._—I want to say for the encouragement of any who urge -objections to the C. L. S. C. course, that I took it up to please my -wife, but ’twas but a short time before I was earnestly reading and -studying to please myself. It seemed quite an undertaking, but, though -we are forty years old, and have four children, we have found time to -keep abreast of the work as carried on by the Circle. We (myself and -wife) are of the class of ’86, and began reading together, but the next -year, ’83, there was a circle formed, and we joined. You would only have -to glance into our sitting room to-night to learn that we are disciples -firm and true in this course and its kindred branches; my wife and myself -reading French History, two older children at the other end of the room -reading the Home College Series, while the two youngest (seven and ten) -are reading the course of the C. Y. F. R. U., and the benefits, the -blessings and the pleasure we gain from all of this can never be counted -in time. We are enthusiastic over the C. L. S. C., because we can see and -feel some of its benefits already. We know the forty minutes a day pays -better interest than any similar time spent in any secular business. We -know its value can not be computed by any known tables. We recommend it -to everybody, and we feel ’twill grow here among us. It is succeeding -everywhere, it must succeed, and must produce good results, for “We study -the Word and the Works of God.” - - * * * * * - -_Massachusetts._—I am quite an invalid, so I take the reading slowly and -in small doses, but I can not begin to tell the good it has done me. - - * * * * * - -_New Jersey._—Life seems to me to have been lifted on a higher plane -since my association with the C. L. S. C. I know I am a better wife, I -love my Christian work better, I am better acquainted with the Master, -and as the intellect is cultivated, the soul is pushed out into greater -depths and heights and breadths. - - * * * * * - -_Pennsylvania._—I enjoy the reading and study more than I can express, -believing that its influence is elevating. I regret that I can not enjoy -the advantages of a local circle. I did try to interest some in my own -neighborhood, but did not succeed. - - * * * * * - -_Pennsylvania._—It is helping me regain what I lost under the pernicious -influence of novel reading. It fills many moments, that would have -been spent in idle dreaming, with rare pleasure in the acquirement of -knowledge. Its purifying influence is making life more real and earnest. -I belong to a small circle numbering six members. Two of the number read -last year, and were instrumental in the organization of the circle this -year. We are all enthusiastic members, meeting regularly each week. We -have real social meetings, with no formality or coldness, and they are a -source of great benefit and enjoyment to us all. - - * * * * * - -_Pennsylvania._—You may send me about twenty-five “Popular Education” -circulars, and the same number of “Spare Minute Course” tracts, and I -will try to aid the C. L. S. C. by distributing them, and speaking a -word for it. I have not been able to do much for it yet, but it has done -a great deal for me. The first year, and up to February of this year, -I did the reading all alone. Sometimes it was very discouraging, but -every month when THE CHAUTAUQUAN came, and I read the letters from other -members, the circles and others, my enthusiasm received an impetus that -carried me on into the next month, and so on through the year. I do not -pretend to keep up with the class. Do not think I had finished over half -the required readings at the close of the year. But, if the only object -of the C. L. S. C. was to have the reading done, I might have done it. -My conception of the “Chautauqua Idea” is growth. It has been a means of -growth to me. I have grown intellectually, morally and spiritually. It -destroyed a taste for light reading, and created an appetite for real -knowledge, giving enlarged views of life and life’s work. - - * * * * * - -_Indiana._—This is my third year of work, and I feel much more zealous -than at the start. No early training can take the place of such a course -as this, yet with a foundation how easy it all appears when we once get -at it. It is wonderful how the interest grows. I go out but little, -my friends find my C. L. S. C. books scattered around when they come -in. At first they attracted little attention, and I failed to create -much interest in them by speaking, but as time goes on and they still -see the same thing they begin to wonder and ask questions, until now -I am frequently asked to explain “the whole plan,” and find willing -hearers. There are four of us in this place who pay the annual fee, but -I succeeded in getting several more to subscribe for THE CHAUTAUQUAN. In -another year I hope we shall have an interesting class. “We four” are not -formally organized, but our sympathy brings us closely together wherever -we meet. I have the complete set of C. L. S. C. books—could not get along -without them. - - * * * * * - -_Wisconsin._—I tried for years, ten years at least, to arrange a course -of reading for myself (before I ever heard of the C. L. S. C., too), that -would be _practical_ and instructive at the same time; though I made many -attempts I always found it impossible to pursue the courses of study I -selected, but I never gave up the effort. My thirst for knowledge has -always been so great I never am happy unless I feel that every day I -have made some improvement, or acquired some knowledge that will be of -lasting benefit. So when I had the opportunity of joining the C. L. S. C. -I hailed it with delight and gratitude, and never think of its founders -without thanking them in my inmost heart for the good it has done, and -the good it promises in the future. - - * * * * * - -_Wisconsin._—These two years of C. L. S. C. work have been the happiest -of my life. Our studies lighten our cares, encourage our Christian faith, -and give the future a bright and encouraging outlook. We see the good -influence even in our children; if they do not fully appreciate, they are -enthusiastic in their admiration of Chautauquans, and are always glad -when it is our turn to have the society. - - * * * * * - -_Missouri._—I presume this year will end my four years’ course; there -are a number of books which I had not the time to read, but I shall keep -on taking THE CHAUTAUQUAN and reading all I can, for my whole soul is in -it, and I have gained more information and practical knowledge through -this systematic course of reading than I have in twice the length of time -before. I think we shall gain members here to the C. L. S. C., and I -shall do all I can. I think we ought to have a strong circle here. I work -in the railroad shops, and I read THE CHAUTAUQUAN to the men nearly every -noon. - - * * * * * - -_Colorado._—I am, like many another member of the C. L. S. C., a “busy -mother,” but I have always been able to find time for my required -reading, and for a good deal more that seemed to be suggested by the -readings. To say the course of systematic reading is a delight to me, is -to but feebly express my appreciation. It is a continual benefit, and an -abiding stimulus to self-culture. The study of astronomy in last year’s -course started me on what has since been the greatest pleasure I have -ever known, that of learning the face of the heavens, till I know the -stars, and really greet them each night as dear, familiar friends. The -air is so clear here, and our evenings so uniformly cloudless, it is a -constant source of enjoyment. - - * * * * * - -_Texas._—I am a lone member, having found no one yet to join me in -reading, yet I prize the course so highly that nothing but necessity -would induce me to relinquish it. Last year, in much physical weakness -and suffering, I partially accomplished the course, and felt a kind -Providence had given me this to turn my mind from gloomy thoughts. How I -wish the young, the middle-aged and the old would give time for the good -thoughts, knowledge and discipline it contains. - - - - -EDITOR’S OUTLOOK. - - -THE C. L. S. C. COURSE FOR 1884-5. - -Students and graduates of the C. L. S. C. will examine with interest -and with much satisfaction the course of study for next year printed -in this number. It does not appeal to the jealousy but to the pride -of the alumnus to know that Alma Mater is providing better things for -the student of to-day than she did for him. Certainly the work of next -year is so constituted as to yield most satisfactory results. It is -neither too wide nor too narrow; neither too deep nor too shallow. It is -admirably arranged, embracing most important and attractive subjects, by -authors of highest qualifications for their work. - -That which impresses us most is the scope and thoroughness of each -department. Let him who has imagined that this work is “smattering” -surface work, scrutinize the single department of Greek in next year’s -study. True, there are not four or six years of drill in translating the -language, but we do not hesitate to say that the student who _studies_ -the works prescribed here will know more of the Greek life and thought -than the average graduate after his six years’ translating. He will also -be able to stand comparison with the latter in his acquaintance with the -Greek literature. Nor is this designed as a criticism of the work done by -the college, but as a word to that particular critic of the C. L. S. C. - -In the department of science the titles of the text-books themselves -indicate that the C. L. S. C. is abreast of the times in repudiating -the absurd notion that science can be learned by the memorizing of -descriptions and definitions. Such titles as “Home Studies in Chemistry,” -“The Temperance Preachings of Science,” and “Studies in Kitchen Science -and Art,” bespeak the scientific method which requires the observation -and arrangement of facts and phenomena by the learner himself. - -We are glad to note the liberal attention bestowed upon our English in -the curriculum of the coming year. “The Art of Speech,” by Dr. Townsend, -“Talks about Good English,” in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, and “Lessons in Every Day -Speech,” by Professor MacClintock, are a quantum of English quite beyond -the fashion of these times. No study has been so inexcusably neglected -by our schools of every grade. Just now there are signs of repentance in -some quarters. President Eliot of Harvard is pleading for its admission -to a place equal with Greek and Latin. If what should be will be, not -many years hence will witness it so. - -Prominent also, as heretofore, is the aim to keep before the C. L. S. -C. both the moral and the religious. No one can read “The Character -of Jesus,” by Bushnell, without mental and moral profit, without the -awakening of a deeper homage of soul for the world’s Redeemer. Then there -is Mrs. Field’s work on that perplexing, every-day question, “How to -Help the Poor.” Bishop Hurst’s “History of the Reformation” is among -the very best works on that eventful period in church history. These -are to be supplemented by the continuance of those well-chosen Sunday -Readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. Beside these classified departments we are -promised a series of articles on miscellaneous subjects, such as Memory, -Self-Discipline, Thinking, Selection of Books, etc. Taken altogether, a -course of study for a year which, faithfully pursued, is an education -in itself. We predict for the C. L. S. C. a year of increased interest, -pleasure and profit. - - -THE WALL STREET TROUBLES. - -The panic in Wall Street has not extended to the whole country in the -same form and intensity as the great crises of 1857 and 1873; but, no -doubt, the effect of the shock at the money center will distribute -itself gradually over the entire country. The country is not any worse -off now than it was at the beginning of May; it is, rather, better off, -because an evil has been uncovered and a remedy applied. We did not -think ourselves on the verge of ruin on the first of May, nor do we now -know that we were. The evil we have discovered in action we knew to -be in existence then. But having been forced to take medicine for the -sickness, we shall experience some inconvenience from the drastic dose. -It is hardly possible to make an 1873 over again. None of the factors -of a great general depression exist (so far as we can see); but the -cure of the speculative disorder, from which the whole economical body -must more or less suffer, may be exasperatingly difficult. All chronic -maladies yield very reluctantly to medical treatment; and our economic -maladies are equally stubborn. The seat of the present trouble is the -organization of railroad property and its management; the principal -owners and managers of railroads are speculators in their own property. -This disorder has existed from the beginning of such property. It is a -twist which the property was born with. It has tortured the patient for -fifty years. And to this date no one has applied any adequate remedy. -Reformers abound, but the patient does not hesitate to call them quacks; -and, denying that there is any serious trouble, it asks to be let alone. - -We can estimate the evil by a comparison of three groups of figures. -Take first the figures which show the cost of railways. Take next the -figures for the nominal capital in stocks and bonds; add the figures -which show net income. It is not necessary here to give the actual -figures in either group. The fact is that the net income is less than a -fair interest on the actual cost of the roads, and perhaps not one per -cent. on the nominal value as shown by capitalization. A road has cost -five millions; the nominal value is twenty millions; the net income is -six per cent. on four millions. Take out a dozen corporations which -are wholesomely managed, and the rest of the companies are, in varying -degrees, bankrupt as to their nominal capitals and unprofitable as to -their actual cost. Speculation trades upon the delusion that the roads -are presently, or in some “sweet by-and-by,” to pay dividends upon all -their capital. To economize this delusion, the speculative owners of the -lines carefully conceal the facts about the condition of their property, -or pour out these facts in a torrent of apparent losses—according as -they themselves are long or short of the property. The real condition -of a railroad property can not be known except when it is bankrupt. At -other times railroad book-keeping is too confusing for average brains, -and exuberant hope makes the future out of the “astonishing growth of the -country.” To remove the railroad property from the sphere of speculative -manipulation is the pressing demand of all legitimate interests vested -in such property. Until this is done this kind of property will be a -squalling baby in the financial household, falling into convulsions -periodically and alarming and distressing the whole family of industries -and investments. - -It is understood that the largest fortunes in the country are made by -magnifying this kind of property. It is known that a panic seldom -strikes its fangs into the manipulator. It is believed that the public -is usually the bitten party in the gambling circle. But in the present -case it is not probable that any but the Wall Street men have much -suffered, or that any fortunes have been made in the street. What has -had to be done is to distribute through the street a large aggregate of -losses incurred since 1881. The sum total exceeds five hundred millions, -according to some statisticians. This sum is divided into two parts: -1st, losses from July 1881 to January 1883, estimated at three hundred -millions; 2nd, losses from January 1883 to May 1884, estimated at two -hundred millions. We mean losses as measured by the fall in market price -of railroad paper of all kinds. It is believed that before 1883 the -public at large had suffered a loss of perhaps two hundred millions, that -since that the said public has had little to do with the Wall Street -market, and that the street (including all the men doing business on the -stock market) has had to distribute a loss of three hundred millions. -It is presumed that the public has, since January 1883, recovered from -its losses, but the street is in the agony of its punishment. It was -inevitable that some of the losses should be thrown on the banks; and -through these losses the panic directly reached the public, in the -double form of impaired confidence and stringency. The country has -borne both evils with good sense. The impairment of confidence did not -become general distrust: the stringency, which for a day or two made -money worth four or five hundred per cent. per annum, passed off in a -week. The fact that the troubles concerned one kind of property only, -and was localized in Wall Street, was quickly understood by the country -at large. The wounded banks were relieved by their neighbors, and the -brokers on whose books the bad balances are found have been left to -settle up their business as they may be able to manage it, while business -in general goes on as before, with, however, a considerable increase of -caution. The first effect of this caution will be depressing. Nor is it -to be denied that considerable depression already existed in legitimate -trades. The trouble is not serious, but it is annoying. At bottom it -is based on an excess of enterprise in a part of the manufacturing and -trading public. Anxious to be rich, they aim at impossible growth in -business. They make certain kinds of goods in larger quantities than the -public will consume them. This trouble may be called over-production or -under-consumption; it does not much matter. Whatever name we give it, the -thing is self-corrective, and involves no large disaster. It compels men -to content themselves with less than they wish, teaches us that we can -not all be millionaires, cuts down our ambition for social importance or -ostentation, but it does not tend toward a crash. It is painful to go -slow when we desire to go fast; but the breaking of bones occurs when -fortuitous combinations permit us to drive on like Jehu. It may be dull, -but it is safe to be dull in the economical world. It is the roaring -activity of prosperous times that makes our financial ruin. - - -SOME POINTS ON THE GENERAL CONFERENCE. - -The General Conference of the Methodist Episcopal Church held in -Philadelphia last May was in several respects remarkable. It was in -the first place a picturesque body for the eye of a moral artist. -The “war horses” of older days were there with the sound stentorian -neigh which one expects to hear at a camp meeting. Probably there were -more of these than in recent sessions of the body. There was William -Taylor from everywhere, Ram Chandra Bose from India, and the venerable -men of a former generation who are called Trimble and Curry. But the -moral picturesqueness of the Conference lay rather in the variety and -independence of young Americans from all sections. There was a very -lively Bear from Wall Street, a still livelier lay preacher from New -Jersey, a choice collection of young pastors from all over Zion, and -a sprinkling of college men and newspaper men, bankers, railroad men -and physicians, ex-generals, ex-chaplains, and farmers. The face of the -body was so variegated and its separate limbs so independent that some -spectators said it was not a body at all because it had no community of -life and no head. Its independence of traditions and its refusal to be -led by anybody added to the picturesqueness of the assembly. Nothing -could be thrust down its throat. It threw all the men who successively -tried to lead it. It voted with reference to an order of ideas and -aspirations which no one can find written down in the press of the -denomination. We believe there was but a single caucus, and that was -a gathering of the colored delegates. It was a piece of most adroit -management. It will probably be the last of that series of caucuses; and -if it had been held half a day sooner, it would have defeated its own -purpose. The white delegates would have defeated anybody who had asked -them to go into a caucus. A very manly and self-respecting independence -of dictation or management was in the air. - -Another striking fact was the form which the independence of the body -took on—the results which it reached. It might be called the Missionary -Reform Conference. From the first it was clear that this branch of church -work would receive a push forward on new lines. The single large debate -of the session was over the proposition to locate a regular bishop -in India. The bishops opposed it vigorously. The special adherents -of “presbyter writ large” opposed it. And yet the measure received a -majority of votes, and was defeated only by “dividing the house” and -getting a lay majority against it to kill a clerical majority for it. -After that defeat by a formal device for distributing a minority so as -to give it veto power, the Conference had its own way. It made Chaplain -McCabe Missionary Secretary, and elected William Taylor a Missionary -Bishop for Africa, and it lifted Daniel Curry, who had led the movement -for an Episcopal residence in India, sheer over the heads of all the -editorial staff and set him down in the chair of the _Quarterly Review_. -Each of these facts means more than meets the eye. Chaplain McCabe is the -prince of collection-takers. The best man in the church to raise money -is set to increasing missionary collections. William Taylor has been a -bishop for thirty years—a bishop _de facto_—he is now bishop _de jure_ -in Africa. We doubt whether he will confine himself to Africa; but it -will certainly require all of Africa to hold him. The Liberian grave-yard -ceases to be the Methodist Africa. Bishop Taylor will lay siege to the -whole continent—the Nile, the Soudan, the Congo, the Cape, as well as -Liberia. Nor is this all. He believes in self-supporting missions, -and will give a great impetus to the movement toward self-directing -independence in all missions. Some time or other a mission must become a -church; that time, many believe, is at hand in India, Africa and Europe. -The reversal of judgment in Dr. Curry’s case is a conspicuous proof of -the independence of the Conference. Eight years ago he was retired from -the _Christian Advocate_ at New York for insubordination. Part of his -offense was a singular freedom of pen on this same subject of missions. -For example, he once wrote (concerning the return visits of missionaries -in the other hemisphere): “We need a few graves of missionaries in -heathen soil,” or words of this significance. The General Conference was -persuaded to vote him out in 1876; but the act emancipated the paper, and -under Dr. J. M. Buckley it is independent in a wider sense than Dr. Curry -ever dared to make it. And now with the burden of seventy-five years -upon him, Dr. Curry succeeds the other venerable Daniel as the editor of -the chief and only universal organ of the denomination. “Whedon on the -Will” will probably cease to be the conspicuous feature of the _Quarterly -Review_, and if it should drop out of the “course of study” for young -ministers, the loss might be a gain. - -The choice of the Conference for new bishops will probably be approved -after some experience. Bishops Ninde and Mallalieu are probably -universally popular selections. Bishops Walden and Fowler are yet to be -approved by the intelligence of the denomination. But from one point of -view the last two are better selections than the former. Bishops Ninde -and Mallalieu have to be seasoned to a life of travel and hardship. They -have lived in the study; and men past fifty (Bishop Mallalieu is 56) -usually break down in the Methodist Episcopacy. The other pair of new -bishops have long been inured to travel; and their physical preparation -for the hard work before them may prove, on trial, that these were -_almost_ the best selections that could have been made. If Ninde and -Mallalieu should soon follow Kingsley, Thompson, and the two Havens, -the effect would probably be to direct the choice of the denomination -in future elections to men accustomed to real itineracy. But, after -all, on that view, or any other proper view, the largest bishop chosen -by the last General Conference is the one who must write “Missionary” -before his title. William Taylor has long been a bishop; his church -has merely recognized, at rather a late hour, a fact which has long -been conspicuous. Whether or not there is a great bishop, or more than -one, among the other group of four remains to be proved by their work. -There is little doubt that the judgment of the Conference was perplexed -in the matter of voting Dr. J. H. Vincent into the Episcopacy, and so -voting him out of that vast work which he supervises as the head of the -Sunday-school organization. His friends will see in the vote of 178 -for bishop, a proof that the Conference wanted him on the platform; -they will see in the fact that for his old place the Conference gave -him 316 ballots—_all but nine_ of its votes—the reason why he was -not made bishop. The figures are in both cases the highest possible -compliment—both votes were complimentary. - - -CHAUTAUQUA OUTLOOK FOR 1884. - -It is fitting that, in this last number of the Chautauquan year, we -should remind our readers that the gathering of our students and teachers -is at hand, and that the opening of the sessions of our schools and -the breaking of silence on our platform are to occur this year under -auspicious circumstances. Our columns afford indications that the -class of this year is unusually large; our correspondence shows that -the interest of the public in our work is enlarging its boundaries; -the program for the sessions is the richest and most attractive ever -furnished. Dr. Vincent has taken great pains in the selection of topics, -teachers and lecturers. Old and tried men and women remain in the force, -and it has been increased by addition of talents approved by excellent -work and good fame in other fields. The Chautauqua Idea is still -peculiarly Chautauquan. No other place or organization does its work. It -is a school for all—a university in which, by joining self-instruction -with the schools and platform of Chautauqua, a man or woman of any age -may pursue knowledge in almost any field with profit and pleasure. The -original impulse to this work of ours was given by providing for the -wants of those who had not good advantages in early life; but it has been -found in the actual work that an arrangement of subjects and lectures -could be made which enables any man to add to his knowledge and quicken -his interest in personal study. It has come to pass that our best patrons -and friends are those who have graduated in other schools, while we -continue to increase the usefulness of Chautauqua for those in whose -behalf it was founded. The success of the “Idea” along the whole line is -not merely a satisfaction; it is a promise and a prophecy. There is every -reason to believe that its broad, philanthropic, refining and elevating -tendencies will continue to develop new methods of giving knowledge to -all. But, of course, a benevolent enterprise like ours depends upon the -sustained interest and enthusiasm of its friends. We are just as liable -to flag in this as in any other benevolent work. It is not carried on -to make money; money is made to carry it on. All the conditions of -failure which must surround an undertaking which has not the force of -self-interest behind it, exist of course in this large and expensive -enterprise. Therefore we may properly remind the friends of Chautauqua -that their patronage and coöperation in many ways are essential still, -and must always be, to its progress. We make these suggestions, not from -any doubt of the fidelity and perseverance of our friends, but, to recall -attention to the fact that the Chautauqua Idea is a philanthropic and not -a commercial one. Chautauqua does not exist to enrich any one, but to -increase knowledge and spread culture in the land. It has no antagonisms, -and need not have, but it can not dispense with the active zeal of its -numerous friends. - -The managers have done their whole duty in making preparations for the -approaching campaign. Let every high private emulate their industry -and zeal. Bring your friends to the Lake. Remember that we want the -coöperation of the sober, thoughtful and earnest people. The Chautauqua -season is not a picnic; it is a season of rest, because a change of -scene and occupation always refreshes mind and body. But our patrons -are expected to bring their heads with them—and their consciences—that -when they return home they may carry back new force and larger power to -influence their neighbors. Chautauqua is ready to receive its pupils and -guests. It has wide arms and a generous heart. The season will be what -its patrons choose to make it. We are confident that they will choose to -make it the best of the series. - - - - -EDITOR’S NOTE-BOOK. - - -The fourth volume of THE CHAUTAUQUAN closes with the present number. In -the month of August we shall issue at Chautauqua the _Assembly Daily -Herald_, with its numbers of invaluable lectures, its racy reports -and varied sketches of Chautauqua life. For the advantage of our -friends we make an attractive combination offer of the fifth volume -of THE CHAUTAUQUAN, and the _Assembly Daily Herald_, for $2.25. See -advertisement. - - * * * * * - -Among the great figures missed at the Republican National Convention -this year was that of ex-Senator Roscoe Conkling. Not having admired him -politically, we are the more free to express our respect and admiration -for the courage with which he declined a seat on the supreme bench, and -the splendid success he is achieving at the bar. A certain intense ardor -which marks him as a man give assurance of still higher success and -permanent fame in his profession. - - * * * * * - -The unveiling of an imposing statue of Martin Luther, in Washington, is -one of the events which reminds us of the granite character of Luther; -and in the same breath set us thinking of the solidarity of humanity. -Luther is a great way from home in Washington, four centuries after his -birth; but he is among his own people and as much alive as he ever was. - - * * * * * - -The cap-sheaf of official negligence is put on in the case of a bank -which wallows for years, perhaps, certainly for months, in insolvency, -and is never in all the time honestly and thoroughly examined by the -various persons whose duty it is to know the facts. - - * * * * * - -“Men were giants in those days.” The five hundredth anniversary of the -death of John Wyclif was celebrated in England in May last. The Bishop of -Liverpool preached, dissenters of all denominations were represented. The -public was told again that Wyclif was the first Englishman to maintain -the supremacy of the Scriptures. The Lord Mayor of London presided over a -great conference, and a fund was founded to print and circulate Wyclif’s -works. After five centuries of all kinds of progress that man’s memory is -still as fresh as a May morning. - - * * * * * - -The State Superintendent in New York has decided that no religious -exercises are in order in public schools. The schools are for all, and -until some common system of religious instruction is agreed upon, there -should be none. This is the substance of the decision, and we can not -help thinking it sound. Religious instruction is amply provided in other -ways; and in order that Protestant and Catholic children may study -together in peace, it seems wisest to let each class be religiously -instructed elsewhere, according to the wishes of their parents. - - * * * * * - -The most effective speech in the late Methodist Episcopal General -Conference was made by a colored delegate, the Rev. Dr. Taylor of -Kentucky. The effectiveness came of the fact that he had not only -considered what he had to say, but also meditated on the best way of -saying it. We are often told that oratory is a lost art. Is it not a -faded art merely because speakers give too little attention to the manner -of their speech? - - * * * * * - -Charles O’Conor, the greatest jury pleader of the century, died in May, -at the age of eighty. Four years before his death, having been very ill, -he had the pleasure of reading the longest obituary notice that any -convalescent ever perused with personal interest. His power over juries -was such that cases were often given up by the other side in advance -of the pleading. He was an Irish Catholic whose warmest friends were -American Protestants. - - * * * * * - -Several additions have been made to the evidence that it does not -destroy women to educate them. Professor Seelye of Amherst is among the -new witnesses. We are at a loss to know why it ever needed testimony. -Professor Seelye gravely says that some hard-worked women students -were carefully examined by a competent woman and found to be perfectly -healthy! When our readers recover from their astonishment let them enter -their girls for the C. L. S. C. - - * * * * * - -The new scheme for registering time seems to encounter a resistance which -in physics is called the _vis inertia_. Most towns of any size—except -the largest cities—still maintain local time. We respectfully hint -to the almanac makers, that they have a great opportunity to spread -intelligence on this subject. It will not be long before all towns within -the meridional divisions will have common time. Why protract the agony of -computing a dozen times a day the differences between several standards -of time in the same community? - - * * * * * - -They continue to find Charley Ross. One was found last month. But each -time it is not the true Charley Ross. What an amount of agony his parents -have suffered! What a mercy were the knowledge that the boy died long -ago! But reflect, too, on the uses of that tragedy. Thousands of children -are watched over with more diligence because that tragedy recurs daily to -the minds of parents as a solemn warning. - - * * * * * - -Psychologic classification is getting into disorder. Sir William Thompson -has defined a “Magnetic Sense,” and a critic of him says: “We might as -well be logical and liberal, and add to the present senses the touch -sense, the self sense, the power sense, the logical sense, and the -psychic, muscular, and electro-magnetic senses.” We suppose it is a wise -thing to be “liberal;” but it is better to be accurate, and this use of -the word _sense_ is not accurate. - - * * * * * - -The nomination by the Chicago Republican Convention of the Hon. James G. -Blaine, of Maine, for President, and Senator John A. Logan, of Illinois, -for Vice President, seems likely to precipitate a political contest over -the tariff. Mr. Blaine and the platform on which he stands speak for -protection, while the opposition will favor free trade. - - * * * * * - -Members of the Class of ’84 who expect to be at Round Lake, N. Y., on C. -L. S. C. Day (Wednesday, July 10), and who wish to receive their diplomas -there, should report to Miss Kimball, at Plainfield, N. J., by July 10. - - * * * * * - -We burn up, in this country, three hundred and fifty-nine hotels in a -year. In the last eight years the aggregate is set down by the National -Board of Underwriters as two thousand eight hundred and seventy-two. Here -is another wound in the economic body through which our life-blood is -pouring in a great stream, and nothing will stanch the wound but a better -moral character in the people. Unsafe buildings are built for the most -part by people who are smart and wicked. - - * * * * * - -All over the country Salvation-army captains, lieutenants and corporals -are getting into trouble, and the organization is falling into disgrace. -The movement may as well be voted a failure. It is, however, the only -religious failure of any importance in the last two decades. In London, -where it is held in vigorous hands by General Booth, it is still a -respectable success; but no one else has been able to work it on a large -scale. Petty successes here and there do not disprove the general rule of -failure. - - * * * * * - -In Baltimore, last month, the fourth floor of a warehouse fell and six -persons lost their lives. Accidents in buildings are becoming far too -numerous. In such cases, as well as in broken banks, we have a proof -that our complex civilization requires a higher grade of conscientious -character—or more of it—than we are producing. Our brains are good -enough; we want better morals. - - * * * * * - -It is reported from Europe that Prince Napoleon and his son Victor are -both “running” for the office of Emperor of France. The office does not -exist at present, and there is no prospect of its being created—the -gunpowder facilities are lacking. But father and son are said to be -quarreling over the matter. If France wants a monarch she now has a -chance to get a gentleman in the person of the Count of Paris, who was -with our army of the Potomac for some months, and has written a capital -book on the civil war in our country. - - * * * * * - -It was a pleasant thing to see the Governor of Pennsylvania taking the -lead in the Methodist General Conference when the resolutions against -polygamy came up for discussion. Governor Pattison was a lay member of -the body, and made a vigorous speech in favor of energetic measures to -suppress this evil. - - * * * * * - -A distinguished Israelite of New York said to a reporter last month -that he expected to see the synagogues opened for religious services on -Sunday. The movement would begin with the religious use of both sacred -days; but it will probably end in the general neglect of the seventh day. -The inconvenience of having a different Sabbath from the rest of the -people is doubtless a great embarrassment to the religious teachers of -the Hebrews. - - * * * * * - -It is a proper prayer, “Remember not against me the sins of my youth.” -But it is as well for young people to remember that human society does -not readily forget our errors. And somebody has said that “God can afford -to forgive when men can not afford to forget.” Perhaps he is not quite -right; to forgive is not to give a man an office or a farm. We have -forgiven all who have wronged us, if we are good Christians, but that -does not oblige us to indorse their notes. - - * * * * * - -An ungracious thing is the fault-finding with Mr. George I. Seney, -because, before the late troubles in Wall Street, he gave away some two -millions of money to philanthropic uses. People who never give away -things seem to think that, having given largely, Mr. Seney should have -rolled himself into a safe nest and remained there. It occurs to us that -no man has a better right to risk his own money than the man who has -acquitted himself generously of his obligations to humanity. We have seen -no proof that Mr. Seney was guilty of even an irregularity in the conduct -of his business, or that he is not able to meet all his engagements. - - * * * * * - -Mr. Ferdinand Ward is the most picturesque and romantic figure in the -late crisis in monetary New York. His success in Wall Street, by which -a poor youth laid his hands on a dozen or more millions of other men’s -money, appropriately climaxed by his enforced visit to the cell formerly -tenanted by William M. Tweed, is a romance of rascality; and yet no -one can tell just how he succeeded in using the cupidity of mankind to -blind their eyes to the plainest principles of finance. The scheme was -simple enough: Loan $70,000 on securities worth $100,000. Then take the -securities to a bank and hypothecate them for $90,000. To a thief the -profit is just $20,000. But the genius lies in concealing the simplicity -of the business. - - * * * * * - -It was not strange that General Grant was deceived by young Ward. No one -supposes that the General is an acute and expert man of business. But -men who ought to be acute and expert men of business—for that is their -calling—were as completely deceived as General Grant. There are always -hindsight philosophers and small-eyed sons of detraction to seize such -an occasion as the late panic to criticise great and good men. General -Grant’s vindication lies in the fact that there are very few moneyed men -in New York whom Ferdinand Ward did not deceive. - - * * * * * - -The zeal with which some persons labor to make benevolence unpopular is -one of the worst manifestations of human nature. Why can not the critics -remember that very few men ever catch the disease of giving away large -amounts of money? So uncommon a disorder ought to be given the benefit of -a corner of that mantle of charity which is usually employed to cover a -multitude of sins. - - * * * * * - -One of the most remarkable statements we have lately seen was made by -the president of a brewers’ convention recently held at Rochester, N. Y. -He said: “Our hope is based on the fact that prohibition can not last -in a progressive state.” We have tried to analyze this “hope,” and the -result is this: A progressive state is one in which the drink-sellers -are powerful enough to overthrow prohibition. _Progress_ has a peculiar -signification in the drink-seller’s dictionary. We are at a loss to -conjecture what truly progressive elements of a population should rise up -to put down prohibition. - - * * * * * - -Among our reformers no class deserves more support than those who seek to -improve the health of mankind. Some of them have exaggerated the value -of this or that means; but the end they seek is a very useful one. We -are coming to agreement on everything but food and sleep. We shall agree -about these by-and-by. Plenty of sleep _in the night_—and wholesome -food _in moderation_—these are two articles of the coming man’s health -creed. The italicised words express the best evidence on the subject of -longevity. A recent writer says that gluttony kills more people—who it -may be said by parenthesis know no better—than tobacco and drink. Eating -too much is the next evil to be reformed; then sleeping too little. - - * * * * * - -One of the beautiful customs of Brooklyn, N. Y., is to have a parade of -the Sunday-school children of all denominations on one of the first warm -days of May. This year fifty thousand children were in line, and the city -kept holiday. The custom would bear transportation to other cities and -towns. - - - - -TALK ABOUT BOOKS. - - -We have a new candidate for the honorable position of expounder and -teacher of English.[E] It is for those who desire to learn, and have no -teacher; for the tens of thousands whose school advantages have been -limited, or mis-improved, and who are now studying out of school, and -seek by self-exertion to acquire the culture and practical knowledge -they need. It will not be found in the technical sense a grammar, but a -series of familiar and most entertaining letters, in which the author -discusses the principles and usage of the English language. The style -is conversational, and remarkable for its perspicuity. The vigorous -sentences are clear as sunbeams, and as purely English as Cobbett -himself. The editor’s well considered and generally incisive notes are -good reading, and add much to the value of the work. - -One of the most able, scholarly and exhaustive commentaries on the New -Testament is now in process of publication by Funk & Wagnalls, New York. -It is a translation, with notes by American editors, of the expositions -and critical analyses of the well known German scholar and exegete, -Heinrich August Wilhelm Meyer. The whole work may require ten or more -volumes of fair size, eight of which are promised during the year. -The one on the “Epistles to The Corinthians”[F] is now before us. As -a philologist Meyer has certainly but few equals, and his grammatical -expositions of the Greek text give evidence of much patient research, -acute discernment, and a thorough comprehension of the subjects -discussed. The work will prove an invaluable aid to all who critically -study the New Testament in the original language, and even lay readers -may, if they will examine, find much that is refreshing in the author’s -incisive criticisms, and clear, concise statements of evangelical -doctrines. - -An ingenious portfolio[G] has been invented by a member of the -Philadelphia bar, for those who may not have studied thoroughly the -laws of thought and composition, yet wish to know how to work up a -subject. On the side of a neat little slate are placed certain typical -questions which are to be applied to the subject of contemplation, and -space is given under each to jot down the points to be considered under -each heading. Thus in one’s pocket may be carried a scientific outline -by which one may classify immediately the scraps of illustration, the -fancies or thoughts which they pick up on any given subject. - -Miss Emily Raymond, of Toledo, has written a very pleasing, -comprehensive, and satisfactory account of the Chautauqua Idea and its -home. This little volume, entitled “About Chautauqua,” is probably the -most complete report yet given of this modern movement. The price of the -book is 50 cents. Address Miss Raymond, 48 Bush Street, Toledo, O. - -A collection of first-class short stories by American authors has been -begun by Charles Scribner’s Sons.[H] They are being gathered from the -great number of stories which have been sent out in the leading magazines -of the country during the last twenty years, and promise to make a -remarkably entertaining collection. Many of the foremost writers of -fiction of the day are in the list of authors. - -The entertaining volume, “Our Famous Women,”[I] will be, we think, a -decided success. Thirty of the prominent women of the times are discussed -most pleasantly in as many easy and appreciative essays. The papers are -not critical or comprehensive, but gossipy, entertaining, and very well -written. One finds in most of them exactly the facts they want about -such favorites as Mrs. Burnett, Louisa M. Alcott, Rose Terry Cooke, -Harriet Prescott Spofford, Mary A. Livermore, etc. As far as possible, -the writers have been wisely chosen from the ranks of the famous women -themselves. The book will be worth a great deal to women who are trying -to win position and a livelihood by their own exertions. Its heroines -are striking examples of what bravery, earnestness, cheerfulness and -faithfulness will do in a life. - -Another volume of Charles Scribner’s Sons’ new edition of “Ik Marvel” -is out. “Rural Studies,” first published in 1867, has been revised and -reissued under the title of “Out-of-Town Places.”[J] The book was not -more timely fifteen years ago than it is now; perhaps it will be even -more useful now, for the last fifteen years have taught us more of beauty -and its uses than we had ever before had time to learn. Mr. Mitchell’s -little book gives many capital suggestions to farmers and owners of -country places about practical improvements. It is not a book for -horticulturists, or for fancy stock or high-art farmers, but it will be -very useful to people who by their own labor and planning are trying to -beautify their homes. - -A good book on etiquette—and, as it often happens, a very ordinary one—is -pretty sure of finding a wide circle of readers in America. A sensible, -reliable guide-book into the mysteries of the best society has lately -been published by the Harpers.[K] We like it. The writer knows exactly -what her readers need and is competent to supply their want clearly and -reliably. What more could be asked of the writer of a book on etiquette? - -Uncle Remus[L] has become the representative of a vanishing type of -American life. It is a matter of congratulation that so much of his -humor, shrewd sense and peculiar dialect has been saved to us in “His -Songs and His Sayings,” a little book which, though we are apt to -consider it merely humorous, really has much material for interesting -study. The aim of the author was as he says: “To preserve the legends [of -the plantation] in their original simplicity, and to wed them permanently -to the quaint dialect—if indeed it can be called a dialect—through the -medium of which they have become a part of the domestic history of every -Southern family.” - - -BOOKS RECEIVED. - -How the Bible was Made. By Rev. E. M. Wood, D.D. Cincinnati: Walden & -Stowe. 1884. - -The Exodus and Other Poems. By Rev. T. C. Reade. Cincinnati: Printed by -Walden & Stowe for the author. 1884. - -Quicksands. From the German of Adolph Streckfuss. By Mrs. A. L. Wister. -Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott & Co. 1884. - -Standard Library: The Fortunes of Rachel. By Edward Everett Hale. New -York: Funk & Wagnalls. 1884. - -Standard Library: Chinese Gordon. By Archibald Forbes. New York: Funk & -Wagnalls. 1884. - -There was Once a Man. A Story. By R. H. Newell (Orpheus C. Kerr). New -York: Fords, Howard & Hurlburt, for Our Continent Publishing Co. 1884. - -A Palace Prison; or, The Past and The Present. New York: Fords, Howard & -Hurlburt. 1884. - -Rapid Ramblings in Europe. By W. C. Falkner. Philadelphia: J. B. -Lippincott & Co. 1884. - -One Thousand Popular Quotations. Compiled by J. S. Ogilvie. New York: J. -S. Ogilvie & Co. - -Ballads and Verses Vain. By Andrew Lang. New York: Charles Scribner’s -Sons. 1884. - -Essays and Leaves from a Note-Book. By George Eliot. New York: Harper & -Brothers. 1884. - -Ragnarok: The Age of Fire and Gravel. By Ignatius Donnelly. New York: D. -Appleton & Co. 1884. - -[E] A Grammar of the English Language in a Series of Letters. By William -Cobbett. With notes by Robert Waters. New York: James W. Pratt. 1883. - -[F] Critical and Exegetical Hand-Book to the Epistles to the Corinthians. -By Heinrich August Wilhelm Meyer, Th.D. New York: Funk & Wagnalls. 1884. - -[G] The Adult Kindergarten; or the Educational Problem Solved, for Public -Life, Private Life, and School Life Uses. By a member of the Philadelphia -Bar. Price, 50 cents. The Townsend Publishing Co., Philadelphia. - -[H] Stories by American Authors. Price per volume, 50 cents. New York: -Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1884. - -[I] Our Famous Women. Hartford, Conn.: A. D. Worthington and Company. -1884. - -[J] Out-of-Town Places, with Hints for their Improvement. By the author -of “Wet Days at Edgewood.” A re-issue of “Rural Studies.” New York: -Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1884. - -[K] Manners and Social Usages. By Mrs. John Sherwood. New York: Harper & -Brothers, Franklin Square. 1884. - -[L] Uncle Remus, His Songs and His Sayings. The Folk-lore of the Old -Plantation. By Joel Chandler Harris. New York: D. Appleton & Co. 1884. - - * * * * * - -=ERRATA.=—On page 544 of the June number of THE CHAUTAUQUAN, for “Henry -VII.,” in Question 3, read Henry VI.; for “1609,” in Question 39, read -1690; for “George IV.,” in the answer to Question 47, and in Questions 48 -and 49, read George III. On page 551, for “from which comes companion,” -read from _comes_, companion. - - * * * * * - -Transcriber’s Notes: - -Obvious punctuation errors repaired. - -Page 559, “comman ding” changed to “commanding” (He is tall and -commanding) - -Page 559, “tresspassers” changed to “trespassers” (immunity from outside -trespassers) - -Page 560, “fir st” changed to “first” (implied in their first belief) - -Page 576, “Musem” changed to “Museum” (the Art Museum) - -Page 576, “Bursa’s” changed to “Bursar’s” (to the Bursar’s office) - -Page 578, repeated word “and” removed (and then ends with) - -Page 582, “Rathhaus” changed to “Rathaus” (the Bremen Rathaus) - -Page 582, “scimeter” changed to “scimitar” (the scimitar-like fins) - -Page 583, “pressage” changed to “presage” (took this for a presage) - -Page 583, “coast of New England, and the other in the waters about” was -originally and erroneously printed at the foot of page 584. - -Page 584, “Calvanistic” changed to “Calvinistic” (her Calvinistic -conscience) - -Page 586, “watchward” changed to “watchword” (“Pantaloons” was the -watchword) - -Page 590, “Xenophen” changed to “Xenophon” (ten thousand Greeks under -Xenophon) - -Page 591, “Brittainy” changed to “Brittany” (reached Morlaix in Brittany) - -Page 597, “cannon” changed to “common” (to be the provision for the -“common defense.”) - -Page 600, “Autonyms” changed to “Antonyms” (A Complete Hand Book of -Synonyms and Antonyms) - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 04, July 1884, -No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1884 *** - -***** This file should be named 55208-0.txt or 55208-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/2/0/55208/ - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |